+ All Categories
Home > Documents > BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Date post: 29-Oct-2015
Category:
Upload: sara-marsh
View: 147 times
Download: 2 times
Share this document with a friend
Popular Tags:
228
Americas Headquarters Cisco Systems, Inc. 170 West Tasman Drive San Jose, CA 95134-1706 USA http://www.cisco.com Tel: 408 526-4000 800 553-NETS (6387) Fax: 408 527-0883 BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide December 1, 2008 Text Part Number: OL-16336-02
Transcript
Page 1: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning GuideDecember 1, 2008

Americas HeadquartersCisco Systems, Inc.170 West Tasman DriveSan Jose, CA 95134-1706 USAhttp://www.cisco.comTel: 408 526-4000

800 553-NETS (6387)Fax: 408 527-0883

Text Part Number: OL-16336-02

Page 2: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.

THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.

The following information is for FCC compliance of Class A devices: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case users will be required to correct the interference at their own expense.

The following information is for FCC compliance of Class B devices: The equipment described in this manual generates and may radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed in accordance with Cisco’s installation instructions, it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in part 15 of the FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

Modifying the equipment without Cisco’s written authorization may result in the equipment no longer complying with FCC requirements for Class A or Class B digital devices. In that event, your right to use the equipment may be limited by FCC regulations, and you may be required to correct any interference to radio or television communications at your own expense.

You can determine whether your equipment is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the Cisco equipment or one of its peripheral devices. If the equipment causes interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures:

• Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops.

• Move the equipment to one side or the other of the television or radio.

• Move the equipment farther away from the television or radio.

• Plug the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the equipment and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.)

Modifications to this product not authorized by Cisco Systems, Inc. could void the FCC approval and negate your authority to operate the product.

The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB’s public domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1981, Regents of the University of California.

NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE.

IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

CCDE, CCENT, Cisco Eos, Cisco Lumin, Cisco Nexus, Cisco StadiumVision, Cisco TelePresence, the Cisco logo, DCE, and Welcome to the Human Network are trademarks; Changing the Way We Work, Live, Play, and Learn and Cisco Store are service marks; and Access Registrar, Aironet, AsyncOS, Bringing the Meeting To You, Catalyst, CCDA, CCDP, CCIE, CCIP, CCNA, CCNP, CCSP, CCVP, Cisco, the Cisco Certified Internetwork Expert logo, Cisco IOS, Cisco Press, Cisco Systems, Cisco Systems Capital, the Cisco Systems logo, Cisco Unity, Collaboration Without Limitation, EtherFast, EtherSwitch, Event Center, Fast Step, Follow Me Browsing, FormShare, GigaDrive, HomeLink, Internet Quotient, IOS, iPhone, iQ Expertise, the iQ logo, iQ Net Readiness Scorecard, iQuick Study, IronPort, the IronPort logo, LightStream, Linksys, MediaTone, MeetingPlace, MeetingPlace Chime Sound, MGX, Networkers, Networking Academy, Network Registrar, PCNow, PIX, PowerPanels, ProConnect, ScriptShare, SenderBase, SMARTnet, Spectrum Expert, StackWise, The Fastest Way to Increase Your Internet Quotient, TransPath, WebEx, and the WebEx logo are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the United States and certain other countries.

All other trademarks mentioned in this document or Website are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (0807R)

WiMAX and Mobile WiMAX are trademarks of the WiMAX Forum.

Any Internet Protocol (IP) addresses used in this document are not intended to be actual addresses. Any examples, command display output, and figures included in the document are shown for illustrative purposes only. Any use of actual IP addresses in illustrative content is unintentional and coincidental.

BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide © 2008 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Page 3: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

C O N T E N T S

About This Document ix

Purpose ix

Revision History ix

Terms x

x

C H A P T E R 1 Safety 1-1

Information to User 1-2

Battery Precautions 1-3

UL & NEC/CEC Regulations for the BWX 8305 Basestation 1-3

C H A P T E R 2 Regulatory 2-1

For Australia 2-1

C H A P T E R 3 Overview 3-1

3.1 Scope of this Guide 3-1

3.2 How to Use This Guide 3-1

3.3 Cisco WiMAX Documentation 3-2

3.4 BWX 8305 Basestation Components 3-5

3.5 Beamforming 3-7

C H A P T E R 4 I&C Process 4-1

4.1 The Big Picture 4-1

4.2 Planning, Preparation and Pre-Configuration 4-2

4.3 Pre-installation 4-3

4.4 Installation 4-4

4.5 Commissioning 4-5

4.6 Cut-Over 4-6

C H A P T E R 5 Pre-installation 5-1

5.1 Personnel & Tools 5-1

5.2 Project Plan 5-1

iiiBWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Page 4: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Contents

5.3 RF Coverage Prediction Map 5-1

5.4 Site Candidate Evaluation 5-2

5.5 Interference Analysis 5-2

5.6 Site Design & Regulatory 5-2

5.7 Network Architecture Plan 5-2

5.8 RF Cable Selection 5-3

5.9 Bill of Materials (BoM) 5-3

5.10 Acquire Materials, Documents & Forms 5-3

5.11 Confirm AAA, BWG, and Backhaul Network Availability 5-3

5.12 Confirm FTP & BWX EMS Server Readiness 5-3

5.13 Confirm Mounting Rack or Outdoor Enclosure Availability 5-4

5.13.1 Accessibility 5-4

5.14 Confirm Power & Grounding Readiness 5-4

5.14.1 Power Requirements 5-4

5.14.2 Grounding Requirements 5-5

5.14.3 Lightning Protection 5-5

C H A P T E R 6 Installation 6-1

6.1 Inventory 6-1

6.2 WiMAX I&C Closeout Tool 6-2

6.3 BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Installation 6-3

6.3.1 Description 6-3

6.3.2 Handling the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna 6-5

6.3.3 Power & Grounding 6-6

6.3.4 Antenna Seperation 6-8

6.3.5 Rooftop Antenna Placement Tool 6-12

6.3.6 Set the Downtilt 6-13

6.3.7 Antenna Orientation 6-15

6.3.8 Record Cable Loss and BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Data in the Closeout Tool 6-16

6.3.9 Connect Bundled Cables to BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna 6-18

6.3.10 Sweep the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna 6-19

6.4 BWX 8305 Basestation Installation 6-25

6.4.1 Overview 6-25

6.4.2 Housing 6-26

6.4.3 Power & Grounding 6-26

6.4.4 Install Basestation Unit 6-29

6.5 Connect BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System 6-29

6.5.1 Overview 6-29

ivBWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 5: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Contents

6.5.2 Install the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System 6-32

6.6 Complete the BWX 8305 Installation 6-38

6.6.1 Test the Backhaul Connection 6-38

6.7 Install Access Services Network Gateway (ASN-GW) & Broadband Wireless Gateway (BWG) Software 6-38

6.8 Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA) Server Installation 6-39

C H A P T E R 7 Commissioning 7-1

7.1 Install the Element Management System (EMS) 7-1

7.1.1 ‘Setup the ‘Test’ EMS 7-1

7.1.2 Setting Up Direct Communications Software 7-2

7.1.3 Install the BWX EMS Software and Starting & Configure the BWX EMS Server 7-3

7.2 Add and Configure Broadband Wireless Gateway (BWG) 7-6

7.3 Add and Configure a BWX 8305 Basestation 7-7

7.3.1 Minimum System Configuration Requirements 7-7

7.3.2 Add a BWX 8305 Basestation 7-8

7.3.3 Configure a BWX 8305 Basestation 7-11

7.4 Power Up and Provision the BWX 8305 Basestation 7-28

7.4.1 Prerequisites 7-28

7.4.2 Initial Bootup 7-29

7.4.3 Provision the BWX 8305 Basestation 7-36

7.5 Calibration 7-38

7.5.1 What it Means to Calibrate 7-38

7.5.2 Types of Calibration 7-38

7.5.3 Calibration Procedure 7-39

7.6 Add, Configure, Modify and Delete Subscriber Stations (SSs) & Use Related Applications 7-46

7.6.1 Overview 7-46

7.6.2 Types of SS’s 7-46

7.6.3 Add, Configure, Modify and Delete an SS 7-48

7.6.4 Install the BWX Modem Diagnostic Tool 7-49

7.6.5 BWX WiMAX Diagnostic Tool Operation 7-52

7.7 BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System Verification 7-54

7.8 RF Verification Procedure 7-55

7.8.1 Purpose 7-55

7.9 Customer BWX EMS Server 7-59

7.10 Location (FTP) Test 7-60

7.10.1 Purpose 7-60

7.10.2 Setup & Procedure 7-60

vBWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 6: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Contents

7.10.3 Acceptance Criteria 7-61

7.11 Drive Study Test 7-62

7.11.1 Purpose 7-62

7.11.2 Setup & Procedure 7-63

7.11.3 Pre-process the Drive Study Data 7-65

7.12 Export BWX EMS Database 7-66

7.12.1 Create Text Files 7-66

7.12.2 Update Closeout Tool 7-68

7.13 Back Up BWX EMS Database 7-69

7.14 Photograph Installed Equipment 7-70

C H A P T E R 8 Closing Out the Site 8-1

8.1 Documents, Files & Forms 8-1

8.2 Photographs & Drawings 8-2

8.3 Site Closeout Checklist 8-3

A P P E N D I X A Rectifier/Battery Backup Suppliers A-1

Suppliers List A-1

A P P E N D I X B Cisco Recommended Tools B-1

Vendor Contact Information B-2

Agilent B-2

A Systems, Inc. B-2

A P P E N D I X C RF Coverage Prediction Map Example C-1

A P P E N D I X D Site Candidate Evaluation Form D-1

A P P E N D I X E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis Guidelines E-1

Before You Start E-1

Overview E-1

Required Equipment E-2

Spectrum Analyzer Settings E-2

Frequency Domain Test E-2

Time Domain Test E-8

Test Configurations E-10

Interference Sweep Procedure E-16

Frequency Domain (Max-hold) Test Procedure E-17

viBWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 7: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Contents

Time Domain Test Procedure E-20

Frequency Domain Interference Sweeps Analysis E-22

Time Domain Interference Sweeps Analysis E-24

A P P E N D I X F BWX 8305 Basestation Outdoor Enclosure Manufacturers F-1

General F-1

Manufacturers List F-1

A P P E N D I X G Closeout Tool Form & Procedure G-1

Closeout Tool Form G-1

Closeout Tool Procedure G-2

Steps G-2

A P P E N D I X H BWX Antenna Channel Filter Installation Procedure H-1

Overview H-1

Required Tools H-1

Channel Filter Installation Procedure H-2

Remove TTA Module H-2

Install Channel Filter H-4

A P P E N D I X I Guidelines for Painting a Cisco Antenna I-1

Disclaimer I-1

Special Word Usage & Acronyms I-1

Guidelines for Painting a Cisco BWX Basestation Antenna I-2

BWX Basestation Antenna Materials I-2Paint/Primer Types I-2

Paint Application I-2

A P P E N D I X J High-Powered BWX Basestation Antenna J-1

A P P E N D I X K BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner (3400 to 3625 MHz) K-1

Regulatory K-2

Physical Installation K-3

Operation K-4

Cable Loss Consideration K-5

Calibration K-5

Maintenance K-5

viiBWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 8: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Contents

A P P E N D I X L Software Upgrade Procedures (Example) L-1

Software Upgrades L-1

Software Upgrade Behavior L-2

Planning L-2

Upgrade Procedures L-2

GL O S S A R Y

viiiBWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 9: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

About This Document

PurposeThis document provides a Cisco qualified BWX Mobile WiMAXTM Installation & Commissioning Technician or Field Engineer with instructions to properly install a BWX 8305 Basestation (BS). The scope includes the BS, BWX Basestation Antenna, connection points for the BXW 8303 Basestation Timing System, power and grounding, the backhaul network, the Access Services Network-Gateway (ASN-GW) & Broadband Wireless Gateway (BWG), and all cabling. It also includes acceptance testing procedures.

Warning For safety and compliance reasons, the installation and configuration described in this document should be attempted only by persons who have completed appropriate training and achieved proper technical certifications regarding the use and support of the applicable products. Incorrect installation, configuration and/or service may lead to damage to the product(s) and/or risk of personal injury, and may void your product warranty and/or entitlement to support services. You, the customer, are responsible for obtaining and maintaining any required regulatory licenses, following appropriate safety procedures, and providing adequately trained staff to perform any installation, configuration and service of the products described herein.

Revision History

Date Revision/Version Contributors Editor Comments

070131 C/1.0/pv1.1 GSS, PLM, Engineering, PM

B. Boles Release 4.5.2-5.2.0

070730 D/1.0 Same as above B. Boles, S. Redfoot

Commercial Release 6.0

070930 E/1.0 Same as above B. Boles, S. Redfoot

GA Release 6.1

080201 F/1.0 Same as above B. Boles, Commercial Release 6.2.7

080324 -/01 Same as above M. Cox Commercial Release 6.2.7. Changed the book’s title and part number. Also changed Navini terminology to Cisco terminology.

ixBWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 10: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

About This Document

TermsThe information in this document pertains to the BWX Mobile WiMAX system. In this document and all customer documents as of this release, when referring to the BWX Mobile WiMAX Basestation, the term “BS” is used.

9.22.08 -/02 D. Wolf, R. Perry, P. Blain, D. Bennett

J. Carrasco Preliminary Release 7.0 added information regarding changes made in release 6.2.16, 6.2.19, 6.2.3x and 7.0

12.1.08 -/02 D. Wolf, R. Perry, P. Blain, D. Bennett

J. Carrasco Commercial Release 7.0

Date Revision/Version Contributors Editor Comments

xBWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 11: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

BWX 8305OL-16336-02

C H A P T E R 1

Safety

Warning This document provides a Cisco qualified BWX Mobile WiMAX Installation & Commissioning Technician or Field Engineer with instructions to properly install a BWX 8305 Basestation (BS). Installations performed by non Cisco qualified specialists will void warranties, and could damage equipment and/or cause bodily injury.

To optimize safety and expedite installation and service, read this document thoroughly. Follow all warnings, cautions, and instructions marked on the equipment and included in this document. To aid in the prevention of injury and damage to property, cautionary symbols have been placed in this document to alert the reader to known potentially hazardous situations, or hazards to equipment or procedures. The symbols are placed before the information to which they apply. However, any situation that involves heavy equipment and electricity can become hazardous, and caution and safety should be practiced at all times when installing, servicing, or operating the equipment.

Caution Equipment damage or performance impacting.

Warning Could cause personal injury or otherwise be hazardous to your health

Cisco expressly requires that when using Cisco electronic equipment always follow the basic safety precautions to reduce the risk of electrical shock, fire, and injury to people or property.

1. Follow all warnings and instructions that come with the equipment.

2. Do not use the equipment while you are in a bathtub, shower, pool, or spa. Exposure of the equipment to water could cause severe electrical shock or serious damage to the equipment.

3. Do not allow any type of liquid to come in contact with the equipment. Unplug the equipment from the power source before cleaning. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Do not use any soaps or liquid cleaners.

4. Follow all airport and FAA regulations when using the equipment on or near aircraft.

5. Only operate the equipment from the type of power source(s) indicated in this manual (for Subscriber Station (SS) equipment: 110/220 VAC, 60/50 Hz; for BS equipment: +24 VDC, - 48 VDC, or 100/240 VAC). Any other type of input power source may cause damage to the equipment.

6. Power the SS equipment using only the AC power cord provided, and in accordance with the instructions specified in the User Guide.

1-1 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Page 12: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 1 SafetyInformation to User

7. Do not use a frayed or damaged power cord. Do not place the power cord where it can be stepped on or tripped over.

8. Do not touch wires where the insulation is frayed or worn unless the equipment has been disconnected from its power source.

9. Do not overload wall outlets, power strips, or extension cords. This can cause serious electrical shock or fire.

10. Do not place the equipment on an unstable surface. It can fall and cause injury or damage to the equipment.

11. Do not disassemble the equipment. Removing covers exposes dangerous voltages or other risks and also voids the warranty. Incorrect reassembly can cause equipment damage or electrical shock. Only an authorized repair technician should service this product.

12. Do not expose the equipment to extreme hot or cold temperatures.

13. Do not use the equipment under the following conditions:

– When the equipment has been exposed to water or moisture.

– When the equipment has been damaged.

– When the power cord is damaged or frayed.

– When the equipment does not operate properly or shows a distinct change in performance.

Warning The BS is a Radio Frequency transmitter. It is required to comply with FCC and local country RF exposure requirements for transmitting devices. A minimum separation distance of 2 meters or more must be maintained between the antenna and all persons during device operations to ensure compliance with the FCC’s and the local country’s rules for Radio Frequency Exposure. If this minimum distance cannot be maintained, exposure to RF levels that exceed the FCC’s and the local country’s limits may result.

Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules and local country rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Information to UserThe BS has been authorized as a radio frequency transmitter under the appropriate rules of the Federal Communications Commission. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by Cisco could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

1-2BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 13: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 1 SafetyBattery Precautions

Battery Precautions

Note This section applies to the batteries used as part of the Battery Backup (BBU) solution. Cisco does not provide the batteries for the BBU, but a list of vendors can be found in Appendix A of this document.

Warning To reduce risk of injury or fire, follow these instructions when handling the battery.

1. Risk of explosion is possible if the battery is replaced with one not recommended by Cisco.

2. Do not dispose of the battery in a fire. They may explode. Check with the local codes for battery disposal guidelines.

3. Do not open or mutilate the battery. The battery contains substances that are toxic, corrosive, or harmful to humans. If battery substances come in contact with the skin, seek medical help immediately.

4. Do not attempt to recharge the battery by any means except per the instructions in this manual.

5. If using an optional internal battery, remove the battery from the equipment if the equipment is not going to be used for a long period of time. The battery could leak and cause damage to the equipment.

6. Exercise care when handling the battery to prevent shorting the battery with conducting materials such as bracelets, rings, and keys.

7. Store the battery pack in a dry place, 0 to +40 degrees Celsius.

8. Dispose of used batteries according to environmental guidelines.

UL & NEC/CEC Regulations for the BWX 8305 Basestation1. The BS must be installed in accordance with NEC/CEC Articles 800/810/830.

2. As a minimum, all DC power leads and bonding/grounding straps shall be 6 AWG copper conductors.

3. GPS, RF, and power/data cables in excess of 140 feet in length must have protective devices installed that are UL listed to UL 492, UL497A or UL497B, UL497C, and UL1449.

4. Lightning protection is strongly recommended. If used, the lightning protection devices must comply with UL497.

5. When - 48 and + 24 VDC input power are used, the BS must be connected to a power supply/rectifier that is IEC 60950-1 certified (UL listed to UL60950-1 in North America) and have a ground SELV output.

6. Ethernet connections require a UL497B listed protection device to be installed between the BS and the first network device.

7. All power and ground conductors must be mechanically supported to avoid strain of the wires and connection points.

8. A UL listed disconnect device, such as a circuit breaker or fuse, must be installed between the power supply and BS chassis connections.

1-3BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 14: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 1 SafetyUL & NEC/CEC Regulations for the BWX 8305 Basestation

9. Power-interconnect wires between the power supply/rectifier and the BS unit must have heat shrink tubing applied over the barrel of the terminal lugs after crimping the wire. A picture is provided in the “Installation” section of this manual.

10. External power source / supply considerations for the - 48V and + 24V BS chassis:

a. An external method of disconnecting each of the DC power Load/Return lines to the BS chassis is required, either through fuse+disconnect device(s) or a dual-pole breaker. The fuse/breaker rating must be minimum 10% higher than that of the BS Chassis breaker but shall not exceed 70A.

b. The external DC power source, if current limited, shall have the limit set-point configured higher than the BS Chassis breaker rating.

c. The external supply "Return" and the BS chassis shall be bonded to a common Earth ground. The BS Chassis has an external ground lug provided.

d. Do not remove protective earth connection before disconnecting the BS from the DC power supply.

Warning AC Power Cord Warning labels for Nordic Countries In Finland: “ Laite on liitettv suojamaadoituskoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan ” In Norway: “ Apparatet má tilkoples jordet stikkontakt ” In Sweden: “ Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag ”

1-4BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 15: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

BWX 8305OL-16336-02

C H A P T E R 2

Regulatory

Cisco BWX 8305 Basestations (BS) meet the following regulatory requirements:

• FCC Class A

• CE Mark

• EN55022 Class A

• CISPR22 Class A

• UL 1950

• IEC60950/EN60950 (ETSI)

• CSA C22.2-950

Cisco Subscriber Stations (SSs) meet the following regulatory requirements:

• FCC Class B

• CE Mark

• EN55022 Class B

• CISPR22 Class B

• UL 1950

• IEC60950/EN60950 (ETSI)

• CSA C22.2-950

For Australia1. The Service Provider must have a License issued by ACMA to operate this equipment. This

equipment should have been set up by the manufacturer to meet the technical requirements of said License and should be so maintained.

2. The BS installation at the site must be tested for EMR in accordance with the standard “Radio Communications (Electromagnetic Radiation - Human Exposure): 2003 and also the mandated standards therein”.

2-1 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Page 16: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 2 RegulatoryFor Australia

This is an example of the regulatory label affixed to the bottom of each BS unit. It provides identification information and appropriate regulatory approvals for that unit.

Note The professional installer may want to inspect the labels before installation, as thereafter his view of them may be obstructed. The information on the label is to be entered in the Closeout Tool.

2-2BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 17: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

BWX 8305OL-16336-02

C H A P T E R 3

Overview

3.1 Scope of this GuideThis document was created specifically for the BWX 8305 Basestation (BS), which allows Service Providers to service users with Mobile WiMAX technology.

WiMAX is a standards-based, Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing Access (OFDMA) technology. The procedures in this document are non-frequency specific. This Guide serves as the instructions for all BWX 8305 BS installations.

3.2 How to Use This GuideProperly installing and commissioning a BS into commercial operation begins with planning. Cisco advises skills-certified Installation & Commissioning Technicians to review this entire document and its referenced material at the beginning of a successful deployment.

Cisco is serious about ensuring your success. In fact, Cisco does not warranty its hardware if the BS has not been deployed by a Cisco skills-certified Installation & Commissioning Technician. To install and commission a BS, you will need a standard toolkit, as well as Cisco-specific tools, software, documentation, and forms that are explained in this guide.

Some procedures described in this guide are optional because they depend upon a particular configuration or Service Provider preference. If you are not certain whether or not you should perform an optional task, please feel free to contact your account representative or Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for assistance. Unless specified as optional, assume the procedure or task must be completed.

3-1 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Page 18: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 3 OverviewCisco WiMAX Documentation

3.3 Cisco WiMAX DocumentationTable 3-1 is a complete list of all documents and forms referenced in this guide. Cisco WiMAX documents are maintained on a LiveLink web page. When you completed your skills certification/qualification, you should have received your login instructions. If not, please contact the Cisco BWBU WiMAX Documentation team by emailing [email protected]. Refer to the following link for access to the appropriate LiveLink web page:

BWBU_Documentation:

https://tools.cisco.com/cws/livelink?func=ll&objid=4353291&objaction=browse

Note that for some components in the WiMAX Profile C configuration, this guide refers to other Cisco documentation [for example, the Access Services Network Gateway (ASN-GW)]. When those components are referenced, a link to the www.cisco.com site is provided.

Please make sure you have access to all necessary documentation prior to beginning the installation. Some documents and forms are software- or hardware-level sensitive. Always ensure you have the correct version of documents related to the system you are installing.

Table 3-1 Cisco WiMAX Documentation

Title of Document or Form Where to Find It Cisco Part Number

Release Notes for BWX Mobile WiMAX Release 7.0

LiveLink Site: BWBU_Documentation>Standard By Request Only Documents>7.0 Standard by Request Documents

OL-17836-01

Installation Planning Guide LiveLink Site: BWBU_Documentation>Standard By Request Only Documents>7.0 Standard by Request Documents

OL-16328-02

BWBU WiMAX Documentation Roadmap LiveLink Site: BWBU_Documentation> STANDARD_DOCS>7.0 Standard Documents

OL-18211-01

WiMAX RF Planning Guide LiveLink Site: BWBU_Documentation>Standard By Request Only Documents>7.0 Standard by Request Documents

OL-16333-02

IP Network Planning Guide LiveLink Site: BWBU_Documentation>Standard By Request Only Documents>7.0 Standard by Request Documents

OL-16329-02

VLAN Implementation Guide LiveLink Site: BWBU_Documentation>Standard By Request Only Documents>7.0 Standard by Request Documents

OL-16314-02

3-2BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 19: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 3 OverviewCisco WiMAX Documentation

BWX Mobile WiMAX Migration Planning Guide

LiveLink Site: BWBU_Documentation>Standard By Request Only Documents>7.0 Standard by Request Documents

OL-16311-02

BWX Mobile WiMAX Overview Manual LiveLink Site: BWBU_Documentation> STANDARD_DOCS>7.0 Standard Documents

OL-16317-02

BWX Mobile WiMAX Configuration Guide LiveLink Site: BWBU_Documentation>Standard By Request Only Documents>7.0 Standard by Request Documents

OL-16313-02

Configuring WiMAX Subscriber Stations Using Cisco Access Registrar (CAR)

LiveLink Site: BWBU_Documentation>Standard By Request Only Documents>7.0 Standard by Request Documents

OL-17837-01

BWX EMS Software Installation Guide LiveLink Site: BWBU_Documentation>Standard By Request Only Documents>7.0 Standard by Request Documents

OL-16309-02

BWX EMS Config CLI Reference Manual LiveLink Site: BWBU_Documentation>Standard By Request Only Documents>7.0 Standard by Request Documents

OL-16306-02

BWX EMS Overview Manual LiveLink Site: BWBU_Documentation> STANDARD_DOCS>7.0 Standard Documents

OL-16308-02

BWX EMS Alarm Resolution Reference Manual

LiveLink Site: BWBU_Documentation>Standard By Request Only Documents>7.0 Standard by Request Documents

OL-16305-02

BWX EMS Diagnostic Tools Guide LiveLink Site: BWBU_Documentation>Standard By Request Only Documents>7.0 Standard by Request Documents

OL-16307-02

BWX 110 Desktop Modem User Guide LiveLink Site: BWBU_Documentation> STANDARD_DOCS>7.0 Standard Documents

OL-16319-02

BWX 120 PCMCIA ModemUser Guide LiveLink Site: BWBU_Documentation> STANDARD_DOCS>7.0 Standard Documents

OL-16321-02

Table 3-1 Cisco WiMAX Documentation

Title of Document or Form Where to Find It Cisco Part Number

3-3BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 20: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 3 OverviewCisco WiMAX Documentation

BWX 210 Desktop Modem User Guide LiveLink Site: BWBU_Documentation> STANDARD_DOCS>7.0 Standard Documents

OL-16322-02

BWX Modem Diagnostics Tool (NavDiag) User Guide

LiveLink Site: BWBU_Documentation>TIER 1 & 2 Technical Support Docs>7.0 Tier 1 & 2 Technical Support Docs

OL-17840-02

BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner User Guide

LiveLink Site: BWBU_Documentation>TIER 1 Installation & Commissioning Docs>7.0 Tier 1 Installation & Commissioning Docs

OL-16336-02

Rectifier/Battery Backup Suppliers Appendix A, “Rectifier/Battery Backup Suppliers”

OL-16336-02

Cisco Recommended Tools Appendix B, “Cisco Recommended Tools”

OL-16336-02

RF Coverage Prediction Map Appendix C, “RF Coverage Prediction Map Example”

OL-16336-02

Site Candidate Evaluation Form LiveLink Site: BWBU_Documentation>TIER 1 Installation & Commissioning Docs>7.0 Tier 1 Installation & Commissioning Docs

Copy of front sheet shown in Appendix D, “Site Candidate Evaluation Form”

OL-16336-02

RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis Guidelines

Appendix E, “RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis Guidelines”

OL-16336-02

BWX 8305 Basestation Outdoor Enclosure Manufacturers

Appendix F, “BWX 8305 Basestation Outdoor Enclosure Manufacturers”

OL-16336-02

WiMAX I&C Closeout Tool Form & Procedure

LiveLink Site: BWBU_Documentation>TIER 1 Installation & Commissioning Docs>7.0 Tier 1 Installation & Commissioning Docs

Copy of front sheet shown in Appendix G, “Closeout Tool Form & Procedure”

OL-16336-02

TTA Channel Filter Installation Procedure Appendix H, “BWX Antenna Channel Filter Installation Procedure”

OL-16336-02

Table 3-1 Cisco WiMAX Documentation

Title of Document or Form Where to Find It Cisco Part Number

3-4BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 21: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 3 OverviewBWX 8305 Basestation Components

3.4 BWX 8305 Basestation ComponentsA Cisco BWX Mobile WiMAX system provides wireless broadband access to a core network, typically to the Internet or to any local or wide area network (LAN/WAN). When a Service Provider has established BSs in a given coverage area, the subscriber connects a BWX 110 or BWX 210 Desktop Modem to their computer (or inserts a BWX 120 PCMCIA Modem into their laptop) to access the network without the need for a professional installer.

This is what Cisco refers to when it says its system is “zero-install®”: no truck rolls, no professional installation schedule for the consumer. In fact, some Service Providers have their subscribers pick up their Modems at retail stores, or, in some cases, simply mail the Modems to the subscribers. The subscriber Modem is generally referred to as Subscriber Station(SS). The SSs can be Desktop Modems that attach via an Ethernet cable to the user’s PC, or they can be Wireless PC Cards that insert in the PCMCIA slot on a laptop computer.

In Release 7.0 Cisco offers three Subscriber Stations: the BWX 110 Desktop Modem, the BWX 210 Desktop Modem, and the BWX120 PCMCIA Modem Card. The BWX 110 Desktop Modem covers a 2 MHz frequency range and comes with a Liquid-crystal Display (LCD) front panel, that shows signal status, while the BWX 210 Desktop Modem covers a 5 MHz frequency range, has no LCD display and is simply switched on/off. The BWX 120 PCMCIA plugs into laptops for true portability to change locations easily, where coverage is available.

The entire BWX Mobile WiMAX system (Figure 3-1) has four main components: one or more Basestations, Subscriber Stations (SSs, also referred to as Modems), the Element Management System (EMS), and the Broadband Wireless Gateway (BWG). The BS portion of the system consists of the BWX 8305 Basestation, BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System, and the BWX Basestation Antenna.

Guidelines for Painting Cisco Antenna Appendix I, “Guidelines for Painting a Cisco Antenna”

OL-16336-02

High-Powered BWX Basestation Antenna Appendix J, “High-Powered BWX Basestation Antenna”

OL-16336-02

Software Upgrade Procedures Appendix L, “Software Upgrade Procedures (Example)”

OL-16336-02

Table 3-1 Cisco WiMAX Documentation

Title of Document or Form Where to Find It Cisco Part Number

3-5BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 22: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 3 OverviewBWX 8305 Basestation Components

Figure 3-1 BWX Mobilw WiMAX System Components

The BS performs the conversion of RF signals to digital signals for packets transmitted uplink (SS to BS), and converts digital signals to RF signals transmitted downlink (BS to SS). The BS interfaces with the BWG and either directs traffic to/from the BWG (residential service) or tags the traffic to route to/from a private network (Business/Enterprise service). The BWX Antenna is the antenna that is mounted on a tower, rooftop, or other structure. The BS is available as a BWX 8305 Basestation or as a BWX 2305 Basestation. The BWX 8305 has an BWX Antenna with 8 antenna elements, while the BWX 2305 has 2 individual dipole antennas.

Note The BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System is required for WiMAX Basestations.

The BS uses a Global Positioning System (GPS) antenna, connected to a BWX 8303 Basestation Timing unit. The BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System (formerly known as External GPS Unit, EGU) is mandatory for BSs in all WiMAX deployments starting with Release 7.0 and subsequent releases.

For network deployments, the BS with BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System is the only supported configuration in WiMAX deployments for Release 7.0 and subsequent upgrades. Warranty and ongoing TAC support on the BS only covers BSs deployed with the supported configuration. Existing customers having BSs deployed with built-in GPS must order and install the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System as a prerequisite prior to performing software upgrade to Release 7.0 and subsequent releases. One BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System supports up to three BSs at a cell site. Installation of the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System must be performed by qualified personnel to preserve warranty for the BS at the same site.

For WiMAX deployments, an accurate timing system as the source of synchronization is a requirement for the BS to function properly. The BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System provides this timing source to the BS.

The maximum throughput varies by Model type and RF channel conditions.

3-6BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 23: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 3 OverviewBeamforming

The EMS is a set of software applications that the Service Provider uses to configure, communicate with, and manage all the system elements directly related to the Broadband Wireless Access system. EMS provides a single point for managing BWG-toBS, BWG-to-EMS, BS, and SS communications in a WiMAX network.

The EMS is an IP-based element manager designed in a Server-Client relationship and runs on either Windows or Solaris Operating Systems. Most Service Providers use the Client EMS Configuration & Alarm Manager (CAM) application to interface with the system. All of the functions that can be performed through the CAM can also be performed through a Command Line Interface (CLI), which is a common computing language across platforms.

3.5 BeamformingCisco BWX 8305 Basestation antennas contain 8 elements (Figure 3-2), with a gain of 16 dB in the panel configuration. Their combined effect is to concentrate the downlink data into a beam with maximum gain at the location of each target SS (Figure 3-3).

Similarly, in the uplink the data transmitted by each SS is received by the 8 antenna elements with different phases due to the differences in propagation distance from an SS to each antenna element. The contributions from an SS are added up coherently after adjusting their phases for maximum gain. This effect, which we call beamforming, is equivalent to having up to 18 dB of additional gain in the downlink and up to 9 dB additional gain in the uplink. It allows the Cisco BWX Mobile WiMAX system to ate at a much lower power level than would otherwise be necessary for the same results.

Figure 3-2 BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna

3-7BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 24: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 3 OverviewBeamforming

Figure 3-3 Beamforming

The phase of the individual elements is controlled so that their contributions to the EM field add up constructively (thus concentrating the power of the beam) in a particular directionDoubling the number of elements doublesthe concentration of the beamOur antennas have 2 × 2 × 2 = 8 elements

3 + 3 + 3 = 9 dB of gainConcentrate the beam × 2

Concentrate the beam × 2 Concentrate the beam × 2

Concentrate the beam × 2Concentrate the beam × 2

Concentrate the beam × 2 Concentrate the beam × 2Concentrate the beam × 2 Concentrate the beam × 2

3-8BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 25: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

BWX 8305OL-16336-02

C H A P T E R 4

I&C Process

4.1 The Big PictureThe BWX 8305 Basestation installation and commissioning process begins well before equipment is ever shipped and unpacked. This chapter gives you some perspective of all the activities that take place before, during, and after a site is installed. While each company, each network, and each site may be different, the general process described in the flowcharts that follow has been utilized in many successful deployments. Review each chart carefully, referring to the designated reference material and forms provided by Cisco.

Planning & Preparation

Pre-Configuration (EMS & SSs)

On site (Installation)

End

Start

Pre-installation

For each BS

On Site (Commissioning)

Cut-Over

Planning & Preparation

Pre-Configuration (EMS & SSs)

On site (Installation)

End

Start

Pre-installation

For each BS

On Site (Commissioning)

Cut-Over

4-1 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Page 26: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 4 I&C ProcessPlanning, Preparation and Pre-Configuration

4.2 Planning, Preparation and Pre-Configuration

Planning & Preparation Pre-Configuration

Complete Project Plan(Program or Project Manager)

Conduct site survey &complete the Site Candidate

Evaluation Form

Generate theRF coverage prediction map

(RF Engineer)

Complete the Site Design(Site Planner)

Complete theNetwork Architecture design

Network Planning)

Complete theInterference Analysis

Select which cables to use(RF, CAL and GPS)

Complete theNetwork Architecture design

(Network Planner)

Develop the Bill of Materials.Acquire all equipment, materials,

documents, and forms

Install & configurethe “production”

EMS Server & ClientIf not already in place

Add & configure a recordfor each CPE to be used during

the commissioning tests.

Add additional Global Configparameters as required by your

company (if needed)

THE INSTALLER WILL DO ALL THE FOLLOWING

TASKS USING THE TEST EMS. THEN, WHEN THE BS IS UP AND RUNNING AND

ALL THE TESTS HAVE BEEN COMPLETED, THE BS IS

“CUT OVER” TO THE PRODUCTION EMS

Start

Install & configurethe ‘test’

EMS Server & Clienton your laptop

A

Complete Project Plan(Program or Project Manager)

Conduct site survey &complete the Site Candidate

Evaluation Form

Generate theRF coverage prediction map

(RF Engineer)

Complete the Site Design(Site Planner)

Complete theNetwork Architecture design

Network Planning)

Complete theInterference Analysis

Select which cables to use(RF, CAL and GPS)

Complete theNetwork Architecture design

(Network Planner)

Develop the Bill of Materials.Acquire all equipment, materials,

documents, and forms

Install & configurethe “production”

EMS Server & ClientIf not already in place

Add & configure a recordfor each CPE to be used during

the commissioning tests.

Add additional Global Configparameters as required by your

company (if needed)

THE INSTALLER WILL DO ALL THE FOLLOWING

TASKS USING THE TEST EMS. THEN, WHEN THE BS IS UP AND RUNNING AND

ALL THE TESTS HAVE BEEN COMPLETED, THE BS IS

“CUT OVER” TO THE PRODUCTION EMS

Start

Install & configurethe ‘test’

EMS Server & Clienton your laptop

A

4-2BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 27: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 4 I&C ProcessPre-installation

4.3 Pre-installation

Pre-Installation – (for each BS, prior to cell site installation)

Confirm that BS, Antenna,cables, etc. have been delivered to

the cell site

Confirm mounting rack oroutdoor enclosure availability

Confirm the customer backhaul network availability at the site

Confirm that theinput power and grounding

are installed and ready

AT THIS POINT THE RECORD IS READY TO BE ASSIGNED

TO A REAL BS

In the Test EMS,add and configure

a BS Record

Edit and run the RFS script

Obtain BS-specific information:(BTS ID, Name, IP address,Subnet mask, Gateway IP,

Antenna Power, RX Sensitivity, ,etc.)

Obtain Antenna-specific information:

(Azimuth, tilt, elevation, etc.)

In the Test EMS,add and configure

a BWG Record

A

B

4-3BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 28: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 4 I&C ProcessInstallation

4.4 Installation

Installation – (for each BS at the cell site)

NOW YOU CAN POWER UP THE BS FOR THE INITIAL

BOOT!!!

Install surge protectorsin the Antenna

Mount the Antenna on the tower, building, or other structure,

and ground it.

Check content of boxes.Make sure nothing is missing

Check that the Antenna has a printed sheet with losses

measured in the lab and a CD with the RFS electrical parameters

Sweep the bundled and jumper cables and compare with the value in the factory label. Enter the total

from the factory labels in the Closeout Tool Cable Loss tab

Sweep the Antenna and compare with the values in the printed

sheet. Enter the measured results in the

top half of the Closeout Tool RFS & RFS Cable Loss tab

Sweep the Antenna and the cables together and enter the measured results in the bottom half of the Closeout Tool RFS & RFS

Cable Loss tab

Install the lower bus barwith surge protectors

Install the BS unit in themounting rack or outdoor enclosure and ground it

Connect the Main cables fromthe Antenna to the lower bus bar

Connect the Main cables to the surge protectors at the Antenna

If using a combiner, sweep it to determine the associated insertion

loss.Install and connect Combiner.

Connect the 9 jumper cables from the lower Bus bar to the front of the

BS (either directly or through the combiner)

Mount the BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System in the rack and

ground it

Install the GPS antenna

Sweep the GPS cable.

Connect the GPS cableto the GPS antenna and

to the surge protectorin the lower Bus bar

Check the power voltageand connect the BS, BWG,

and BWX 8303 to power

Verify all the BS cables are properly connected and

weatherproofed

Verify the BWX 8303 performance(Power up and lock in)

To run Test EMS, use two straight through

Ethernet cables to connectthe BS Data port to the installer’s

laptop through theEthernet switch

Connect the console port of the BS to the serial port of the Installer’s

laptop and start a Terminal Emulation window

Mount BWG unitAnd boot up

Connect the BS, BWX 8303, BWG, and Server to an Ethernet Switch

Verify access to a AAA server

Verify access to a DHCP server for IP addressing

B

CNOW YOU CAN POWER UP THE BS FOR THE INITIAL

BOOT!!!

Install surge protectorsin the Antenna

Mount the Antenna on the tower, building, or other structure,

and ground it.

Check content of boxes.Make sure nothing is missing

Check that the Antenna has a printed sheet with losses

measured in the lab and a CD with the RFS electrical parameters

Sweep the bundled and jumper cables and compare with the value in the factory label. Enter the total

from the factory labels in the Closeout Tool Cable Loss tab

Sweep the Antenna and compare with the values in the printed

sheet. Enter the measured results in the

top half of the Closeout Tool RFS & RFS Cable Loss tab

Sweep the Antenna and the cables together and enter the measured results in the bottom half of the Closeout Tool RFS & RFS

Cable Loss tab

Install the lower bus barwith surge protectors

Install the BS unit in themounting rack or outdoor enclosure and ground it

Connect the Main cables fromthe Antenna to the lower bus bar

Connect the Main cables to the surge protectors at the Antenna

If using a combiner, sweep it to determine the associated insertion

loss.Install and connect Combiner.

Connect the 9 jumper cables from the lower Bus bar to the front of the

BS (either directly or through the combiner)

Mount the BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System in the rack and

ground it

Install the GPS antenna

Sweep the GPS cable.

Connect the GPS cableto the GPS antenna and

to the surge protectorin the lower Bus bar

Check the power voltageand connect the BS, BWG,

and BWX 8303 to power

Verify all the BS cables are properly connected and

weatherproofed

Verify the BWX 8303 performance(Power up and lock in)

To run Test EMS, use two straight through

Ethernet cables to connectthe BS Data port to the installer’s

laptop through theEthernet switch

Connect the console port of the BS to the serial port of the Installer’s

laptop and start a Terminal Emulation window

Mount BWG unitAnd boot up

Connect the BS, BWX 8303, BWG, and Server to an Ethernet Switch

Verify access to a AAA server

Verify access to a DHCP server for IP addressing

B

C

4-4BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 29: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 4 I&C ProcessCommissioning

4.5 Commissioning

Commissioning – (for each BS at the cell site)

Power up the BS.Change the boot-line parameters to point to the BS record in the

Test EMS.Resume the boot

NOW YOU CAN CUT THE BS OVER TO THE PRODUCTION

EMS

Wait 5 min after boot completes. Make sure that there are no

outstanding alarms and that the BS is stable (not resetting)

Perform 3 full calibrations

Perform the Location Testand the Single Antenna

Element test

Perform the RF Verification

If not successful,troubleshootand repeat

Y

N

If not successful,troubleshootand repeat

Y

N

Perform the Drive Test

Complete the I&C Closeout Tool

Gather all the Closeout documentation files and zip them

Ifnot successful,troubleshoot,

recalibrate and repeat

N

Y

Gather all the Closeout documentation files and zip them

to Operator

Take pictures

C

D

Power up the BS.Change the boot-line parameters to point to the BS record in the

Test EMS.Resume the boot

NOW YOU CAN CUT THE BS OVER TO THE PRODUCTION

EMS

Wait 5 min after boot completes. Make sure that there are no

outstanding alarms and that the BS is stable (not resetting)

Perform 3 full calibrations

Perform the Location Testand the Single Antenna

Element test

Perform the RF Verification

If not successful,troubleshootand repeat

Y

N

If not successful,troubleshootand repeat

Y

N

Perform the Drive Test

Complete the I&C Closeout Tool

Gather all the Closeout documentation files and zip them

Ifnot successful,troubleshoot,

recalibrate and repeat

N

Y

Gather all the Closeout documentation files and zip them

to Operator

Take pictures

C

D

4-5BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 30: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 4 I&C ProcessCut-Over

4.6 Cut-Over

Cut-Over

End

In the Production EMS,import the BS record

(BTS Data Import)

Edit the BS record(Change the EMS IP, BTS IP, subnet mask, and gateway IP

to the correct value for theProduction EMS)

In the Test EMS,export the BS record

(BTS Data Export)

Copy thisBTS Data Export record

ton the computer where the Production EMS was installed

From the Production EMS, Calibrate the BS

Connect the Data port of the BS directly to the Ethernet backhaul

Power up the BS.Change the boot-line parameters

to point to the BS record in the Production EMS.Resume the boot

Connect the console port of the BS to the serial port of the Installer’s

laptop and start a Terminal Emulation window

Backup the Production EMS

D

End

In the Production EMS,import the BS record

(BTS Data Import)

Edit the BS record(Change the EMS IP, BTS IP, subnet mask, and gateway IP

to the correct value for theProduction EMS)

In the Test EMS,export the BS record

(BTS Data Export)

Copy thisBTS Data Export record

ton the computer where the Production EMS was installed

From the Production EMS, Calibrate the BS

Connect the Data port of the BS directly to the Ethernet backhaul

Power up the BS.Change the boot-line parameters

to point to the BS record in the Production EMS.Resume the boot

Connect the console port of the BS to the serial port of the Installer’s

laptop and start a Terminal Emulation window

Backup the Production EMS

End

In the Production EMS,import the BS record

(BTS Data Import)

Edit the BS record(Change the EMS IP, BTS IP, subnet mask, and gateway IP

to the correct value for theProduction EMS)

In the Test EMS,export the BS record

(BTS Data Export)

Copy thisBTS Data Export record

ton the computer where the Production EMS was installed

From the Production EMS, Calibrate the BS

Connect the Data port of the BS directly to the Ethernet backhaul

Power up the BS.Change the boot-line parameters

to point to the BS record in the Production EMS.Resume the boot

Connect the console port of the BS to the serial port of the Installer’s

laptop and start a Terminal Emulation window

Backup the Production EMS

From the Production EMS, Calibrate the BS

Connect the Data port of the BS directly to the Ethernet backhaul

Power up the BS.Change the boot-line parameters

to point to the BS record in the Production EMS.Resume the boot

Connect the console port of the BS to the serial port of the Installer’s

laptop and start a Terminal Emulation window

Backup the Production EMS

D

4-6BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 31: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

BWX 8305OL-16336-02

C H A P T E R 5

Pre-installation

5.1 Personnel & ToolsReference: Appendix B, “Cisco Recommended Tools”

The BWX 8305 Basestation (BS) equipment installation itself normally takes 1-2 people only 2 days1. However, prior to installing the equipment a number of planning, acquisition, and other preparation activities take place. If these tasks are not completed before the installers show up to begin installing, then the deployment may take longer than 2 days. The planning tasks are not detailed in this guide, but information or examples for many of them are referenced and located in the appendices.

5.2 Project PlanCisco provides several options to customers for the work to be done in preparing a site for operation. The customer may have their own installation personnel, or they may hire Cisco or one of its authorized service partners to perform the installation. A project plan document that lays out the work to be done, the objectives of the project, the schedule, the resources required to complete it, and other information pertinent to the deployment needs to be developed.

5.3 RF Coverage Prediction MapReference:

• Appendix C, “RF Coverage Prediction Map Example”

• RF Sales Guide P/N: OL-16330-01

• WiMAX RF Planning Guide P/N: OL-16333-02

As part of determining which BS equipment is needed and where to place the equipment for a successful deployment, an RF Engineer (customer’s, Cisco’s, or service partner’s) will go through the process of studying the RF environment of the candidate sites that the Service Provider has identified. The RF Engineer takes readings and analyzes each site in order to predict what range of coverage may be expected. Coverage predictions take into account Basestation performance capabilities and the Service Provider’s marketing objectives. An example is shown in Appendix C, “RF Coverage Prediction Map Example.”

1. All I&C tasks can be completed by 1 person, but 2 may be desired during commissioning - one to drive and one to run the tests using a laptop computer.

5-1 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Page 32: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 5 Pre-installationSite Candidate Evaluation

5.4 Site Candidate EvaluationReference: Appendix D, “Site Candidate Evaluation Form”

As various deployment sites are being considered, most companies use a form like the one Cisco calls the Site Candidate Evaluation form. The form, when completed properly, helps to ensure that all aspects of planning for the site have been considered. Every site is unique, and the form is filled out for each site. Doing this makes sure nothing is taken for granted or assumed about the site and whether or not it will be a successful deployment site if selected.

Cisco provides the Site Candidate Evaluation form in electronic format. The form includes fields to capture the logistics of the site, GPS coordinates, antenna mount possibilities, power availability, etc. It is from this information that a selected site will be planned and prepared for equipment installation and connections. The main page of the form is displayed in Appendix D, “Site Candidate Evaluation Form.”

This form can be found on the following LiveLink site: https://tools.cisco.com/cws/livelink?func=ll&objid=4353291&objaction=browse.

5.5 Interference AnalysisReference: Appendix E, “RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis Guidelines”

Cisco recommends to Service Providers that they conduct an Interference Analysis of the selected site. The Interference Analysis is performed primarily to assure there is no other radiating equipment in the geographical area that might interfere with the BS operation.

5.6 Site Design & RegulatoryThe site where the BS is going to be installed must be carefully blueprinted to prepare for equipment ordering and installation. Cisco can supply product specifications and drawings to help the customer design the site. More importantly, however, is that the Service Provider of any wireless equipment must be versed in the regulatory requirements for the region. Unless operating in an unlicensed frequency, such as 2.4 GHz, the Service Provider must have a spectrum license (usually from a government regulatory body). The Service Provider is also responsible to see that communications and other regulatory standards and laws will be sufficiently met at this site.

Note WiMAX does not operate in unlicensed bands.

5.7 Network Architecture PlanReference: IP Network Planning Guide P/N: OL-16329-01

The Service Providers Network Administrator or Planner is involved with a deployment from the perspective of integrating the BS, BWG, and AAA seamlessly into the operational network. They have to plan the traffic routing, IP addressing, protocol compatibility, and how they are going to monitor BS, BWG, and AAA operation.

5-2BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 33: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 5 Pre-installationRF Cable Selection

5.8 RF Cable SelectionThe size and type of cables used to install the Basestation affect power loss and calibration range for the transmitter and receiver. The Service Provider must decide which type of cable and connectors they will need and get them ordered. Cisco offers a limited number of cable types & lengths. Service Providers who have cable needs, not offered by Cisco, can purchase these cables form a Cisco approved supplier (Contact your Account Manager for further details). No matter which are chosen, all cables and connectors must meet FCC or other regulatory limits for RF, UL, and NEC/CEC. Selection guidelines are provided by Cisco based upon the frequency band and the length of the cable required between the BS and BWX 8305 Basestation antenna.

Note Use of non-Cisco approved cables can invalidate the warranty.

5.9 Bill of Materials (BoM)Whoever orders the equipment must generate the Bill of Materials (BoM), which is the actual equipment order for manufacturing and shipping to the installation site. Cisco provides the part number and prices, as well as recommendations to assist customers in the correct placement of orders. Normally, the customer will work with their Cisco Account Manager or Cisco authorized partner to complete the BoM.

5.10 Acquire Materials, Documents & FormsOnce ordered, the purchaser has to ensure that everything required for the installation is secured and at the deployment site. Cisco highly recommends inventorying the equipment arrival prior to having installers brought on-site so that they do not have to wait on parts to complete the installation. Also make sure that all necessary documents and forms that are referenced in this guide are available.

5.11 Confirm AAA, BWG, and Backhaul Network AvailabilityVerify that the AAA server, BWG, and Backhaul network are all available for connection. The backhaul connection required for the BS consists of one Ethernet cable connection with RJ-45 connectors for each BS installed. The exact quantity for each connection will depend on the site requirements. These connections need to be made available before installation begins. The Service Provider is responsible for compliance to all regulatory limitations related to the backhaul network and connections.

5.12 Confirm FTP & BWX EMS Server ReadinessThe Service Provider should put into place an FTP server and the BWX EMS Server platform prior to the installation crew’s arrival at site. If the customer’s BWX EMS Server is not available until after installation begins, the crew will use a laptop to perform initial configuration tasks. The FTP server, however, must be in place in order to commission the Basestation.

5-3BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 34: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 5 Pre-installationConfirm Mounting Rack or Outdoor Enclosure Availability

5.13 Confirm Mounting Rack or Outdoor Enclosure AvailabilityReference: Appendix F, “BWX 8305 Basestation Outdoor Enclosure Manufacturers”

If the BS will be housed inside a building, it is typically mounted in a standard 19- or 23-inch rack. Rack adapters are needed to mount the equipment in a standard 23-inch rack. If the BS will be housed outdoors, the Service Provider must select and make ready an outdoor enclosure. The Service Provider can supply an outdoor enclosure from any one of a multitude of vendors. Please refer to Appendix F, “BWX 8305 Basestation Outdoor Enclosure Manufacturers” for recommended manufacturers.

5.13.1 AccessibilityBS equipment is required to be installed in a restricted access location, in accordance with NEC/CEC standards. Only authorized personnel should have access to this equipment.

5.14 Confirm Power & Grounding ReadinessThe BS can be ordered with one of the following power inputs:

• + 24 VDC

• - 48 VDC

• 100/240, 47/63 Hz VAC

The Service Provider is responsible for providing earth grounding and for meeting all regulatory standards related to power and grounding.

5.14.1 Power RequirementsPlease refer to the Technical Specifications for power requirements. When - 48 VDC or +24 VDC input power is used, the BS must be connected to a power supply/rectifier that is IEC 60950-1 certified (UL listed to UL60950-1 in North America) and have a ground SELV output. It must be installed in accordance with NEC/CEC Articles 800/810/830. A UL listed disconnect device, such as a circuit breaker or fuse, must be installed between the power supply and the BS chassis connections.

5-4BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 35: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 5 Pre-installationConfirm Power & Grounding Readiness

Note External power source / supply considerations for the - 48V and + 24V BS chassis: a. An external method of disconnecting each of the DC power Load/Return lines to the BS chassis is required, either through fuse+disconnect device(s) or a dual-pole breaker. The fuse/breaker rating must be minimum 10% higher than that of the BS Chassis breaker but shall not exceed 70A. b. The external DC power source, if current limited, shall have the limit set-point configured higher than the BS Chassis breaker rating. c. The external supply "Return" and the BS chassis shall be bonded to a common Earth ground. The BS Chassis has an external ground lug provided. d. Do not remove protective earth connection before disconnecting the BS from the DC power supply.

5.14.2 Grounding RequirementsThe BS requires an earth ground connection. Grounding from copper point to copper point shall be less than 1 ohm. Grounding from copper point to earth ground shall be less than 5 ohms. All power and grounding conductors must be mechanically supported to avoid strain of the wires and connection points. AWG #6 is used between the equipment and the bus bar, and AWG #2 is required from the bus bar to the earth ground. Always refer to the regulatory standards for power and grounding.

5.14.3 Lightning ProtectionEvery BS automatically comes with Secondary (built-in) lightning protection. The Service Provider should purchase Primary lightning protection (available from Cisco). Lightning protection helps to protect the BWX Basestation Antenna, BS, and RF lines against tower lightning events occurring at the BS. While not absolute, the Primary protection greatly reduces the possibility of damage to the equipment.

Note Cisco does not warrant equipment damaged by lightning (direct or indirect).

Figure 5-1 below shows a BS with both Primary and Secondary surge protection, which is the recommended configuration. In addition to tower lightning events occurring at the BS, lightning events that occur miles away from the BS can generate intense electrical currents traveling over the power and/or backhaul lines and into the BS equipment, damaging it. For this reason, Cisco strongly recommends adding the primary surge protection as well as surge protection devices at the power and backhaul demarcation points.

5-5BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 36: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 5 Pre-installationConfirm Power & Grounding Readiness

Figure 5-1 Primary and Secondary Surge Protection Installed

Note Cisco does not warrant equipment damaged by lightning (direct or indirect).

Digi tal S helf

Rec tifie rs (24 V DC, 60 A)

Frame

GPSAntenna Surge Protectors

Ethe rnet

110/220 VAC60/50 Hz

Demarc . Points

BWX Basestation Antenna

Power Amplifiers

Surge Protectors

Lightning

Ground

AntennaBracket

Primary Surge Protectors(Usewith the CAL Cable and surge protectors everywhere else)

Use"Smart Jack" for surge protection!!!

Rectifi erS urge

ProtectionDev ice

Digi tal S helf

Rec tifie rs (24 V DC, 60 A)

Frame

GPS

GPSAntenna

Secondary (BuiltSurge Protectors

Ethe rnet

110/220 VAC60/50 Hz

Demarc . Points

Power Amplifiers

Secondary (Built

Lightning

Ground

AntennaBracket

Primary Surge Protectors(Usewith the CAL Cable and surge protectors everywhere else)

Use"Smart Jack" for surge protection!!!

Rectifi er

Option 1 Strongly Recommended !

Digi tal S helf

Rec tifie rs (24 V DC, 60 A)

Frame

GPSAntenna Surge Protectors

Ethe rnet

110/220 VAC60/50 Hz

Demarc . Points

Power Amplifiers

Surge Protectors

Lightning

Ground

AntennaBracket

Primary Surge Protectors(Usewith the CAL Cable and surge protectors everywhere else)

Use"Smart Jack" for surge protection!!!

Rectifi erSu rge

P rotectionDev ice

SurgeP rotection

Dev ice

Digi tal S helf

Rec tifie rs (24 V DC, 60 A)

Frame

GPS

GPSAntenna

Secondary (BuiltSurge Protectors

Ethe rnet

110/220 VAC60/50 Hz

Demarc . Points

Power Amplifiers

Secondary (Built

Lightning

Ground

AntennaBracket

Primary Surge Protectors(Usewith the CAL Cable and surge protectors everywhere else)

Use"Smart Jack" for surge protection!!!

Rectifi er

Option 1 Strongly Recommended !

Digi tal S helf

Rec tifie rs (24 V DC, 60 A)

Frame

GPSAntenna Surge Protectors

Ethe rnet

110/220 VAC60/50 Hz

Demarc . Points

Power Amplifiers

Surge Protectors

Lightning

Ground

AntennaBracket

Primary Surge Protectors(Usewith the CAL Cable and surge protectors everywhere else)

Use"Smart Jack" for surge protection!!!

Rectifi erSu rge

P rotectionDev ice

SurgeP rotection

Dev ice

Digi tal S helf

Rec tifie rs (24 V DC, 60 A)

Frame

GPS

GPSAntenna

Secondary (Built – in)Surge Protectors

RFEthe rnet

110/220 VAC60/50 Hz

Demarc . Points

Power Amplifiers

Secondary (Built – in)

Lightning

Ground

AntennaBracket

Primary Surge Protectors(Usewith the CAL Cable and surge protectors everywhere else)

Use"Smart Jack" for surge protection!!!

Rectifi er

CALBWX 8303

Option 1 Strongly Recommended !

Option 1 Strongly Recommended !

Digi tal S helf

Rec tifie rs (24 V DC, 60 A)

Frame

GPSAntenna Surge Protectors

Ethe rnet

110/220 VAC60/50 Hz

Demarc . Points

Power Amplifiers

Surge Protectors

Lightning

Ground

AntennaBracket

Primary Surge Protectors(Use Polyphaser surge protectorswith the CAL Cable and Huber+ Suhnersurge protectors everywhere else)

Additional grounding block needed if main cable run exceeds 250 ft (75 m)

Additional grounding block needed if main cable run exceeds 250 ft (75 m)

Additional grounding block needed if main cable run exceeds 250 ft (75 m)

Additional grounding block needed if main cable run exceeds 250 ft (75 m)

Additional grounding block needed if main cable run exceeds 250 ft (75 m)

Additional grounding block needed if main cable run exceeds 250 ft (75 m)

Additional grounding block needed if main cable run exceeds 250 ft (75 m)

These are notSurge Protectors but N- type/Female to N- type/Femalebulkheadconnectors for grounding

These are notSurge Protectors but N-to N-

connectors for grounding

These are notSurge Protectors but N-to N-

connectors for grounding

These are notSurge Protectors but N-to N-

connectors for grounding

These are notSurge Protectors but N-to N-

connectors for grounding

These are notSurge Protectors but N-to N-

connectors for grounding

These are notSurge Protectors but N-to N-

connectors for grounding

Use"Smart Jack" for surge protection!!!

Rectifi erSu rge

P rotectionDev ice

SurgeP rotection

Dev ice

BWX 8305

Digi tal S helf

Rec tifie rs (24 V DC, 60 A)

Frame

GPSAntenna Surge Protectors

Ethe rnet

110/220 VAC60/50 Hz

Demarc . Points

BWX Basestation Antenna

Power Amplifiers

Surge Protectors

Lightning

Ground

AntennaBracket

Primary Surge Protectors(Usewith the CAL Cable and surge protectors everywhere else)

Use"Smart Jack" for surge protection!!!

Rectifi erS urge

ProtectionDev ice

S urgeProtection

Dev ice

Digi tal S helf

Rec tifie rs (24 V DC, 60 A)

Frame

GPS

GPSAntenna

Secondary (BuiltSurge Protectors

Ethe rnet

110/220 VAC60/50 Hz

Demarc . Points

Power Amplifiers

Secondary (Built

Lightning

Ground

AntennaBracket

Primary Surge Protectors(Usewith the CAL Cable and surge protectors everywhere else)

Use"Smart Jack" for surge protection!!!

Rectifi er

Option 1 Strongly Recommended !

Option 1 Strongly Recommended !

Digi tal S helf

Rec tifie rs (24 V DC, 60 A)

Frame

GPSAntenna Surge Protectors

Ethe rnet

110/220 VAC60/50 Hz

Demarc . Points

Power Amplifiers

Surge Protectors

Lightning

Ground

AntennaBracket

Primary Surge Protectors(Usewith the CAL Cable and surge protectors everywhere else)

Use"Smart Jack" for surge protection!!!

Rectifi erSu rge

P rotectionDev ice

SurgeP rotection

Dev ice

Digi tal S helf

Rec tifie rs (24 V DC, 60 A)

Frame

GPS

GPSAntenna

Secondary (BuiltSurge Protectors

Ethe rnet

110/220 VAC60/50 Hz

Demarc . Points

Power Amplifiers

Secondary (Built

Lightning

Ground

AntennaBracket

Primary Surge Protectors(Usewith the CAL Cable and surge protectors everywhere else)

Use"Smart Jack" for surge protection!!!

Rectifi er

Option 1 Strongly Recommended !

Option 1 Strongly Recommended !

Digi tal S helf

Rec tifie rs (24 V DC, 60 A)

Frame

GPSAntenna Surge Protectors

Ethe rnet

110/220 VAC60/50 Hz

Demarc . Points

Power Amplifiers

Surge Protectors

Lightning

Ground

AntennaBracket

Primary Surge Protectors(Usewith the CAL Cable and surge protectors everywhere else)

Use"Smart Jack" for surge protection!!!

Rectifi erSu rge

P rotectionDev ice

SurgeP rotection

Dev ice

Digi tal S helf

Rec tifie rs (24 V DC, 60 A)

Frame

GPS

GPSAntenna

Secondary (Built – in)Surge Protectors

RFRFEthernet

110/220 VAC60/50 Hz

Demarc . Points

Power Amplifiers

Secondary (Built – in)

Lightning

Ground

AntennaBracket

Primary Surge Protectors(Usewith the CAL Cable and surge protectors everywhere else)

Use"Smart Jack" for surge protection!!!

Rectifi er

CALCALBWX 8303

Option 1 Strongly Recommended !

Option 1 Strongly Recommended !

Digi tal S helf

Rec tifie rs (24 V DC, 60 A)

Frame

GPSAntenna Surge Protectors

Ethe rnet

110/220 VAC60/50 Hz

Demarc . Points

Power Amplifiers

Surge Protectors

Lightning

Ground

AntennaBracket

Primary Surge Protectors(Use Polyphaser surge protectorswith the CAL Cable and Huber+ Suhnersurge protectors everywhere else)

Additional grounding block needed if main cable run exceeds 250 ft (75 m)

Additional grounding block needed if main cable run exceeds 250 ft (75 m)

Additional grounding block needed if main cable run exceeds 250 ft (75 m)

Additional grounding block needed if main cable run exceeds 250 ft (75 m)

Additional grounding block needed if main cable run exceeds 250 ft (75 m)

Additional grounding block needed if main cable run exceeds 250 ft (75 m)

Additional grounding block needed if main cable run exceeds 250 ft (75 m)

Additional grounding block needed if main cable run exceeds 250 ft (75 m)

Additional grounding block needed if main cable run exceeds 250 ft (75 m)

Additional grounding block needed if main cable run exceeds 250 ft (75 m)

Additional grounding block needed if main cable run exceeds 250 ft (75 m)

Additional grounding block needed if main cable run exceeds 250 ft (75 m)

Additional grounding block needed if main cable run exceeds 250 ft (75 m)

Additional grounding block needed if main cable run exceeds 250 ft (75 m)

These are notSurge Protectors but N- type/Female to N- type/Femalebulkheadconnectors for grounding

These are notSurge Protectors but N-to N-

connectors for grounding

These are notSurge Protectors but N-to N-

connectors for grounding

These are notSurge Protectors but N-to N-

connectors for grounding

These are notSurge Protectors but N-to N-

connectors for grounding

These are notSurge Protectors but N-to N-

connectors for grounding

These are notSurge Protectors but N-to N-

connectors for grounding

These are notSurge Protectors but N- type/Female to N- type/Femalebulkheadconnectors for grounding

These are notSurge Protectors but N-to N-

connectors for grounding

These are notSurge Protectors but N-to N-

connectors for grounding

These are notSurge Protectors but N-to N-

connectors for grounding

These are notSurge Protectors but N-to N-

connectors for grounding

These are notSurge Protectors but N-to N-

connectors for grounding

These are notSurge Protectors but N-to N-

connectors for grounding

Use"Smart Jack" for surge protection!!!

Rectifi erSu rge

P rotectionDev ice

SurgeP rotection

Dev ice

BWX 8305 BWX 8305

Surge Protection Strongly Recommended

5 Ohms

5-6BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 37: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

BWX 2305OL-16336-02

C H A P T E R 6

Installation

6.1 InventoryReference: Appendix G, “Closeout Tool Form & Procedure”

The first thing an installer physically does once onsite is to check to see that all equipment and materials have arrived, as well as to make sure all necessary documents and forms are available. This is when the installer will first work with the Cisco Closeout Tool by entering the site information for the BS components. The Closeout Tool is an Excel spreadsheet with linked worksheets and calculations to automate the system deployment information. The Closeout Tool is explained under the next heading in this chapter.

Note The installer and/or customer should keep a copy of the collected data/Closeout Tool form for future reference.

As you inventory the BWX 8305 Basestation (BS) components, check to ensure the following attachments are visible:

• Manufacturing printout sheet attached to the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna, showing the antenna insertion loss or gain values in the transmit and receive direction at the lower, middle, and higher frequencies (Figure 6-1).

• Compact disk (or other media) attached to BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna (Figure 6-1). It contains the antenna configuration data specific to that BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna.

• Manufacturing printout sheet attached to the bundled RF cables (RG-6 or RG-11). This sheet contains the cable loss values for the bundled cable. These values will be entered in the Closeout Tool. These data are specific to each bundled cable.

Do not try to use former values, i.e., from a previous site, for any of the above three items. Each measurement is unique to that piece of equipment and must be entered exactly as stated for this deployment.

6-1 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Page 38: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationWiMAX I&C Closeout Tool

Figure 6-1 Printout Sheet & Compact Disk Attached to BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna

6.2 WiMAX I&C Closeout ToolReference:

• Appendix G, “Closeout Tool Form & Procedure” or

• WiMAX I&C Closeout Tool & Procedure

The Cisco Closeout Tool is a collection of linked forms with spreadsheet formulas used to capture and provide important information for each Basestation deployment. The information captured by this tool is not only used to help verify proper commissioning of the system during acceptance testing of the site, but it is also used for later troubleshooting if there are problems.

Keep the Closeout Tool open on your computer during the installation and commissioning of the system (you can minimize). You will mostly be recording data into the green-colored fields in the various worksheets found in the tool. At this time, select the first worksheet, “Company Info”. Fill in the company name, BS name, and the remaining green fields (Figure 6-2). Fill in the information from the Regulatory Label attached to the bottom of the BS unit.

Later, you will use the “Read BTS Export File (.txt)” button to populate the yellow fields with BSn configuration data that is exported from the EMS into a text file. After you complete all of the green fields, click on “Save Workbook” to save this file. Remember to save the workbook after you make your entries.

6-2BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 39: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationBWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Installation

Figure 6-2 Company Info Worksheet

6.3 BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna InstallationReference:

• Appendix B, “Cisco Recommended Tools”

• Appendix H, “BWX Antenna Channel Filter Installation Procedure”

• Appendix I, “Guidelines for Painting a Cisco Antenna”

Check all regulatory requirements prior to installing the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna.

6.3.1 DescriptionThe BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna is the part of the BSn that contains the Power Amplifiers (PAs), the 8 antenna elements, and, depending on frequency and customer choice, Channel Filters and Low Noise Amplifiers (LNAs). A BWX8305 Basestation Antenna radiates 120 degrees (Figure 6-3). The use of Channel Filters in a BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna is optional. These filters are installed inside the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna, which is shipped separately from the BS.

Company NameSite NameAddressCity,StateZip, Country

NameEmail AddressAddressCity,StateCountryPhone

BTS IDBTS NameBTS Type

Installer NamePhoneDate

Site Location

Contact Information

BTS Configuration

Deployment

40-00xxx-xx Rev 1.8 Version

0

Read B TS Export File (*. txt)

Reset Company Info

Save Workbook

6-3BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 40: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationBWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Installation

Figure 6-3 BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna

Note The 8 element BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna has 6 degrees of fixed electrical downtilt.

6.3.1.1 Filters

In the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna you have the option to:

• 1- Use a Band filter: The Band filter is of the Cavity type. The Channel filter is also of the cavity type but with a Dielectric Resonant Oscillator (DRO) “puck” placed in the cavity to improve performance. Frequently, the words “Cavity filter” are used in conjunction with the Band filter. The functions of the Band filter are two-fold: (1) to shape the out-of-band emission (e.g., L.O. Linkage, harmonics, and other spurious emissions) during transmission in order to meet Federal Communications Commission (FCC) or other regulatory requirements; (2) to provide rejection for close-in interference (e.g., Personal Communication Systems/Advanced Mobile Phone System(PCS/AMPS) and other cellular services, television (TV), and Radar) during the receive period (i.e., improve the receiver selectivity). The Band filter has a wider passband than that of a Channel filter (e.g., BW= 15 MHz separating the Wireless Communications Service (WCS) from Digital Audio Radio Service (DARS) frequencies).

6-4BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 41: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationBWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Installation

• 2- Use a Channel filter: The functions of Channel filter are two-fold: (1) to shape the power amplifier out-of-band emission during transmission in order to meet FCC or other regulatory requirements; and (2) to provide high rejection for close-in jammers during the receive period. The latter improves receiver selectivity. As indicated by its name, the Channel filter operates in a specific limited frequency band (e.g., Bandwidth (BW) = 5 MHz) and has more stringent attenuation requirements. Normally, the attenuation is 15-20 dB rejection for close-in frequencies. Additionally, while a Band filter attenuation drop off is slower than that of a Channel filter, it has much higher attenuation at frequencies removed from the central frequency (e.g., 60 dB).

• 3- Not use a filter at all

If a BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna has Channel Filters installed, it must be operated at a center frequency that exactly matches the center frequency for which the Channel Filters were manufactured; otherwise, the equipment could be damaged. If no Channel Filters are installed, the Service Provider is free to select or change the center frequency of the BS without damaging the equipment.

Note Depending on the country where the system is being used, a Channel filter or a Band filter or no filter may be needed to meet the spectrum requirements of that region. In general, the cost associated with a Channel filter is 3-5 times more than that of a Band filter - a consideration to keep in mind when addressing a deployment for a specific region.

Note If the Channel Filters do not come installed and you have to install them, please refer to Appendix H, “BWX Antenna Channel Filter Installation Procedure” for the procedure to do so.

Note If you are required to paint the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna, for example because of environmental aesthetics, please refer to Appendix I, “Guidelines for Painting a Cisco Antenna.”

6.3.1.2 High-powered BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna

The High-powered BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna unit operates in the 3475 to 3610 MHz range. This antenna is intended for use with an BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner unit (which allows 2 Basestations to share one antenna), but can also be used by a single Basestation to increase capacity. The High-powered BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna yields 3 dB more than the Standard BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna antenna. See Appendix J, “High-Powered BWX Basestation Antenna” for more information on the High-powered BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna, and Appendix K, “BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner (3400 to 3625 MHz)” for information on the BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner

6.3.2 Handling the BWX 8305 Basestation AntennaIt is a good idea to inspect the exterior of the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna for any damage that may have occurred during shipping, prior to placing it at the target site. Each of the antenna elements in the BWX Basestation Antenna are covered by the individual radomes on the panel. At all times handle the antenna carefully. If, during storage, filter replacement, or PA replacement, you must place a panel antenna in a position laying down, make sure it rests flat on at least one inch of plastic foam to prevent damage to the antenna elements.

6-5BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 42: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationBWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Installation

When you are ready to place the antenna into position, it should be lifted using multiple lift points. Place two non-metallic slings around the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna, and attach the slings to the hoist, as shown in Figure 6-4. Never use the radomes to lift, support, or otherwise bear partial or full weight of the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna. Doing so can cause damage to the radomes. Use two ground-anchor lines attached to the lower screws of the mount to steer the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna and prevent it from spinning or swaying in the wind and perhaps hitting the tower or other nearby structures with the radomes.

Figure 6-4 Lifting the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna

6.3.3 Power & Grounding

6.3.3.1 Lightning Protection

Lightning protection information is covered in Chapter 5, “Pre-installation.” Please review that section before continuing with the installation process.

6.3.3.2 Surge arrestors

There are two basic types of surge protectors (devices that block lightning surges and electrical transients) on the RF cables - those that allow a DC current to pass through, and those that block a DC current. The first type (allowing a DC current to pass) contains gas discharge tubes. The arrestors provide bi-directional protection for lightning; they have no designated equipment side or line side. The other type (blocking DC current) has a surge side and a protected side. They are unidirectional and must be installed accordingly.

There are several companies providing surge arrestors. Figure 6-5 shows two examples.

6-6BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 43: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationBWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Installation

Figure 6-5 Examples of RF Cable Surge Arrestors

Note Make sure that the surge protectors are not too large for the weatherproof “boot” on the antenna install.

6.3.3.3 Antenna Ground Bus Bar Installation Procedure

You will install the Antenna Ground Bus Bar on the mounting structure, per accepted Telecom standards and procedures (Figure 6-6). The location is determined during site design and should be close to the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna. Two or more bus bars may be installed per system.

Figure 6-6 BWX 8305 Basestation & Antenna Ground Bus Bars

6.3.3.4 System Ground Wiring

Install the system ground as a single point connection between the system ground bus bars, the BWX 8305 unit, the BWX8305 mounting rack, and the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna. Connect the system ground to earth ground. AWG #6 is used between the equipment and the bus bar, and AWG #2 is used from the bus bar to the earth ground. Always refer to the regulatory standards for power and grounding. Apply anti-oxidant joint compound to all connections (Figure 6-7). Tighten all connections until secure.

MaxInsertion

Loss:0.15 dB

PSX-ME PSX DGXZ+06NFNF-A

(RFS) (BTS) (GPS)

PSX-ME PSX DGXZ+06NFNF-A

(RFS) (BTS) (GPS)

PSX-ME PSX DGXZ+06NFNF-A

(RFS) (BTS) (GPS)

PSX-ME PSX DGXZ+06NFNF-A

(RFS) (BTS) (GPS)

PSX-ME PSX DGXZ+06NFNF-A

(RFS) (BTS) (GPS)

PSX-ME PSX DGXZ+06NFNF-A

(RFS) (BTS) (GPS)

Surgeside

Protectedside

MaxInsertion

Loss:0.15 dB

MaxInsertion

Loss:0.15 dB

PSX-ME PSX DGXZ+06NFNF-A

(RFS) (BTS) (GPS)

PSX-ME PSX DGXZ+06NFNF-A

(RFS) (BTS) (GPS)

PSX-ME PSX DGXZ+06NFNF-A

(RFS) (BTS) (GPS)

PSX-ME PSX DGXZ+06NFNF-A

(RFS) (BTS) (GPS)

PSX-ME PSX DGXZ+06NFNF-A

(RFS) (BTS) (GPS)

PSX-ME PSX DGXZ+06NFNF-A

(RFS) (BTS) (GPS)

Surgeside

Protectedside

Allows DC Current blocks DC Current (GPS protector allows current)

6-7BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 44: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationBWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Installation

Figure 6-7 Apply Anti-oxidant Joint Compound

6.3.4 Antenna SeperationWhen installing multiple BSs in the same geographical area, it is important to allow enough radiation separation so that they do not interfere with one another. Figure 6-8 provides some general guidelines for avoiding adjacent interference. The illustration shows the horizontal and vertical separation in feet and in meters for panel antennas.

Caution There can be no co-location of MC-SCDMA with Mobile WiMAX Basestations. If 2 or more BSs are co-located on the same structure, they must run the same technology or be upgraded in the same maintenance window. Use frequency separation to minimize interference between a MC-SCDMA and Mobile WiMAX Basestation. A reasonable frequency separation is 15 MHz for BSs that are 2 kilometers apart. The exact frequency separation may differ on a case-by-case basis. Therefore, 15 MHz with 2 kilometers between Basestations may not provide enough separation. Refer to the BWX Mobile WiMAX Migration Planning Guide for more information on distance requirements.

Caution All BSs in a network must have the same DL/UL symbol ratio. The default recommended ratio is 32/15. Cisco does not support basestations that use different DL/UL symbol ratios in the same area because they will interfere with each other. Please refer to the BWX EMS Configuration Guide for more information on parameter settings.

6-8BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 45: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationBWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Installation

Figure 6-8 General Separation Guidelines

6.3.4.1 Vertical Separation - Cisco to Another Vendor

The minimum vertical separation between any Cisco BWX 8305 Basestation antenna and another vendor’s antenna is 10 ft. Refer to Figure 6-9.

Figure 6-9 Vertical Separation (Cisco to Other Vendor’s Antenna)

HORIZONTAL SEPARATION (TOP VIEW)

PanelPanel 5 ft(1.5 m)

Panel

3 ft(1 m)

VERTICAL SEPARATION(SIDE VIEW)

5 ft(1.5 m)

Panel

Panel

Panel

120°Panel

Panel-PanelPanel-PanelHorizontalHorizontal VerticalVertical

5 ft (1.5 m)5 ft (1.5 m) 3 ft (1 m)3 ft (1 m)

HORIZONTAL SEPARATION (TOP VIEW)

PanelPanel 5 ft(1.5 m)

PanelPanel 5 ft(1.5 m)

PanelPanel

3 ft(1 m)3 ft

(1 m)

VERTICAL SEPARATION(SIDE VIEW)

5 ft(1.5 m)

Panel

Panel

Panel

120°5 ft(1.5 m)

Panel

Panel

Panel

120°PanelPanel

Panel-PanelPanel-PanelHorizontalHorizontal VerticalVertical

5 ft (1.5 m)5 ft (1.5 m) 3 ft (1 m)3 ft (1 m)

6-9BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 46: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationBWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Installation

6.3.4.2 Vertical Separation – Cisco to Cisco

A minimum of 3 ft separation in the vertical axis is required between any two Cisco antennas (Figure 6-10). This separation is needed to obtain proper and optimum results from each antenna.

Figure 6-10 Vertical Separation (Cisco to Cisco)

6.3.4.3 Horizontal Separation – Cisco to Another Vendor

A minimum of 10 ft horizontal separation is required between a Cisco antenna and another vendor’s antenna (Figure 6-11).

Figure 6-11 Horizontal Separation (Cisco to Another Vendor’s Antenna)

6-10BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 47: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationBWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Installation

6.3.4.4 Horizontal Separation – Cisco to Cisco

A minimum of 3 ft of separation between Cisco Panel antennas is required.

6.3.4.5 No Antenna Zone

If a vertical and horizontal cone extends 15 ft in front of a 120° Panel antenna, this lessens the 10 ft horizontal and vertical requirements for the placement of the antennas (Figure 6-12). By using these lesser requirements, the Service Provider accepts some limitations:

• Signal reflection from the antenna or obstruction

• Shadowing or dead zone in coverage caused by antenna or obstruction

• The amount of reflection and shadowing is affected by the size of the antenna or obstruction

Figure 6-12 No Antenna Zone

6-11BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 48: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationBWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Installation

6.3.5 Rooftop Antenna Placement ToolReference: Rooftop Antenna Placement Tool

This is a picture of the worksheet in the Antenna Placement Tool for a quick visual identification Figure 6-13); this appendix does not include the entire tool. Please use the electronic copy of the tool to datafill the site information. This form can be found on the following LiveLink site: https://tools.cisco.com/cws/livelink?func=ll&objid=4353291&objaction=browse

The Tool is updated periodically. If you are not sure that you have the latest version, please contact Cisco Technical Services and request that the latest version of the tool be sent to you.

Figure 6-13 Rooftop Antenna Placement Tool

BWX Rooftop Antenna Placement Tool

1). Are the measurements in feet or meters? Feet

2). What type of antenna is being used?

3). How many sectors are being used? 1

55.0

For a single sector antenna on a rooftop the actual antenna pattern will extend to ~90° to the left / right of the antenna centerline, although at a reduced signal level relative to the 3dB beam width, If more than 120° of coverage is desired, then d1 should be the farthest distance to the roof edge within +/- 90° of the antenna centerline.

10.0

4). What is the built-in electrical downtilt of the antenna in degrees? -6[See electrical downtilt choices for Cisco supplied antennas](Use a negative number for all entries)

0

(Net Downtilt = Fixed Electrical Downtilt + Mechanical Up/Down Tilt) -6(Negative for a net downtilt and positive for a net uptilt)

5

8

LegendUser input required Calculated Value

Vertical HorizontalRFS8 Panel 5° 120°

RFS2 7° 120°

RFS8 Panel -6°RFS2 0°

Cisco Antenna Beam Widths (3 dB point)

Cisco Antenna Fixed Electrical Downtilt (@ 0 degrees mechanical tilt)

RFS8

17.73 ft

6). The Required Clearance Angle ( a1 ) is the sum of the downtilt + two times half the vertical beam width + 3 extra degrees to allow for any additional downtilt for future network optimization.

4). What is farthest distance (d1) on the roof within the sector antenna's horizontal beamwidth?

7). This is the minimum required antenna height from the rooftop (ht ) necessary to provide sufficient signal clearance

3). What is the height of the obstruction or parapet wall (h1 )?

5). What is the 3dB vertical beam width of the antenna?[See Vertical Beam width choices for Cisco supplied antennas]

4). What is the planned mechanical tilt of the antenna in degrees ?[See RF Planning documents] (+ = uptilt and - = downtilt)

V er tical Beamwidth

2 X hal f the Verti ca l Beam width

M ain BeamCente r Po int

ht

h1d1

a1

Side View

Upper Roof

Lower Roof

top viewSector RFS

Horizontal Beamwidth = 120°(+/ - 60°) from the antenna Azimuth

Antenna Azimuth

d1 = the distance tothe farthest edge of

the roof

6-12BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 49: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationBWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Installation

6.3.6 Set the DowntiltBased on coverage objectives determined by previous RF planning, the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna may need adjusting upward or downward once mounted on the pole, tower, roof, building, or other structure. The panel antenna has a -6° built-in electrical downtilt.

You will use an inclinometer to read the mounted position and to determine what adjustments, if any, need to be made. For example, if the inclinometer reads +2° (uptilt) and you are mounting a panel BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna, the resulting beam has a –4° downtilt (Figure 6-14). The downtilt can be adjusted per the assembly shown in Figure 6-15.

Figure 6-14 Downtilt Adjustment Example

The inclinometer reads +1° (uptilt)

The panel antena has a –6° built in electrical downtilt

The resulting beam has a –5° downtilt

Apparent +1°

Effective –5°

Electrical –6°

Apparent +1°

Effective –5°

Electrical –6°

Apparent +1°

Effective –5°

Electrical –6°

6-13BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 50: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationBWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Installation

Figure 6-15 Downtilt Adjustment Assembly

DowntiltAdjustment

Cover removed to show PAs

6-14BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 51: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationBWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Installation

6.3.7 Antenna OrientationThe magnetic declination, which is the angular difference between observed magnetic north on a compass and geographic (or “true”) north, shifts from year to year. Panel antennas must be oriented appropriately as required by the RF plan.

Adjustments that will need to be made are based on the Magnetic Declination Chart (Figure 6-16), which provides values to correct the compass reading and determine the true geographic East. Always check for the latest chart information, which may be found at the following web address: www.thecompassstore.com/decvar.html.

Since this is not the year 2000 any more, you will want to check this reference chart to learn how your magnetic declination may have shifted since then. Notice that the map measures annual shifts in minutes. Since it takes 60 minutes to equal 1 degree, if you notice that your location has a declination shift of 5 minutes per year, this means it will be another 12 years before your declination adjustment changes by one whole degree.

Figure 6-16 Magnetic Declination Chart – Example

Note It is better to convert the “true” azimuth (which way the antenna should point in the horizontal plane) as required by the RF Plan to the magnetic value that will be read on the compass before sending the installer to the field. This way the installer will go by the reading on the compass, not having to worry about magnetic declination corrections.

Use a compass to determine the magnetic EastUse a Magnetic Declination chart to correct the compass reading and determine the true geographic East

World Magnetic Declination Chart - Year 2000

Unit:Degrees

World Magnetic Declination Chart - Year 2000

Unit:Degrees

6-15BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 52: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationBWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Installation

6.3.8 Record Cable Loss and BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Data in the Closeout Tool

6.3.8.1 RF Cable Sweeps

At this time, sweep each cable (including Cal cable) according to the following procedure.

Step 1 Connect the Signal Generator directly to the Spectrum Analyzer using a barrel connector.

Step 2 In the Signal Generator:

a. Set the Center Frequency to the desired value.

Step 3 In the Spectrum Analyzer:

a. Set the Center Frequency to the same value as in the Signal Generator.

b. Set the Span to 5 MHz.

c. Set both the Resolution Bandwidth and the Video Bandwidth to 100 KHz.

d. Verify that the Sweep is set to "Auto".

e. Press the Amplitude button and rotate the wheel until you can see the peak of the signal.

f. Set the Marker to the peak of the signal.

Step 4 In the Signal Generator:

a. Adjust the level of the signal until you read 0.0 dBm in the Spectrum Analyzer screen.

Step 5 Insert the cable to be measured and read the insertion loss in the Spectrum Analyzer window. Compare the Spectrum Analyzer value to the printed tag that came with the cables. If there is a large discrepancy between the numbers, check the connectors and re-sweep. Repeat the process at the frequencies above and below your center frequency (marked “High” and “Low” on the cable sticker). Sweep all cables and jumpers.

Signal Generator

Spectrum Analyzer

Signal Generator

Spectrum Analyzer

6-16BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 53: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationBWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Installation

Step 6 Manually fill in the values in the WiMAX I&C Closeout form under the “Cable Loss” tab. Fill in RF Cables #1 and #8, as well as the Cal Cable.

Note The figure entered will be the result of adding the bundled cable (antenna to Bus bar) loss with the jumper cable (Bus bar to BWX 8305 faceplate) loss for each path and the Cal cable.

6-17BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 54: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationBWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Installation

6.3.8.2 Enter BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Data

The CD that accompanies the antenna contains an HTML file (under the RFS folder).

Open the WiMAX I&C closeout Tool (should be open from the Cable Sweeps). Click on the “RFS and Cable RFS loss” tab. Press the “Insert RFS data” button. When prompted to open a file, find the HTML file under the RFS folder in the CD, and click “Open”. This will automatically populate the top half of the tab. See Figure 6-17.

Figure 6-17 RFS & Cable Loss (Top Half of Worksheet)

6.3.9 Connect Bundled Cables to BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna

6.3.9.1 Types of Cable

All BS cable connections are made using standard RF coaxial cable. In Figure 6-18 are examples of various coaxial cables sold in the United States. Note that the RG-6 or RG-11 bundled cable contains 8 antenna element cables and a Calibration (“Cal”) cable. Reducing several single cables into one bundled cable makes installation easier and helps eliminate power loss through the cables.

The bundled cable comes with a weatherized boot and 9 N-type connectors in place. At the other end the connectors can be N-type if the cables are to be connected to surge protectors in the bus bar (Primary Surge Protection), or QMA-type connectors if the cables are to be connected directly to the BS (Secondary Protection only). Examples are shown in Figure 6-19. In the first case, N-type to QMA-type jumper cables are needed to connect the surge protectors in the bus bar to the BS.

6-18BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 55: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationBWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Installation

Figure 6-18 Examples of Coaxial Cables

Figure 6-19 Examples of Connectors

6.3.10 Sweep the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna

6.3.10.1 Purpose

Once the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna and bundled RF cables are installed, you must perform a sweep on the mounted BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna and connected cables. These will be swept for power loss associated with both the transmit and receive signal. For this measurement you will need a Cisco proprietary tool called the BWX Basestation Antenna Test Box. The sweep procedure is different for the transmit and receive paths. In all cases you first establish a reference level, then measure the path gain or loss test.

6.3.10.2 Equipment Required

• Spectrum Analyzer (SA)

• Signal Generator (SG)

• Cisco BWX Basestation Antenna Test Box (formerly referred to as the RFS Test Box)

• RF cables and connectors

6.3.10.3 Equipment Setup to Establish a Transmit (TX) Path Reference Level

Follow the setup instructions provided in Figure 6-20 to first determine a reference level.

HELIAX

RG6 RG11

HELIAX

RG6 RG11

RG6 Bundle

M

M

N-type QMA RJ45/RJ48

M

M

N-type QMA RJ45/RJ48 BNC

M

M

N-type QMA RJ45/RJ48

M

M

N-type QMA RJ45/RJ48 BNC

6-19BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 56: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationBWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Installation

Figure 6-20 Setup to Establish a TX Path Reference Level

Interconnect the Signal Generator SG and the Spectrum Analyzer SAusing three segments of N-Type cable and two barrel connectors

In the Signal Generator:Insert a 20 dB attenuator

Set the Center Frequency to the desired value

The Test Boxwill be inserted here

The RFS will be inserted here

20 dBattenuator

SA SG

In the Spectrum Analyzer:Set the Center Frequency to the same value as in the Signal GeneratorSet the Span to 5 MHzSet both the Resolution Bandwidth and the Video Bandwidth to 100 kHzVerify that the Sweep is set to "Auto"Press the Amplitude button and rotate the wheel until you can see the peak of the signal Set the Marker to the peak of the signalThe reading in the Spectrum Analyzer(approx –20 dBm) is your Reference Level

The Test Boxwill be inserted here

The RFS will be inserted here

20 dBattenuator

SA SG

6-20BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 57: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationBWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Installation

6.3.10.4 Procedure to Establish a TX Path Reference Level

For this procedure, you must first establish a reference level. Follow these steps to do so.

Step 1 Set up the equipment, as shown in Figure 6-20, for Signal Generator amplitude and frequency, and for Spectrum Analyzer span, bandwidth resolution, video bandwidth, sweep, and frequency.

Step 2 Connect the Signal Generator to the Spectrum Analyzer using 3 segments of N-type terminated test cable and 2 F-F barrel connectors.

Step 3 Turn on the RF signal.

Step 4 Adjust the Signal Generator signal until the value in the Spectrum Analyzer is approximately –20dbm.

Step 5 Make sure the Test Box is not connected to power.

6.3.10.5 Equipment Setup to Measure TX Path Gain or Loss

Follow the setup instructions provided in Figure 6-21 to measure the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna transmit path gain or loss.

Figure 6-21 Setup to Measure TX Path Gain or Loss

Warning Any time you reconnect the cable, going form the JP-1 QMA connector, located on the topof the RFD Test Box, to one of the RF ports in the ANtenna, make sure to disconnect the RFS Test Box from its power source. Failing to this may cause rapid degradation of the QMA connector in the RFS Test Box, due to DC voltage arc between the center conductor and the outer shield of the QMA connector.

Insert the Test Box and the RFSConnect the SG to JP-2 (test box side),

JP-1 (test box top) to one of the RF ports in the RFS, and the RFS Cal Port to the SA

Switch the Test Box to TX and RFSPower Up the test box (+24 VDC)

Measure gain introduced by this path throughthe RFS (repeat for each RF port)

RFS Insertion Gain = SA Reading+20 dB (i.e. – Reference Level)+ Test Box loss

The loss introduced by the Test Box at different frequencies can be read on this label on the side

Set Test Box toTX RFS SA

SG

CAL

RF

6-21BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 58: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationBWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Installation

Caution Never connect the Cisco BWX Basestation Antenna Test Box to the Calibration (Cal) port on the BS or to other test equipment. The output voltage may destroy the equipment.

Note Be sure to power down the Test Box each time you change cables to sweep. Failure to do so may damage the Test Box.

6.3.10.6 Procedure to Measure TX Path Gain or Loss

Note Do not attempt to sweep the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna while it is on cement or metal, as this can cause reflections that misconstrue the data.

Step 1 Using Figure 6-21 above as a guide, insert the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna and the Test Box.

Step 2 Connect the Signal Generator to the JP-2 on the Test Box side, and JP-1 to one of the RF ports on the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna. Connect the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Cal port to the Spectrum Analyzer.

Step 3 Power up the Test Box.

Step 4 Measure the gain or loss introduced by this path through the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna. Repeat the procedure for each path. Check the SA value to the printed values that accompanied the Antenna. If there is a large discrepancy, check the connections and repeat the sweep.

Step 5 Subtract the loss at the Test Box.

Step 6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5, connecting the cable from JP-1 to the other RF port.

Step 7 Turn off the RF signal. Change the frequency and repeat this process for the High and Low frequencies (matching the printed sheet that came with the antenna).

Step 8 Power down and remove the Test Box.

6.3.10.7 Procedure to Establish the Receive (RX) Path Reference Level

Step 1 Set up the equipment, as shown in Figure 6-20, for Signal Generator amplitude and frequency, and for Spectrum Analyzer span, bandwidth resolution, video bandwidth, sweep, and frequency.

Step 2 Connect the Signal Generator to the Spectrum Analyzer using 3 segments of N-type terminated test cable and 2 F-F barrel connectors.

Step 3 Turn on the RF signal.

Step 4 Adjust the Signal Generator signal until the value in the Spectrum Analyzer is approximately –20dbm.

Step 5 Make sure the Test Box is not connected to power.

6-22BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 59: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationBWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Installation

6.3.10.8 Equipment Setup to Measure the RX Path Gain or Loss

To establish a reference level for the receive path gain or loss, you will connect the Signal Generator to the Spectrum Analyzer using 3 segments of N-type terminated test cable and 2 F-F barrel connectors (Figure 6-22). Later, you will have to subtract the loss introduced by the Test Box. Set the signal amplitude to –20 dBm.

Figure 6-22 Setup to Establish RX Path Reference Level

6.3.10.9 Procedure to Measure the RX Path Gain or Loss

Note Be sure to power down the Test Box each time you change cables to sweep. Failure to do so may damage the Test Box.

Step 1 Insert the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna (RFS) and the Test Box.

Step 2 Using Figure 6-22 as a guide, connect the Signal Generator to the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Cal port, and one of the RF ports on the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna to JP-1 on the top of the Test Box. Connect JP-2 on the side of the Test Box to the Spectrum Analyzer.

Step 3 Power up the Test Box.

Step 4 Measure the gain or loss introduced by this path through the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna. Repeat the procedure for the other path. Check the SA value to the printed values that accompanied the Antenna. If there is a large discrepancy, check the connections and repeat the sweep.

Step 5 Subtract the loss at the Test Box.

Step 6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5, connecting the cable from JP-1 to the other RF port.

Insert the Test Box and the RFSConnect the SG to the Cal Port of the RFS,

one of the RF ports in the RFS to JP-1 (test box top), JP-2(test box side) to the SA

Switch the Test Box to RX and RFSPower Up the test box (+24 VDC)

Measure gain introduced by this path throughthe RFS (repeat for each RF port)

RFS Insertion Gain = SA Reading+20 dB (i.e. – Reference Level)+ Test Box loss

The loss introduced by the Test Box at different frequencies can be read on this label on the side

Set Test Box toRX RFS

Set Test Box toRX RFS

SA

SG

CAL

RF

6-23BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 60: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationBWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Installation

Step 7 Turn off the RF signal. Change the frequency and repeat this process for the High and Low frequencies (matching the printed sheet that came with the antenna).

Step 8 Power down and remove the Test Box.

6.3.10.10 Record BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Data in Closeout Tool

After you have swept the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna TX and RX paths, record the results in the “RFS and Cable Sweeps Information” worksheet in the Closeout Tool form (Figure 6-23).

Figure 6-23 RFS TX & RX Path Gain/Loss

6-24BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 61: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationBWX 8305 Basestation Installation

6.4 BWX 8305 Basestation Installation

6.4.1 OverviewThe BS is a lightweight unit that fits easily into standard Telecom racks. All connectors and indicators on the BS are on the faceplate (Figure 6-24). Inside the unit are two cards: Digital and RF. Note that the two cards inside the BS are not field replaceable. Therefore, if a severe Fault occurs, the entire unit is removed and replaced. The design intent is to cut down on the time it takes to troubleshoot or otherwise have a field support person onsite.

Figure 6-24 BWX 8305 Basestation Faceplate

The Console Port, Ethernet Port, 8 RF Ports, Cal Port, GPS Port, Power, and Grounding connectors are located on the faceplate. There are also five LED indicators at the top middle of the faceplate.

• The Power indicator is lit when the power is on.

• The Booting indicator flashes when the system is booting up, and it turns off when booting is complete. The middle light, the Fault indicator, will flash red if there is a hardware fault, such as operating temperature out of range or an antenna path is not functioning.

• The RF indicator indicates that one or more RF antenna paths are turned on and radiating energy.

• Lastly, the GPS Lock indicator on the far right is lit to indicate that the BS is locked to its timing source - the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System.

At no time should a field person remove the back of the unit or otherwise open it. In fact, doing so may void the warranty.

Cisco recommends 5% spares planning for BS.

ConsolePort

5 LEDs

Data MGMT (not used at

this time)

+24 VDC/40APower Input

(Also available:-48 VDC/30A and

100-240VAC/50-60 Hz/10A)Grounding

Lug

2 Ethernet Ports

RF Ports 4–1

RF Ports8–5

CALPort

BootingPower GPSRFFault

On/OffSwitch

External PreciseClocking Source

10 MHz1 PPS

ConsolePort

5 LEDs

Data MGMT (not used at

this time)

+24 VDC/40APower Input

(Also available:-48 VDC/30A and

100-240VAC/50-60 Hz/10A)Grounding

Lug

2 Ethernet Ports

RF Ports 4–1

RF Ports8–5

CALPort

BootingPower GPSRFFault

On/OffSwitch

External PreciseClocking Source

10 MHz1 PPS

External PreciseClocking Source

10 MHz1 PPS

6-25BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 62: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationBWX 8305 Basestation Installation

6.4.2 HousingReference: Appendix F, “BWX 8305 Basestation Outdoor Enclosure Manufacturers”

The BS can be installed either indoor in a standard 19” or 23” equipment rack, or outside in a climatized cabinet (Figure 6-25). If you are using a 23” indoor rack, you will need mounting adapters.

If you are placing the BS in an outdoor cabinet, be sure to consider solar gain and other environmental factors when determining cooling requirements, filtering, etc.

In either environment, the BS must be installed in a restricted access location, in accordance with NEC/CEC standards. Only authorized personnel should have access to this equipment.

Figure 6-25 Outdoor Cabinet Example

6.4.3 Power & GroundingReference: Appendix A, “Rectifier/Battery Backup Suppliers”

6.4.3.1 Overview

The BS can be ordered with one of the following power inputs:

1. + 24 VDC

2. - 48 VDC

3. 100-240, 47/63 Hz VAC

General power and grounding information were covered in Chapter 5, “Pre-installation.” Please refer there for information about Primary and Secondary surge protection for the BS.

BWX 8305 + Antenna (in Watts)2.3 7002.4 4302.5 7002.6 7003.4 772 (w/H-Antenna)3.5 772 (w/H-Antenna)3.6 772

BWX 8305 (in Watts)2.3 3502.4 3152.5 3502.6 350

3.4 - 3.5 370 (w/H-Antenna)3.6 350

Thermal load equates to how much cooling is neededto cool the Basestation. Multiply this by 3.5 and you will have the BTU rating.

BWX 8305 + Antenna (in Watts)2.3 7002.4 4302.5 7002.6 7003.4 772 (w/H-Antenna)3.5 772 (w/H-Antenna)3.6 772

BWX 8305 (in Watts)2.3 3502.4 3152.5 3502.6 350

3.4 - 3.5 370 (w/H-Antenna)3.6 350

Thermal load equates to how much cooling is neededto cool the Basestation. Multiply this by 3.5 and you will have the BTU rating.

BWX 8305 + Antenna (in Watts)2.3 7002.4 4302.5 7002.6 7003.4 772 (w/H-Antenna)3.5 772 (w/H-Antenna)3.6 772

BWX 8305 (in Watts)2.3 3502.4 3152.5 3502.6 350

3.4 - 3.5 370 (w/H-Antenna)3.6 350

BWX 8305 + Antenna (in Watts)2.3 7002.4 4302.5 7002.6 7003.4 772 (w/H-Antenna)3.5 772 (w/H-Antenna)3.6 772

BWX 8305 (in Watts)2.3 3502.4 3152.5 3502.6 350

3.4 - 3.5 370 (w/H-Antenna)3.6 350

Thermal load equates to how much cooling is neededto cool the Basestation. Multiply this by 3.5 and you will have the BTU rating.

6-26BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 63: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationBWX 8305 Basestation Installation

6.4.3.2 External Power Source / Supply Considerations

Note the following considerations for the - 48V and + 24V BS chassis:

a. An external method of disconnecting each of the DC power Load/Return lines to the BS chassis is required, either through fuse + disconnect device(s) or a dual-pole breaker. The fuse/breaker rating must be minimum 10% higher than that of the BS Chassis breaker but shall not exceed 70A.

b. The external DC power source, if current limited, shall have the limit set-point configured higher than the BS Chassis breaker rating.

c. The external supply "Return" and the BS chassis shall be bonded to a common Earth ground. The BS Chassis has an external ground lug provided.

d. Do not remove protective earth connection before disconnecting the Basestation from the DC power supply.

6.4.3.3 BWX 8305 Ground Bus Bar Installation Procedure

Prior to connecting power and grounding to the equipment, be sure to check all regulatory requirements. Follow accepted Telecom standards and procedures to connect input power and grounding to the BS. The gauge of the wire is determined by the length of the run and by NEC/CEC standards (refer to Regulatory information in the front of this document). Use a 60-amp circuit breaker when running the line. Terminate both of the input power wires and the ground wire with a ¼-inch terminal lug.

Warning Ensure that the power is off before connecting the input power wires to the BS input terminals.

Warning The power supply range must meet specifications for BS components.

Install the rubber gasket into the groove in the surge protector:

a. Install the surge protector in the system ground bus bar with the surge side toward the antenna and the protected side toward the BS.

b. Install the star washer and nut on the top of the surge protector. Torque the nut to 140-150 inch-pounds.

6.4.3.4 Install Jumper Cables

Next, install the jumper cables from the lower bus bar to the Basestation.

6.4.3.5 System Ground Wiring

Install the system ground as a single point connection between the system ground bus bars, the BS unit, the BS mounting rack, and the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna. Connect the system ground to earth ground. AWG #6 is used between the equipment and the bus bar, and AWG #2 is used from the bus bar to the earth ground. Always refer to the regulatory standards for power and grounding. Apply anti-oxidant joint compound to all connections (Figure 6-26). Tighten all connections until secure.

6-27BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 64: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationBWX 8305 Basestation Installation

Figure 6-26 Apply Anti-oxidant Joint Compound

To protect against corrosion, the Installer should apply an anti-corrosive compound to each connection point (Figure 6-27). This is especially necessary for the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna connections due to climate effects. For the power and grounding cables, also look at Figure 6-28 concerning the use of heat shrink tubes.

Figure 6-27 Terminating Power Cables

Figure 6-28 Terminating Grounding Cables

Apply Anti-corrosive UL Listed Lugs Insert LugsKopr Shield

Crimp Cover with electrical tapeor heat-shrink tube

Apply Anti-corrosive

Attach

Apply Anti-corrosive UL Listed Lugs Insert LugsKopr Shield

Crimp Cover with electrical tapeor heat-shrink tube

Apply Anti-corrosive

Attach

6-28BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 65: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationConnect BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System

6.4.4 Install Basestation Unit

Warning Ensure that the power to the BS unit is OFF before installing the unit in a rack or cabinet.

Place the BS unit into a standard 19” or 23” rack or outdoor enclosure. Once installed, go ahead to the next section of this Guide and install the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System. After the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System is installed and its cables swept, you will return to the remaining BS installation. Please note that the BS does not have an air filter option like its predecessor BS.

Caution The RF ports on the BS output a +24 VDC current, which is carried to the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna through RF cables. This DC current may damage test equipment connected directly to the RF ports or to the end of the RF cables at the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna. When connecting test equipment to the output of an RF port, an external DC block may be required. Most signal generators and spectrum analyzers cannot handle DC voltage on the I/O ports. Please, read the caution stickers on the equipment and provide a DC block if the equipment cannot handle over zero (0) VDC.

6.5 Connect BWX 8303 Basestation Timing SystemReference: BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System Operation & Maintenance Manual

Note The BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System is required for WiMAX Basestations.

6.5.1 OverviewThe BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System is a new feature with BWX 8305 Basestations supporting WiMAX certification requirements for high-resolution timing. The ports on the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System provide 1 pulse per second (1 PPS) and 10 MHz source.

For the BS to be WiMAX certified, the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System provides very precise frequency timing to the BS. The BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System receives the timing signal from the GPS antenna and outputs a 1 pulse per second (PPS) signal, along with an extremely accurate (< 0.02 ppm) 10 MHz reference signal that is locked to the GPS timing. This timing reference is then utilized by the BS to derive the carrier frequency (2500 MHz, for example) and synchronize its TDD framing to other Basestations. This Synchronized signaling is important for avoiding interference from co-located or adjacent BSs. Also, when using the Cisco BWX WiMAX Diagnostics tool, having GPS timing also permits the system to determine a user’s location via triangulation.

One BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System can provide the required reference signals for up to three BSs; thus, a single BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System is required for a tri-sectored site.

Note The BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System unit described here handles the more precise frequency referencing required for WiMAX mobility, and has its own GPS antenna port. Therefore, the GPS port from the BS faceplate is not needed for a GPS antenna.

6-29BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 66: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationConnect BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System

The BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System chassis is 1.75” H x 17” W (19” with rack ears) x 12” D. The chassis weighs less than 10 pounds. The unit is available with standard 100 to 240 VAC power input and optional + 24 or - 48 VDC input. BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System status is reported via front panel LEDs for Power, Lock, and Fault indicators. Standard Ethernet RJ-45 and RS-232 ports are also available for monitoring and control using http or telnet protocols. SNMP is included in the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System. Figure 6-29 through Figure 6-31 show the installation capabilities.

Figure 6-29 BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System Unit

Figure 6-30 BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System connected to BWX 8305

2 3 4 5 61 PPS10 MHz

1

DC Power

2 3 4 5 61 PPS10 MHz

1 2 3 4 5 61 PPS10 MHz

1 2 3 4 5 61 PPS10 MHz

1

DC Power

X

X

BWX 8305 Basestation

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

Basestation

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

Basestation

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

XX

X

Basestation

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

Basestation

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XXXX

XX

X

BWX 8305 Basestation

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

Basestation

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

Basestation

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

XX

X

Basestation

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

Basestation

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XX

X

BWX 8303 BasestationTiming System

GPS Antenna

GPS antenna to BS is not neededGPS antenna feeds directly into BWX 8303BWX 8303 outputs 1PPS & 10 MHz signalsto the BS

X

X

XXXX

X

6-30BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 67: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationConnect BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System

Figure 6-31 BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System Connected to Tri-sector of BWX 8305

The EMS configurable field for External GPS should now be set to “Yes” (Figure 6-32). When upgrading from MC-SCDMA to BWX Mobile WiMAX, Service Providers will need to add the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System per the instructions in this BWX 8305 Basestation I&C Guide.

Figure 6-32 External GPS Field Enabled

Set to YesSet to Yes

6-31BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 68: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationConnect BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System

6.5.2 Install the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing SystemPlease read the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System Operation & Maintenance Manual for detailed information about the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System unit.

Caution The BXW 8303 Basestation Timing System unit should be powered on and locked (satellite acquisition completed) PRIOR TO powering on the Basestation(s) connected to it. This initial configuration should take place in advance of powering up the BWX 8305 Basestation. The initial POS FIX MODE survey takes approximately 30 - 40 minutes.

Step 1 Install the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System chassis in the rack.

Step 2 Install the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System antenna and lightning arrestors, and ground both the antenna and the chassis (grounding lug is next to power connection on faceplate) per the grounding rules mentioned earlier in this Guide. There is no need to terminate the BWX 8305 Basestation GPS antenna port.

Step 3 For DC powered units, connect the power cable to the power connection (on the front faceplate). Refer to Figure 6-33 for the correct cable connections for - 48 VDC and + 24 VDC powered units.

Figure 6-33 DC Power Connections

Step 4 Connect the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System to the BS chassis by connecting the 1 PPS and 10 MHz ports on the BS unit to the correct ports on the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System unit using the BNC connectors provided (See Figure 6-30 & Figure 6-31 above). The BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System ports are numbered 1-3 for the 1PPS output (for connecting up to 3 BSs at a time) and 4-6 for the 10 MHz output connections. A sticker is affixed to the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System unit with the port number assignments.

Step 5 Connect the Ethernet cable from the Service Provider’s network into the Ethernet port on the front of the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System.

Step 6 Connect a 9-pin Serial Cable to the RS-232 port on the front of the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System for communication and viewing “status” command. Refer to the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System Operation & Maintenance Manual for console commands.

6-32BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 69: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationConnect BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System

Note The BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System unit will assign its own IP address, or a console command can be used to turn on DHCP, and the Service Provider’s network can assign an IP address. Refer to the BWX 8303 Basestaion Timing System Operation & Maintenance Manual for console commands.

Note The BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System unit will not send alarms to the EMS. Change the SNMP to send error messages from the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System unit to a NMS server (or other IP Address as required).

Step 7 From the PC, go to Start > Programs > Accessories > TeraTerm > TerTerm, or using whichever terminal emulation program you are running.

Note A VT 100 terminal or any standard Windows-based ASCII terminal emulation program can be used for connecting to the Console port. The connection for TeraTerm is explained here as an illustrative example. The steps to get to the TeraTerm program may be different due to variances between Operating Systems and in the PC setup. The TeraTerm program can be downloaded free from the Internet.

Step 8 In the COM1 Properties window (reference Figure 6-34), under the Port settings tab enter the configuration options. Click “OK”.

Figure 6-34 COM1 Properties

Step 9 Power on the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System unit. The DC model has an “on/off” switch and the AC model does not, simply plug in the AC power cord. The Power light illuninates. The Fault light will be on until the GPS satellite acquisition is finished, and the Lock light will blink. When the unit acquires its satellites, the fault light will go off, and the Lock light will be solid. Verify at the terminal workstation, that the BXW 8303 Basestation Timing System is communicating. (Refer to Example 6-1)

Bits per second:

Data Bits: 8

Parity: None

Stop Bits: 1

Flow Control: None

Bits per second: 57600

Data Bits: 8

Parity: None

Stop Bits: 1

Flow Control: None

Bits per second:

Data Bits: 8

Parity: None

Stop Bits: 1

Flow Control: None

Bits per second: 57600

Data Bits: 8

Parity: None

Stop Bits: 1

Flow Control: None

6-33BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 70: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationConnect BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System

Example 6-1 BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System Initial Output

PTF 3203A GPS receiver Software Version 2.27-2 System Start...Ready for Commands

Note Use the help command to view a list of all the available commands. To enter a command to change any of the default settings, use the following syntax: <command designator> (space) <value>

For example: To change the date enter: A11 02/25/2008

Note To reach the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System unit via Telnet, it will be necessary to change the IP, GATEWAY, and NET MASK fields.

Step 10 Set the GPS POS AVGS value to 2000, by typing the following command: A01 2000

Step 11 Set the POS FIX MODE value to survey, by typing the following command: A05 survey

Step 12 Set the ANT CABLE LEN value to <length of GPS cable> (in meters), by typing the following command: A06 <length of GPS cable>

Step 13 Set the SNMP TRAPS value to On, by typing the following command: A41 On

Step 14 Set the IP SNMP MGR value to <snmp mgr IP address>, by typing the following command: A40 <snmp mgr IP address>

Step 15 Verify that the values were changed, by typing the following command: help (Refer to Example 6-2)

Example 6-2 BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System Help Output

> helpAll Commands Help. For more info on a single command type <help Axx> Ser. Ser.Name Cmd Current Value Name Cmd Current ValueGPS POS AVGS A01 _2000 FIX LATITUDE A02 22281322 FIX LONGITUDE A03 114175000 FIX HEIGHT A04 12394 POS FIX MODE A05 Survey ANT CABLE LEN A06 35 TIME OFFSET A07 0 DST A08 Off DST TYPE A09 US TIME MODE A10 UTC DATE A11 01/01/2003 TIME A12 00:00:07 DISP BRIGHT A13 5 DISP BLANK A14 0 1PPS SOURCE A15 GPS PCLK SRC A16 10MHz PCLK DVSR A17 10 PCLK PULSE A18 Square DIG OUT 1 A19 1PPS DIG OUT 2 A20 1PPS DIG OUT 3 A21 1PPS DIG OUT 4 A22 1PPS DIG OUT 5 A23 1PPS IP A24 192.168.000.019NET MASK A25 255.255.255.000 GATEWAY A27 192.168.000.001DHCP A28 Off PASSWORD A29 123456 OSC TYPE A31 OCXO OCXO LOCK TIME A33 60 BAUD RATE A37 57600 SNTP MULTICAST A38 Off SNTP MULT PER. A39 16 IP SNMP MGR A40 192.168.000.020SNMP TRAPS A41 Onf TELNET TIMEOUT A42 0 PRINT HELP HELP PRINT VERSION VERSION PRINT VERSION VERSION Logout Telnet LOGOUT Status STATUS Servo SERVO

6-34BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 71: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationConnect BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System

Step 16 Verify the status of the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System, by typing the following command: status (Refer to Example 6-3)

Note The initial boot-up with a 2000 position average may take 30 - 40 minutes to complete. It will be necessary to enter the status command several times to monitor the progress. Once the Unit Mode field changes to Calculating Position monitor the Positioning count field for progress.

Example 6-3 BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System Status Output

> status

PTF 3203A GPS receiver Software Version 2.27-2c, CPLD Version 10Capabilities -> Normal + SNTP + SNMP + HTTP + TELNET

Unit Mode Oven warmupSatellites tracked 00Positioning count 0Latitude (*1E6) 22281322Longitude (*1E6) 114175000Height (cm) 12394Ethernet Link status UPStarted SNTP Server NOStarted SNMP Server NOStarted HTTP Server NOStarted Telnet Server NOTelnet session active NO> > > > status

PTF 3203A GPS receiver Software Version 2.27-2c, CPLD Version 10Capabilities -> Normal + SNTP + SNMP + HTTP + TELNET

Unit Mode Calculating PositionSatellites tracked 04 Positioning count 35Latitude (*1E6) 22280838Longitude (*1E6) 114174968Height (cm) 11222Ethernet Link status DOWNStarted SNTP Server NOStarted SNMP Server NOStarted HTTP Server NOStarted Telnet Server NOTelnet session active NO> > > > status

PTF 3203A GPS receiver Software Version 2.27-2c, CPLD Version 10Capabilities -> Normal + SNTP + SNMP + HTTP + TELNET

Unit Mode Calculating PositionSatellites tracked 04

6-35BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 72: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationConnect BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System

Positioning count 329Latitude (*1E6) 22280410Longitude (*1E6) 114175064Height (cm) 5043Ethernet Link status DOWNStarted SNTP Server NOStarted SNMP Server NOStarted HTTP Server NOStarted Telnet Server NOTelnet session active NO> > > status

PTF 3203A GPS receiver Software Version 2.27-2c, CPLD Version 10Capabilities -> Normal + SNTP + SNMP + HTTP + TELNET

Unit Mode Calculating PositionSatellites tracked 04 Positioning count 626Latitude (*1E6) 22280422Longitude (*1E6) 114175128Height (cm) 4495Ethernet Link status DOWNStarted SNTP Server NOStarted SNMP Server NOStarted HTTP Server NOStarted Telnet Server NOTelnet session active NO> > > status

PTF 3203A GPS receiver Software Version 2.27-2c, CPLD Version 10Capabilities -> Normal + SNTP + SNMP + HTTP + TELNET

Unit Mode Calculating PositionSatellites tracked 03 Positioning count 2000Latitude (*1E6) 22280890Longitude (*1E6) 114175000Height (cm) 8118Ethernet Link status DOWNStarted SNTP Server NOStarted SNMP Server NOStarted HTTP Server NOStarted Telnet Server NOTelnet session active NO> > > status

PTF 3203A GPS receiver Software Version 2.27-2c, CPLD Version 10Capabilities -> Normal + SNTP + SNMP + HTTP + TELNET

Unit Mode Calculating PositionSatellites tracked 06 Position mode Complete

6-36BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 73: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationConnect BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System

Latitude (*1E6) 22281290Longitude (*1E6) 114174952Height (cm) 13105Ethernet Link status DOWNStarted SNTP Server NOStarted SNMP Server NOStarted HTTP Server NOStarted Telnet Server NOTelnet session active NO>

Step 17 Once the Position Mode field changes to Completed, verify that the Unit Mode field has changed to Locking and then to LOOP Mode GPS with a value of OK. (Refer to Example 6-4)

Example 6-4 BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System Unit Mode Status Output

> status

PTF 3203A GPS receiver Software Version 2.27-2c, CPLD Version 10Capabilities -> Normal + SNTP + SNMP + HTTP + TELNET

Unit Mode LockingSatellites tracked 06 Position mode CompleteLatitude (*1E6) 22281290Longitude (*1E6) 114174952Height (cm) 13105Ethernet Link status DOWNStarted SNTP Server NOStarted SNMP Server NOStarted HTTP Server NOStarted Telnet Server NOTelnet session active NO> > > status

PTF 3203A GPS receiver Software Version 2.27-2c, CPLD Version 10Capabilities -> Normal + SNTP + SNMP + HTTP + TELNET

LOOP Mode GPS OKSatellites tracked 06 Position mode CompleteLatitude (*1E6) 22281290Longitude (*1E6) 114174952Height (cm) 13105Ethernet Link status DOWNStarted SNTP Server NOStarted SNMP Server NOStarted HTTP Server NOStarted Telnet Server NOTelnet session active NO> >

Step 18 After the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System has “locked” (Fault light off and solid green Locked LED), change the POS FIX MODE value to fixed, by typing the following command: A05 fixed

This will allow the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System to initialize quickly the next time it is booted-up.

6-37BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 74: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationComplete the BWX 8305 Installation

6.6 Complete the BWX 8305 Installation

6.6.1 Test the Backhaul ConnectionIf required in the Responsibility Assignment Matrix (RAM) or project plan, test the backhaul to the customer demarcation point.

6.7 Install Access Services Network Gateway (ASN-GW) & Broadband Wireless Gateway (BWG) Software

The BWX 8305 Basestation interfaces either a 7300 Series or 7600 Series Access Services Network Gateway (ASN-GW) router (refer to Figure 6-35). The router must be installed, and then loaded with the WiMAX software application called Broadband Wireless Gateway (BWG). It is beyond hte scope of this document to provide router installation procedures. For information on installing the Cisco BWG, refer to the ASN-GW documentation at the following links:

www.cisco.com > Documentation > Routers > Cisco 7300 Series Routers or Cisco 7600 Series Routers

or

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/routers/ps352/tsd_products_support_series_home.html

or

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/routers/ps368/tsd_products_support_series_home.html

or BWG Data Sheet: http://wwwin.cisco.com/sptg/mscbu/mwg/prods/cmx/pg/bwg/files/BWG-R11-DS.pdf

In section 7.2 are the configuration settings to make the BS and BWG communicate.

Figure 6-35 7300 Series & 7600 ASN-GW Routers

760073017301

6-38BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 75: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationAuthentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA) Server Installation

6.8 Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA) Server Installation

As part of the WiMAX Profile C architecture, the AAA server is a key element providing subscriber and device authentication as well as configuration. The BWG communicates using RADIUS with the AAA server for subscriber/device authentication and configuration. The configuration information is then relayed by the BWG to the BS using the R6 interface.

Cisco’s BWG open architecture design makes it compatible with any AAA server that also uses open architecture protocols. In Release 7.0, all subscriber configuration information is captured in an AAA database.

As a subscriber attempts to access the network, the SS communicates with the BS. The BS contacts the BWG which in turn interfaces with the AAA database to check authentication and authorization and to acquire the subscriber’s profile. Assuming the subscriber’s data exists and the subscriber is approved for network access, the BWG sends the information to the BS to provide service to the subscriber.

Cisco offers its own AAA application called the Cisco Access Registrar, or CAR, as part of the WiMAX end-to-end solution (Figure 6-36).

Figure 6-36 Cisco Access Registrar

For information on installing the CAR, refer to the following links:

www.cisco.com > Documentation > Network Management > Security and Identity Management > Cisco Access Registrar

or

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/netmgtsw/ps411/tsd_products_support_series_home.html

6-39BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 76: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 6 InstallationAuthentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA) Server Installation

Note These sites provide documentation such as Release Notes, Installation and Configuration Guides, and User Guides.

Note Please note that each vendor’s AAA has its own interface for configuring the subscriber information. When troubleshooting WiMAX subscriber issues, the Service Provider will need to investigate both the EMS and AAA data.

6-40BWX 2305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 77: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

BWX 8305OL-16336-02

C H A P T E R 7

Commissioning

7.1 Install the Element Management System (EMS) References:

• BWX EMS Overview Manual

• BWX EMS Software Installation Guide

• BWX Mobile WiMAX Configuration Guide

7.1.1 ‘Setup the ‘Test’ EMSBefore installing the EMS software on a local computer, it is a good idea to check the customer’s network architecture plan. You should review the plan against the actual setup at the site, checking to see that all equipment and software are installed and available for use. Verify that all routers are installed and IP addresses are correct.

You will need a “test” EMS computer in order to enter some basic configuration data needed to test the system once it is powered on. As an installer, you can either use a laptop computer or the customer’s intended EMS Server. (If you use the customer’s intended EMS Server, it will be connected through the backhaul, which is an Ethernet connection between the BWX 8305 Basestation (BS) and the Service Provider’s network.)

Typically, in order to keep a constant link, a 10/100 Base-T Ethernet hub or switch connects the test EMS to the BS Data port using an Ethernet cable. This allows the technician to use the EMS Client to communicate with the EMS Server, which are installed on the same test computer (instructions later in this chapter).

An RS-232 serial cable is then connected between the test EMS and the Console port on the BS. Using standard communication software -- i.e., a terminal emulation program, such as Windows HyperTerm or TeraTerm -- allows the installer to enter basic configuration data at this early stage. The procedure for setting up the communications software is described below.

7-1 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Page 78: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningInstall the Element Management System (EMS)

7.1.2 Setting Up Direct Communications Software

Step 1 Verify all RF cables going to the BS are securely connected to the proper ports.

Step 2 Connect an Ethernet cable between a hub or switch and the Data port on the BS. Connect another Ethernet cable from the Ethernet hub to the Ethernet connector on the PC that will be used as the test EMS.

Step 3 Connect an RS-232 cable (DB-9 male to female) to the Console port (UART) located on the BS and to the serial port connector on the test EMS computer.

Note A VT 100 terminal or any standard Windows-based ASCII terminal emulation program can be used for connecting to the Console port. The connection for HyperTerm is explained here as an illustrative example. The steps to get to the HyperTerm program may be different due to variances between Operating Systems and in the PC setup. There have been cases of extra “garbage” data while using the HyperTerm program. The preferred TeraTerm program can be downloaded free from the Internet.

Step 4 Power on the test EMS Server.

Step 5 On the desktop, go to Start > Programs > Accessories > HyperTerminal > HyperTerminal, using whichever terminal emulation program you are running.

Step 6 In the COM1 Properties window (Figure 7-1), under the Port settings tab enter the configuration options. Click “OK”.

Figure 7-1 COM1 Properties

Bits per second: 9600

Data Bits: 8

Parity: None

Stop Bits: 1

Flow Control: None

Bits per second: 9600

Data Bits: 8

Parity: None

Stop Bits: 1

Flow Control: None

7-2BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 79: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningInstall the Element Management System (EMS)

7.1.3 Install the BWX EMS Software and Starting & Configure the BWX EMS Server

7.1.3.1 Install the BWX EMS Software

Please refer to the BWX EMS Software Installation Guide for minimum computing requirements and instructions to load the software. When you load the EMS software into the CiscoEMS\ directory on the computer, the file structure will look something like what is shown in Figure 7-2. This is a Windows example.

Note This is the directory when you install the Server. The directory when you install the Client is different.

Figure 7-2 BWX EMS Software Directory

Be sure to select the correct instructions for your server – based on operating system, either Windows® or Unix®. You will need to install both the Server and Client applications (Figure 7-3). Be sure to check the latest software Release Notes for updated information and procedures for the version of software you are loading.

<EMS Install Directory>

<Ftp Server Root Path>

<BTS/CPE SW Ftp Directory> sw<BTS/CPE SW Ftp Directory> sw load files should be placed here<Perf Log Storage Directory><Perf Log Storage Directory>

online documentationonline documentation

log files are stored herelog files are stored here

script files for CLI should be placed herescript files for CLI should be placed here

databasedatabaseconfiguration filesconfiguration filesexecutable filesexecutable files

database-related Java archive (jar) filesdatabase-related Java archive (jar) files

Corba-related filesCorba-related filesJava runtime filesJava runtime filesEMS jar filesEMS jar files

<EMS Install Directory>

<Ftp Server Root Path>

<BTS/CPE SW Ftp Directory> sw<BTS/CPE SW Ftp Directory> sw load files should be placed here<BTS/CPE SW Ftp Directory> sw<BTS/CPE SW Ftp Directory> sw load files should be placed here<Perf Log Storage Directory><Perf Log Storage Directory><Perf Log Storage Directory><Perf Log Storage Directory>

online documentationonline documentationonline documentationonline documentation

log files are stored herelog files are stored herelog files are stored herelog files are stored here

script files for CLI should be placed herescript files for CLI should be placed herescript files for CLI should be placed herescript files for CLI should be placed here

databasedatabasedatabasedatabaseconfiguration filesconfiguration filesconfiguration filesconfiguration filesexecutable filesexecutable filesexecutable filesexecutable files

database-related Java archive (jar) filesdatabase-related Java archive (jar) filesdatabase-related Java archive (jar) filesdatabase-related Java archive (jar) files

Corba-related filesCorba-related filesCorba-related filesCorba-related filesJava runtime filesJava runtime filesJava runtime filesJava runtime filesEMS jar filesEMS jar filesEMS jar filesEMS jar files

7-3BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 80: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningInstall the Element Management System (EMS)

Figure 7-3 BWX EMS Server & Client Applications

Note When connecting the BS equipment to the backhaul, refer to the Regulatory Information in this document, specifically regarding cabling to Ethernet connections. Ethernet connections require a UL497B listed protection device to be installed between the BS and the first network device.

7.1.3.2 Start the BWX EMS Server

This section assumes that the EMS Server & Client applications have already been loaded. The EMS software installation was described in the previous section. Please refer to the BWX EMS Software Installation Guide for detailed instructions on starting the EMS server. The default user name and password are “emsAdmin” (case sensitive). Cisco recommends always changing the default password. Verify the new password requirement with the customer. After the software files have successfully loaded, start the EMS Server by performing the following steps:

Step 1 BEFORE starting the EMS Server, open the EMS Admin CLI application and type enable. After enable is entered, you are prompted for a password. The default password is “emsAdmin”. The password will be invisible as you type it.

Next, type migratedb. Once the message stating “Database migration succeeded” displays, exit EMS Admin CLI.

Note If the migration step is run again, you will see the following message: “No Migration Needed, Database and Application Versions are both 3.”

Step 2 On the test EMS Server, double-click on the EMS Server icon to start the EMS Server application. Allow time for the EMS Server startup procedure to execute. Look for “EMS Server: UP” to scroll by in the EMS Server window to confirm that the Server is up and running. If the EMS Server does not start, call Cisco TAC (1-800-553-2447).

The resulting EMS Server window must remain open to keep the EMS Server running. It can be minimized during Server operation.

Warning Note that the EMS Server window should not be closed during Server operations, but it can be minimized. If the EMS Server ever needs to be stopped, do not click on the “X” in the top right-hand corner of the window. Instead, open a command prompt window, enter the “stopemsserver” command followed by the administrator user id and then enter the password and return, as shown in Figure 7-4.

Server ClientServerServer ClientClient

7-4BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 81: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningInstall the Element Management System (EMS)

Figure 7-4 Stopping the EMS Server

7.1.3.3 Configure the BWX EMS Server

Note The minimum configuration that you will enter into the EMS server will be through the Configuration & Alarm Manager (CAM) application, which is a graphical user interface (GUI). If you are not already familiar with the CAM, please review the BWX Mobile WiMAX Configuration Guide.

Please refer to the BWX Mobile WiMAX Configuration Guide for instructions on the configuration of the EMS server. The configuration of the EMS server includes the following elements:

• General configuration

• Alarm Management configuration

• Performance Management configuration

7.1.3.3.1 General Configuration

General configuration of the EMS server includes changing the EMS ID & Network ID fields, entering the FTP user name, password & FTP server root path, and entering the BTS/CPE SW Directory.

Note The software upgrade files for BSs and Subscriber Stations (SSs) must be stored on the same PC where the EMS Server was installed. An FTP server must also be installed on that same PC. Under the FTP server you must add a user, give this user a password, and assign this user a root directory. Under the EMS tab, this user, password, and root directory must be specified during configuration. To do an upgrade, the file(s) are placed on that directory, and the process is initiated on the EMS, which communicates with the FTP server (which is the one that does the actual transfer). EMS Server/Client upgrades are done directly from the Cisco supplied CD. Refer to Figure 7-5.

1. Open a Command Prompt window and enter stopemsserver <adminID>1. Open a Command Prompt window and enter stopemsserver <adminID>

3. Allow time for the EMS shutdown process to execute. When the process is completed, this window will close by itself

3. Allow time for the EMS shutdown process to execute. When the process is completed, this window will close by itself

5. Close the Command Prompt window

5. Close the Command Prompt window

If this does not work, then enter <CTRL>C at the EMS Server window to Stop the EMS. When asked if you

want to terminate the batch file, enter "N" to gracefully

stop all the other processes

If this does not work, then enter <CTRL>C at the EMS Server window to Stop the EMS. When asked if you

want to terminate the batch file, enter "N" to gracefully

stop all the other processes

2. When prompted, enter <adminPassword>2. When prompted, enter <adminPassword>

NEVER CLOSE THE EMS WINDOW BY

CLICKING ON THE "X"

NEVER CLOSE THE EMS WINDOW BY

CLICKING ON THE "X"

4. The window closes4. The window closes

1. Open a Command Prompt window and enter stopemsserver <adminID>1. Open a Command Prompt window and enter stopemsserver <adminID>

3. Allow time for the EMS shutdown process to execute. When the process is completed, this window will close by itself

3. Allow time for the EMS shutdown process to execute. When the process is completed, this window will close by itself

5. Close the Command Prompt window

5. Close the Command Prompt window

If this does not work, then enter <CTRL>C at the EMS Server window to Stop the EMS. When asked if you

want to terminate the batch file, enter "N" to gracefully

stop all the other processes

If this does not work, then enter <CTRL>C at the EMS Server window to Stop the EMS. When asked if you

want to terminate the batch file, enter "N" to gracefully

stop all the other processes

2. When prompted, enter <adminPassword>2. When prompted, enter <adminPassword>

NEVER CLOSE THE EMS WINDOW BY

CLICKING ON THE "X"

NEVER CLOSE THE EMS WINDOW BY

CLICKING ON THE "X"

4. The window closes4. The window closes

7-5BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 82: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd and Configure Broadband Wireless Gateway (BWG)

Figure 7-5 FTP Server Windows Example

Note If upgrading the EMS software from release 6.2.X to release 7.0 or higher, it will be necessary to manually change the Ftp Server Root Path field in the Config EMS screen to “C:\CiscoEMS\ftp”.

7.1.3.3.2 Alarm Management Configuration

Alarm Management configuration of the EMS server includes setting the Alarm Auto Acknowledgement (Alarm AutoAck) parameter, setting the Maximum Acknowledgements per hour (Max Ack Per Hour) parameter, and setting up the Alarm Notification by Email parameters (Mail server IP, Email addresses, & specifying which alarms will be mailed to which addresses).

7.1.3.3.3 Performance Management Configuration

Performance Management configuration of the EMS server includes setting the Enable Performance Analyzer (Enable PerfAnalyzer) parameter, setting up the Alarm Notification by Email parameters (Mail server IP, & Email addresses) and setting up the SS Auto Logging parameters.

7.2 Add and Configure Broadband Wireless Gateway (BWG)Reference:

• BWX Mobile WiMAX Configuration Guide P/N: OL-16313-02

Please refer to the BWX Mobile WiMAX Configuration Guide for instructions on the configuration of the BWG. The configuration of the BWG includes the following elements:

<EMS Install Directory>: C:\CiscoEMS

<Ftp Server Root Path>: C:\CiscoEMS\ftp

<BTS CPE SW Directory>: loads

<BTS CPE SW Ftp User Name>: ems<BTS CPE SW Ftp Password>: ems

FTP --> Add User --> User Name: ems, Password: ems, Default Directory: C:\CiscoEMS\ftp FTP

EMS

<EMS Install Directory>: C:\CiscoEMS

<Ftp Server Root Path>: C:\CiscoEMS\ftp

<BTS CPE SW Directory>: loads

<BTS CPE SW Ftp User Name>: ems<BTS CPE SW Ftp Password>: ems

FTP --> Add User --> User Name: ems, Password: ems, Default Directory: C:\CiscoEMS\ftp FTP

EMS

7-6BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 83: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd and Configure a BWX 8305 Basestation

The EMS configures in the BWG all information relative to service level agreements (service flows, packet classifiers, quality of service, user groups, VRFs, etc.) and the definition of AAA services. EMS initiated BWG configuration is only written into memory. To make configurations non-volatile, they must be saved with the BWG Action command “Commit to BWG”.

The EMS does not configure Layer 3 information, such as physical and logical interfaces, and routing. These must be configured manually in the BWG.

7.3 Add and Configure a BWX 8305 Basestation

7.3.1 Minimum System Configuration RequirementsDuring deployment of a system, only the minimum EMS, BS, SS, BWG, and global parameters must be entered to get the system up and running for testing before turning the site over to the Service Provider. The Service Provider may ask you to do more, but in this section we go over the EMS fields that must be configured in order to complete the commissioning of the system.

At this stage, you should have already installed the EMS Server and Client applications, rebooted the Server computer (which executed the “configserver” batch file), and added the BWG. The following list is typical information you will need to know to enter the minimum configuration data.

• Network ID – This is a unique identifier for a given Service Provider’s network. No other Service Provider will have the same Network ID (NID). The NID is provided by Cisco.

• BTS Name and ID – Each BS must have a unique name and number identifier. The ID can be a mix of alpha and numeric characters. Cisco recommends entering BWX or another identifier so that other personnel will later be able to recognize this BS as a BWX system.

• BTS IP Address – When you enter the IP address for the BS, the system will automatically create a second IP address for that BWX 8305 Basestation. For example, if you enter 10.10.10.1, the EMS software generates the second IP address as 10.10.10.2. The initial IP address is usually obtained from the Service Provider’s network administrator.

• EMS Server IP Address – Obtained from the Service Provider’s network administrator (for testing purposes, use the IP address of the PC where the Test EMS resides)

• BTS Subnet Mask – Obtained from the Service Provider’s network administrator

• BTS Gateway IP Address – Obtained from the Service Provider’s network administrator

• BTS Center Frequency – Obtained from the RF Plan

• Basestation Antenna Power, RX Sensitivity determined by Specifications.

• Active or Passive Antenna identified

• Cable Loss Values – RF and Cal cable

• Power Splitter Values – Obtained from the disk attached to the BWX Basestation Antenna

• Antenna Weight (W0) Values – Obtained from the disk attached to the BWX Basestation Antenna

• Whenever you define a new element (BS or SS) in the EMS database, you first add the element, then configure it by completing various fields through the EMS CAM application. Please refer to the Cisco OS Release Notes and the BWX Mobile WiMAX Configuration Guide for more datafill information.

7-7BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 84: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd and Configure a BWX 8305 Basestation

7.3.2 Add a BWX 8305 BasestationThe steps to add a BS are shown in Figure 7-6 through Figure 7-11. Please refer to these figures as you read the remainder of this section.

Step 1 To add a BS, use the pull-down menu called Action, select Add > BTS, and then WiMAX. Enter the information in each field. All of these fields must be entered or accept the defaults.

Figure 7-6 Add Screen for BWX 8305 Basestation

Step 2 Select the frequency band for the BS.

Figure 7-7 Selecting the Frequency Band

To add a BTS, select: Action → Add → BTS → Wimax BTSTo add a BTS, select: Action → Add → BTS → Wimax BTSTo add a BTS, select: Action → Add → BTS → Wimax BTSTo add a BTS, select: Action → Add → BTS → Wimax BTSTo add a BTS, select: Action → Add → BTS →To add a BTS, select: Action → Add → BTS → WimaxTo add a BTS, select: Action → Add → BTS →To add a BTS, select: Action → Add → Wimax BTS To add a BTS, select: Action → Add → BTS → Wimax BTSTo add a BTS, select: Action → Add → BTS → Wimax BTSTo add a BTS, select: Action → Add → BTS → Wimax BTSTo add a BTS, select: Action → Add → BTS → Wimax BTSTo add a BTS, select: Action → Add → BTS →To add a BTS, select: Action → Add → BTS → WimaxTo add a BTS, select: Action → Add → BTS →To add a BTS, select: Action → Add → Wimax BTS

Use this pull-down menu to select the frequency band.

Use this pull-down menu to select the frequency band.Use this pull-down menu to select the frequency band.

Use this pull-down menu to select the frequency band.Use this pull-down menu to select the frequency band.

Use this pull-down menu to select the frequency band.Use this pull-down menu to select the frequency band.

Use this pull-down menu to select the frequency band.Use this pull-down menu to select the frequency band.

Use this pull-down menu to select the frequency band.Use this pull-down menu to select the frequency band.

Use this pull-down menu to select the frequency band.

7-8BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 85: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd and Configure a BWX 8305 Basestation

Step 3 Set the center frequency per the Service Provider’s RF Engineering specifications. This will depend upon the particular spectrum that the Service Provider has permission to use, and on other radiating equipment in the geographical area. The Center Frequency setting iselected using the scroll bar.

Note If this BS will be operating in a licensed band, be sure to check to see whether or not it utilizes Channel Filters. If it does, the center frequency information must be entered exactly as provided on the sticker on the BS.

Caution Not entering the exact center frequency specified when using Channel Filters may result in destroying the Power Amplifiers (PA).

Figure 7-8 Setting the Center Frequency

Step 4 Verify that Center Frequency matches the frequency of the Channel Filter and then click Yes to continue.

Note The EMS gives this warning when you click “OK” to continue configuring the BS after setting the center frequency.

Frequency Range for this bandFrequency Range for this band

Adjust the center frequency by moving the blue bar to the appropriate frequency.

Adjust the center frequency by moving the blue bar to the appropriate frequency.

Frequency Range for this bandFrequency Range for this band

Adjust the center frequency by moving the blue bar to the appropriate frequency.

Adjust the center frequency by moving the blue bar to the appropriate frequency.

Click on "Ok" to continue.Click on "Ok" to continue.Click on "Ok" to continue.Click on "Ok" to continue.Click on "Ok" to continue.Click on "Ok" to continue.

Frequency Range for this bandFrequency Range for this band

Adjust the center frequency by moving the blue bar to the appropriate frequency.

Adjust the center frequency by moving the blue bar to the appropriate frequency.

Frequency Range for this bandFrequency Range for this band

Adjust the center frequency by moving the blue bar to the appropriate frequency.

Adjust the center frequency by moving the blue bar to the appropriate frequency.

Click on "Ok" to continue.Click on "Ok" to continue.Click on "Ok" to continue.Click on "Ok" to continue.Click on "Ok" to continue.Click on "Ok" to continue.Click on "Ok" to continue.Click on "Ok" to continue.Click on "Ok" to continue.Click on "Ok" to continue.Click on "Ok" to continue.Click on "Ok" to continue.

7-9BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 86: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd and Configure a BWX 8305 Basestation

Figure 7-9 Channel Filter Warning

Step 5 Confirm that the BS was added successfully by clicking on Ok.

Figure 7-10 Basestation Added Successfully

Step 6 Next, you will see the new BS added to the list under the BTS tab. Double-click on the BTS entry to select the BS.

Figure 7-11 Basestation added to the BTS tab

This warning is displayed when you are adding a Basestation that has a Channel Filter.

This warning is displayed when you are adding a Basestation that has a Channel Filter.

This warning is displayed when you are adding a Basestation that has a Channel Filter.

This warning is displayed when you are adding a Basestation that has a Channel Filter.

Click on "Ok" to continue

Click on "Ok" to continueClick on "Ok" to continue

Click on "Ok" to continue

The new BWX 8305 Basestation appears in the Element ID List Area. Notice the BTS is "Unprovisioned". Notice also the version number of the current software load is not known at this time. To select t he BTS, click anywhere on its line of information.

The new BWX 8305 Basestation appears in the Element ID List Area. Notice the BTS is "Unprovisioned". Notice also the version number of the current software load is not known at this time. To select t he BTS, click anywhere on its line of information.

The new BWX 8305 Basestation appears in the Element ID List Area. Notice the BTS is "Unprovisioned". Notice also the version number of the current software load is not known at this time. To select t he BTS, click anywhere on its line of information.

The new BWX 8305 Basestation appears in the Element ID List Area. Notice the BTS is "Unprovisioned". Notice also the version number of the current software load is not known at this time. To select t he BTS, double-click anywhere on its line of information.

The new BWX 8305 Basestation appears in the Element ID List Area. Notice the BTS is "Unprovisioned". Notice also the version number of the current software load is not known at this time. To select t he BTS, click anywhere on its line of information.

The new BWX 8305 Basestation appears in the Element ID List Area. Notice the BTS is "Unprovisioned". Notice also the version number of the current software load is not known at this time. To select t he BTS, click anywhere on its line of information.

The new BWX 8305 Basestation appears in the Element ID List Area. Notice the BTS is "Unprovisioned". Notice also the version number of the current software load is not known at this time. To select t he BTS, click anywhere on its line of information.

The new BWX 8305 Basestation appears in the Element ID List Area. Notice the BTS is "Unprovisioned". Notice also the version number of the current software load is not known at this time. To select t he BTS, double-click anywhere on its line of information.

7-10BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 87: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd and Configure a BWX 8305 Basestation

7.3.3 Configure a BWX 8305 BasestationConfiguring the BS consists of setting the following sets of parameters: General, Layer 1, Layer 2, GPS, R6, and CAC.

7.3.3.1 Set the General Parameters

The steps to set the General parameters are shown in Figure 7-12 through Figure 7-17. Please refer to these figures as you read the remainder of this section.

Step 1 From the BTS tab, click on the BTS which is to be configured.

Step 2 Right-click on the selected BTS, pull down the Action menu and select Configure.

Figure 7-12 Configuring the BWX Basestation

Step 3 Select System > General and then click on Configure.

..."

2. The five icons (Alarm View, Net View, BTS Shelf, and Configuration) are now selectable (that is, not grayed out)

2. The five icons (Alarm View, Net View, BTS Shelf, and Configuration) are now selectable (that is, not grayed out)

3. Right -click on the selected BTS and pull down the " Action" menu.Select "Configure ..."

Right -click on the selected BTS and pull down the " Action" menu.Select "Configure ..."

2. The five icons (Alarm View, Net View, BTS Shelf, and Configuration) are now selectable (that is, not grayed out)

The five icons (Alarm View, Net View, BTS Shelf, and Configuration) are now selectable (that is, not grayed out)

1. Click on the first BTS. Notice that it turns blueto indicate that the it is selected

Click on the first BTS. Notice that it turns blueto indicate that the it is selected

..."

2. The five icons (Alarm View, Net View, BTS Shelf, and Configuration) are now selectable (that is, not grayed out)

2. The five icons (Alarm View, Net View, BTS Shelf, and Configuration) are now selectable (that is, not grayed out)

3. Right -click on the selected BTS and pull down the " Action" menu.Select "Configure ..."

Right -click on the selected BTS and pull down the " Action" menu.Select "Configure ..."

2. The five icons (Alarm View, Net View, BTS Shelf, and Configuration) are now selectable (that is, not grayed out)

The five icons (Alarm View, Net View, BTS Shelf, and Configuration) are now selectable (that is, not grayed out)

1. Click on the first BTS. Notice that it turns blueto indicate that the it is selected

Click on the first BTS. Notice that it turns blueto indicate that the it is selected

1. Click on the first BTS. Notice that it turns blueto indicate that the it is selected

Click on the first BTS. Notice that it turns blueto indicate that the it is selected

7-11BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 88: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd and Configure a BWX 8305 Basestation

Figure 7-13 Selecting the General Parameters

Step 4 Click on Enable Advance Operations to modify additional fields.

Figure 7-14 Enabling Advanced Operations for General Parameters

Step 5 Acknowledge the Warning by clicking on Yes and verify that additional fields are modifiable.

Config. Element

TreeArea

Config. Element

TreeArea

Element Actions

Area

Element Actions

Area

Element ID List Area

Element ID List Area

ElementAttribute

Area

ElementAttribute

Area

With "System→General"selected, let's click on "Configure"...

With "System→General"selected, let's click on "Configure"...

Config. Element

TreeArea

Config. Element

TreeArea

Element Actions

Area

Element Actions

Area

Element ID List Area

Element ID List Area

ElementAttribute

Area

ElementAttribute

Area

With "System→General"selected, let's click on "Configure"...

With "System→General"selected, let's click on "Configure"...

Config. Element

TreeArea

Config. Element

TreeArea

Element Actions

Area

Element Actions

Area

Element ID List Area

Element ID List Area

ElementAttribute

Area

ElementAttribute

Area

With "System→General"selected, let's click on "Configure"...

With "System→General"selected, let's click on "Configure"...

Config. Element

TreeArea

Config. Element

TreeArea

Element Actions

Area

Element Actions

Area

Element ID List Area

Element ID List Area

ElementAttribute

Area

ElementAttribute

Area

With "System→General"selected, let's click on "Configure"...

With "System→General"selected, let's click on "Configure"...

Only the fields in white and most of the pull -down fields

can be changed here.

Only the fields in white and most of the pull -down fields

can be changed here.

Click on " Enable Advance Operations " to see what

other additional fields become modifiable.

Click on "Enable Advance Operations " to see what

other additional fields become modifiable.

Notice that only one of the three buttons at the bottom

of the screen is active.

Notice that only one of the three buttons at the bottom

of the screen is active.

Only the fields in white and most of the pull -down fields

can be changed here.

Only the fields in white and most of the pull -down fields

can be changed here.

Click on " Enable Advance Operations " to see what

other additional fields become modifiable.

Click on "Enable Advance Operations " to see what

other additional fields become modifiable.

Notice that only one of the three buttons at the bottom

of the screen is active.

Notice that only one of the three buttons at the bottom

of the screen is active.

Only the fields in white and most of the pull -down fields

can be changed here.

Only the fields in white and most of the pull -down fields

can be changed here.

Click on " Enable Advance Operations " to see what

other additional fields become modifiable.

Click on "Enable Advance Operations " to see what

other additional fields become modifiable.

Notice that only one of the three buttons at the bottom

of the screen is active.

Notice that only one of the three buttons at the bottom

of the screen is active.

Only the fields in white and most of the pull -down fields

can be changed here.

Only the fields in white and most of the pull -down fields

can be changed here.

Click on " Enable Advance Operations " to see what

other additional fields become modifiable.

Click on "Enable Advance Operations " to see what

other additional fields become modifiable.

Notice that only one of the three buttons at the bottom

of the screen is active.

Notice that only one of the three buttons at the bottom

of the screen is active.

7-12BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 89: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd and Configure a BWX 8305 Basestation

Figure 7-15 Enabling Advanced Operations for General Parameters (cont.)

Step 6 Update the necessary fields, to include location, ISP info, contact personnel, and BTS type.

Step 7 Change the BTS High Temperature value to 25 (Celsius) and the BTS Shutdown High Temperature to 30 (Celsius).

Step 8 Click on Ok to accept the changes.

Figure 7-16 Updating Parameter Fields

New fields are available for modification.

New fields are available for modification.

Whenever you click on "Enable Advanced Operation", a warning screen like this one is opened.

Whenever you click on "Enable Advanced Operation", a warning screen like this one is opened.

Click here to go back.Click here to go back.

Click on "Yes" to proceed. Click on "Yes" to proceed.

New fields are available for modification.

New fields are available for modification.

Whenever you click on "Enable Advanced Operation", a warning screen like this one is opened.

Whenever you click on "Enable Advanced Operation", a warning screen like this one is opened.

Click here to go back.Click here to go back.

Click on "Yes" to proceed. Click on "Yes" to proceed.

New fields are available for modification.

New fields are available for modification.

Whenever you click on "Enable Advanced Operation", a warning screen like this one is opened.

Whenever you click on "Enable Advanced Operation", a warning screen like this one is opened.

Click here to go back.Click here to go back.

Click on "Yes" to proceed. Click on "Yes" to proceed.

New fields are available for modification.

New fields are available for modification.

Whenever you click on "Enable Advanced Operation", a warning screen like this one is opened.

Whenever you click on "Enable Advanced Operation", a warning screen like this one is opened.

Click here to go back.Click here to go back.

Click on "Yes" to proceed. Click on "Yes" to proceed.

Notice that now the three buttons at the bottom of the screen are active. Click on "Ok" to accept the changes.

Notice that now the three buttons at the bottom of the screen are active. Click on "Ok" to accept the changes.

Notice that now the three buttons at the bottom of the screen are active. Click on "Ok" to accept the changes.

Notice that now the three buttons at the bottom of the screen are active. Click on "Ok" to accept the changes.

Update the necessary fields. This includes Location, ISP Info, Contact Personnel, and BTS Type.

Update the necessary fields. This includes Location, ISP Info, Contact Personnel, and BTS Type.

Update the necessary fields. This includes Location, ISP Info, Contact Personnel, and BTS Type.

Update the necessary fields. This includes Location, ISP Info, Contact Personnel, and BTS Type.

Change the High Temp values to 25and 30 (Celsius)

Change the High Temp values to 25and 30 (Celsius)

Change the High Temp values to 25and 30 (Celsius)

Change the High Temp values to 25and 30 (Celsius)

Notice that now the three buttons at the bottom of the screen are active. Click on "Ok" to accept the changes.

Notice that now the three buttons at the bottom of the screen are active. Click on "Ok" to accept the changes.

Notice that now the three buttons at the bottom of the screen are active. Click on "Ok" to accept the changes.

Notice that now the three buttons at the bottom of the screen are active. Click on "Ok" to accept the changes.

Notice that now the three buttons at the bottom of the screen are active. Click on "Ok" to accept the changes.

Notice that now the three buttons at the bottom of the screen are active. Click on "Ok" to accept the changes.

Notice that now the three buttons at the bottom of the screen are active. Click on "Ok" to accept the changes.

Notice that now the three buttons at the bottom of the screen are active. Click on "Ok" to accept the changes.

Update the necessary fields. This includes Location, ISP Info, Contact Personnel, and BTS Type.

Update the necessary fields. This includes Location, ISP Info, Contact Personnel, and BTS Type.

Update the necessary fields. This includes Location, ISP Info, Contact Personnel, and BTS Type.

Update the necessary fields. This includes Location, ISP Info, Contact Personnel, and BTS Type.

Update the necessary fields. This includes Location, ISP Info, Contact Personnel, and BTS Type.

Update the necessary fields. This includes Location, ISP Info, Contact Personnel, and BTS Type.

Update the necessary fields. This includes Location, ISP Info, Contact Personnel, and BTS Type.

Update the necessary fields. This includes Location, ISP Info, Contact Personnel, and BTS Type.

Change the High Temp values to 25and 30 (Celsius)

Change the High Temp values to 25and 30 (Celsius)

Change the High Temp values to 25and 30 (Celsius)

Change the High Temp values to 25and 30 (Celsius)

Change the High Temp values to 25and 30 (Celsius)

Change the High Temp values to 25and 30 (Celsius)

Change the High Temp values to 25and 30 (Celsius)

Change the High Temp values to 25and 30 (Celsius)

7-13BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 90: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd and Configure a BWX 8305 Basestation

Step 9 Click on Ok to continue.

Figure 7-17 Confirmation of Successful Configuration

7.3.3.2 Set the BXW 8303 Basestation Timing System Parameters

The steps to set the BXW 8303 Basestation Timing System parameters are shown in Figure 7-18 through Figure 7-19. Please refer to these figures as you read the remainder of this section.

Step 1 Open the BTS tab.

Step 2 Click on the BTS to which the BXW 8303 Basestation Timing System is being added.

Step 3 Select GPS.

Step 4 Click on Configure.

Figure 7-18 Adding the BXW 8303 Basestation Timing System

Click on "Ok" to continueClick on "Ok" to continueClick on "Ok" to continueClick on "Ok" to continueClick on "Ok" to continueClick on "Ok" to continueClick on "Ok" to continueClick on "Ok" to continue

Select the BTS to which the EGU -3 is being added. Select the BTS to which the EGU -3 is being added. Open the BTS tab. Open the BTS tab.

Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.

Select the BTS to which the EGU -3 is being added. Select the BTS to which the EGU -3 is being added. Open the BTS tab. Open the BTS tab.

Click on “Configure”. Click on “Configure”. Click on “Configure”. Click on “Configure”.

Select the BTS to which the EGU -3 is being added. Select the BTS to which the EGU -3 is being added. Open the BTS tab. Open the BTS tab.

Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.

Select the BTS to which the EGU -3 is being added. Select the BTS to which the BWX 8303 is being added.Open the BTS tab. Open the BTS tab.

Click on “Configure”. Click on “Configure”. Click on “Configure”. Click on “Configure”. Click on “Configure”. Click on “Configure”. Click on “Configure”. Click on “Configure”.

Select the BTS to which the EGU -3 is being added. Select the BTS to which the EGU -3 is being added. Open the BTS tab. Open the BTS tab.

Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.

Select the BTS to which the EGU -3 is being added. Select the BTS to which the EGU -3 is being added. Open the BTS tab. Open the BTS tab.

Click on “Configure”. Click on “Configure”. Click on “Configure”. Click on “Configure”.

Select the BTS to which the EGU -3 is being added. Select the BTS to which the EGU -3 is being added. Open the BTS tab. Open the BTS tab.

Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.

Select the BTS to which the EGU -3 is being added. Select the BTS to which the EGU -3 is being added. Open the BTS tab. Open the BTS tab.

Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.

Select the BTS to which the EGU -3 is being added. Select the BTS to which the EGU -3 is being added. Open the BTS tab. Open the BTS tab.

Click on “Configure”. Click on “Configure”. Click on “Configure”. Click on “Configure”.

Select the BTS to which the EGU -3 is being added. Select the BTS to which the EGU -3 is being added. Open the BTS tab. Open the BTS tab.

Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.Select “GPS”.

Select the BTS to which the EGU -3 is being added. Select the BTS to which the BWX 8303 is being added.Open the BTS tab. Open the BTS tab.

Click on “Configure”. Click on “Configure”. Click on “Configure”. Click on “Configure”. Click on “Configure”. Click on “Configure”. Click on “Configure”. Click on “Configure”.

7-14BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 91: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd and Configure a BWX 8305 Basestation

Step 5 Change the External GPS value to Yes.

Step 6 Click on Ok.

Step 7 Click on Yes in both warning boxes.

Step 8 Click on Configure.

Figure 7-19 Configuring the BXW 8303 Basestation Timing System

7.3.3.3 Set the Layer 1 Parameters

The steps to set the Performance parameters are shown in Figure 7-20 through Figure 7-27. Please refer to these figures as you read the remainder of this section.

Step 1 Select Air Interface> Layer 1> Layer 1 Tables and then click on Show Configuration and Configure.

Click on “Ok".Click on “Ok".Click on “Yes” in both Warning boxes.Click on “Yes” in both Warning boxes.

Change value to “Yes”. Change value to “Yes”. Change value to “Yes”. Change value to “Yes”.

Click on “Ok".Click on “Ok".

Click on “Ok ".Click on “Ok".Click on “Ok ".Click on “Ok".

Click on “Yes” in both Warning boxes.Click on “Yes” in both Warning boxes. Click on “Ok".Click on “Ok".Click on “Yes” in both Warning boxes.Click on “Yes” in both Warning boxes.

Change value to “Yes”. Change value to “Yes”. Change value to “Yes”. Change value to “Yes”. Change value to “Yes”. Change value to “Yes”. Change value to “Yes”. Change value to “Yes”.

Click on “Ok".Click on “Ok".

Click on “Ok ".Click on “Ok".Click on “Ok ".Click on “Ok".Click on “Ok ".Click on “Ok".Click on “Ok ".Click on “Ok".Click on “Ok ".Click on “Ok".Click on “Ok ".Click on “Ok".

Click on “Yes” in both Warning boxes.Click on “Yes” in both Warning boxes.

7-15BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 92: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd and Configure a BWX 8305 Basestation

Figure 7-20 Selecting the Performance Parameters

Step 2 Select the General tab.

Step 3 Click on Enable Advance Operations to modify additional fields.

Step 4 Click on Yes in the Warning box.

Figure 7-21 Enabling Advanced Operation for Layer 1 Parameters

Step 5 Enter the values in the following fields, as shown in Figure 7-22 below:

• RFS = Active or Passive depending on the type of BWX Basestation Antenna.

• Rx Sensitivity and Antenna Power = use values given by Service Provider.

• RFS Serial Number = taken from the sticker on the Antenna

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.

Click on "Layer1 Tables“. Click on "Layer1 Tables“.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.

Notice there are 5 tabs. Nothing can be changed at this level. All fields are grayed out because we selected "Show Configuration".

Notice there are 5 tabs. Nothing can be changed at this level. All fields are grayed out because we selected "Show Configuration".

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.

Click on "Layer1 Tables“. Click on "Layer1 Tables“.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.

Click on Show Configuration to view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click on Show Configuration to view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click on Show Configuration to view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click on Show Configuration to view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Notice there are 5 tabs. Nothing can be changed at this level. All fields are grayed out because we selected "Show Configuration".

Notice there are 5 tabs. Nothing can be changed at this level. All fields are grayed out because we selected "Show Configuration".

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.

Click on "Layer1 Tables“. Click on "Layer1 Tables“.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.

Notice there are 5 tabs. Nothing can be changed at this level. All fields are grayed out because we selected "Show Configuration".

Notice there are 5 tabs. Nothing can be changed at this level. All fields are grayed out because we selected "Show Configuration".

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.

Click on "Layer1 Tables“. Click on "Layer1 Tables“.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.

Click on Show Configuration to view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click on Show Configuration to view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click on Show Configuration to view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click on Show Configuration to view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click on Show Configuration to view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click on Show Configuration to view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click on Show Configuration to view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click on Show Configuration to view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Notice there are 5 tabs. Nothing can be changed at this level. All fields are grayed out because we selected "Show Configuration".

Notice there are 5 tabs. Nothing can be changed at this level. All fields are grayed out because we selected "Show Configuration".

Select the General tab.Select the General tab.Select the General tab.Select the General tab.

Click on Enable Advanced Operationto enable more fields to be changed.

Click on Enable Advanced Operationto enable more fields to be changed.Click on Enable Advanced Operationto enable more fields to be changed.

Click on Enable Advanced Operationto enable more fields to be changed.

Click on Yes.Click on Yes.Click on Yes.Click on Yes.

Select the General tab.Select the General tab.Select the General tab.Select the General tab.Select the General tab.Select the General tab.Select the General tab.Select the General tab.

Click on Enable Advanced Operationto enable more fields to be changed.

Click on Enable Advanced Operationto enable more fields to be changed.Click on Enable Advanced Operationto enable more fields to be changed.

Click on Enable Advanced Operationto enable more fields to be changed.Click on Enable Advanced Operationto enable more fields to be changed.

Click on Enable Advanced Operationto enable more fields to be changed.Click on Enable Advanced Operationto enable more fields to be changed.

Click on Enable Advanced Operationto enable more fields to be changed.

Click on Yes.Click on Yes.Click on Yes.Click on Yes.Click on Yes.Click on Yes.Click on Yes.Click on Yes.

7-16BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 93: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd and Configure a BWX 8305 Basestation

• Cal Cable Loss = Swept value of Cal cable (Cable loss from Antenna to Buss Bar PLUS jumper loss from Buss Bar to Basestation faceplate)

• RFS Part Number = from sticker on antenna

• RFS Azimuth = per directions given to Installer

• RFS Height = antenna height in centimeters

Verify the stated values in the following fields, if different contact Cisco TAC:

• Preamble Scale = 0.6213

• FCH Map Scale = 0.2689

• Cisco Map Scale = 0.4441

• Traffic Scale = 0.1570

• Max Scale = 5.5110

Figure 7-22 Changing the Layer 1 Parameters

Step 6 Select the second tab, Antenna Table.

Step 7 Select Modify All to enter the RF Cable Loss values.

These are the fields will need to be changed.

These are the fields will need to be changed.

These are the fields will need to be changed.

These are the fields will need to be changed.

These values are returned by the "full calibration" process.

These values are returned by the "full calibration" process.

These values are returned by the "full calibration" process.

These values are returned by the "full calibration" process.

There is no backplaneassociatedwith the BWX Basestation.

There is no backplaneassociatedwith the BWX Basestation .

There is no backplaneassociatedwith the BWX Basestation.

There is no backplaneassociatedwith the BWX Basestation .

Loss obtained by adding values from label on cable running from antenna and cable running to BWX Basestation.

Loss obtained by adding values from label on cable running from antenna and cable running to BWX Basestation.

Loss obtained by adding values from label on cable running from antenna and cable running to BWX Basestation.

Loss obtained by adding values from label on cable running from antenna and cable running to BWX Basestation.

Normal antennas are "Active" (have LNAs/PAs). "Passive" antennas (don't have LNAs/PAs) are used in lab, class, or demo environments only.

Normal antennas are "Active " (have LNAs/PAs). "Passive" antennas (don't have LNAs/PAs) are used in lab, class, or demo environments only.

Normal antennas are "Active" (have LNAs/PAs). "Passive" antennas (don't have LNAs/PAs) are used in lab, class, or demo environments only.

Normal antennas are "Active " (have LNAs/PAs). "Passive" antennas (don't have LNAs/PAs) are used in lab, class, or demo environments only.

These are the fields will need to be changed.

These are the fields will need to be changed.

These are the fields will need to be changed.

These are the fields will need to be changed.

These are the fields will need to be changed.

These are the fields will need to be changed.

These are the fields will need to be changed.

Verify the stated valuesfor these parameters.

These values are returned by the "full calibration" process.

These values are returned by the "full calibration" process.

These values are returned by the "full calibration" process.

These values are returned by the "full calibration" process.

These values are returned by the "full calibration" process.

These values are returned by the "full calibration" process.

These values are returned by the "full calibration" process.

These values are returned by the "full calibration" process.

There is no backplaneassociatedwith the BWX Basestation.

There is no backplaneassociatedwith the BWX Basestation .

There is no backplaneassociatedwith the BWX Basestation.

There is no backplaneassociatedwith the BWX Basestation .

There is no backplaneassociatedwith the BWX Basestation.

There is no backplaneassociatedwith the BWX Basestation .

There is no backplaneassociatedwith the BWX Basestation.

There is no backplaneassociatedwith the BWX Basestation .

Loss obtained by adding values from label on cable running from antenna and cable running to BWX Basestation.

Loss obtained by adding values from label on cable running from antenna and cable running to BWX Basestation.

Loss obtained by adding values from label on cable running from antenna and cable running to BWX Basestation.

Loss obtained by adding values from label on cable running from antenna and cable running to BWX Basestation.

Loss obtained by adding values from label on cable running from antenna and cable running to BWX Basestation.

Loss obtained by adding values from label on cable running from antenna and cable running to BWX Basestation.

Loss obtained by adding values from label on cable running from antenna and cable running to BWX Basestation.

Loss obtained by adding values from label on cable running from antenna and cable running to BWX Basestation.

Normal antennas are "Active" (have LNAs/PAs). "Passive" antennas (don't have LNAs/PAs) are used in lab, class, or demo environments only.

Normal antennas are "Active " (have LNAs/PAs). "Passive" antennas (don't have LNAs/PAs) are used in lab, class, or demo environments only.

Normal antennas are "Active" (have LNAs/PAs). "Passive" antennas (don't have LNAs/PAs) are used in lab, class, or demo environments only.

Normal antennas are "Active " (have LNAs/PAs). "Passive" antennas (don't have LNAs/PAs) are used in lab, class, or demo environments only.

Normal antennas are "Active" (have LNAs/PAs). "Passive" antennas (don't have LNAs/PAs) are used in lab, class, or demo environments only.

Normal antennas are "Active " (have LNAs/PAs). "Passive" antennas (don't have LNAs/PAs) are used in lab, class, or demo environments only.

Normal antennas are "Active" (have LNAs/PAs). "Passive" antennas (don't have LNAs/PAs) are used in lab, class, or demo environments only.

Normal antennas are "Active " (have LNAs/PAs). "Passive" antennas (don't have LNAs/PAs) are used in lab, class, or demo environments only.

These are the fields will need to be changed.

These are the fields will need to be changed.

These are the fields will need to be changed.

These are the fields will need to be changed.

These values are returned by the "full calibration" process.

These values are returned by the "full calibration" process.

These values are returned by the "full calibration" process.

These values are returned by the "full calibration" process.

There is no backplaneassociatedwith the BWX Basestation.

There is no backplaneassociatedwith the BWX Basestation .

There is no backplaneassociatedwith the BWX Basestation.

There is no backplaneassociatedwith the BWX Basestation .

Loss obtained by adding values from label on cable running from antenna and cable running to BWX Basestation.

Loss obtained by adding values from label on cable running from antenna and cable running to BWX Basestation.

Loss obtained by adding values from label on cable running from antenna and cable running to BWX Basestation.

Loss obtained by adding values from label on cable running from antenna and cable running to BWX Basestation.

Normal antennas are "Active" (have LNAs/PAs). "Passive" antennas (don't have LNAs/PAs) are used in lab, class, or demo environments only.

Normal antennas are "Active " (have LNAs/PAs). "Passive" antennas (don't have LNAs/PAs) are used in lab, class, or demo environments only.

Normal antennas are "Active" (have LNAs/PAs). "Passive" antennas (don't have LNAs/PAs) are used in lab, class, or demo environments only.

Normal antennas are "Active " (have LNAs/PAs). "Passive" antennas (don't have LNAs/PAs) are used in lab, class, or demo environments only.

These are the fields will need to be changed.

These are the fields will need to be changed.

These are the fields will need to be changed.

These are the fields will need to be changed.

These are the fields will need to be changed.

These are the fields will need to be changed.

These are the fields will need to be changed.

Verify the stated valuesfor these parameters.

These values are returned by the "full calibration" process.

These values are returned by the "full calibration" process.

These values are returned by the "full calibration" process.

These values are returned by the "full calibration" process.

These values are returned by the "full calibration" process.

These values are returned by the "full calibration" process.

These values are returned by the "full calibration" process.

These values are returned by the "full calibration" process.

There is no backplaneassociatedwith the BWX Basestation.

There is no backplaneassociatedwith the BWX Basestation .

There is no backplaneassociatedwith the BWX Basestation.

There is no backplaneassociatedwith the BWX Basestation .

There is no backplaneassociatedwith the BWX Basestation.

There is no backplaneassociatedwith the BWX Basestation .

There is no backplaneassociatedwith the BWX Basestation.

There is no backplaneassociatedwith the BWX Basestation .

Loss obtained by adding values from label on cable running from antenna and cable running to BWX Basestation.

Loss obtained by adding values from label on cable running from antenna and cable running to BWX Basestation.

Loss obtained by adding values from label on cable running from antenna and cable running to BWX Basestation.

Loss obtained by adding values from label on cable running from antenna and cable running to BWX Basestation.

Loss obtained by adding values from label on cable running from antenna and cable running to BWX Basestation.

Loss obtained by adding values from label on cable running from antenna and cable running to BWX Basestation.

Loss obtained by adding values from label on cable running from antenna and cable running to BWX Basestation.

Loss obtained by adding values from label on cable running from antenna and cable running to BWX Basestation.

Normal antennas are "Active" (have LNAs/PAs). "Passive" antennas (don't have LNAs/PAs) are used in lab, class, or demo environments only.

Normal antennas are "Active " (have LNAs/PAs). "Passive" antennas (don't have LNAs/PAs) are used in lab, class, or demo environments only.

Normal antennas are "Active" (have LNAs/PAs). "Passive" antennas (don't have LNAs/PAs) are used in lab, class, or demo environments only.

Normal antennas are "Active " (have LNAs/PAs). "Passive" antennas (don't have LNAs/PAs) are used in lab, class, or demo environments only.

Normal antennas are "Active" (have LNAs/PAs). "Passive" antennas (don't have LNAs/PAs) are used in lab, class, or demo environments only.

Normal antennas are "Active " (have LNAs/PAs). "Passive" antennas (don't have LNAs/PAs) are used in lab, class, or demo environments only.

Normal antennas are "Active" (have LNAs/PAs). "Passive" antennas (don't have LNAs/PAs) are used in lab, class, or demo environments only.

Normal antennas are "Active " (have LNAs/PAs). "Passive" antennas (don't have LNAs/PAs) are used in lab, class, or demo environments only.

7-17BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 94: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd and Configure a BWX 8305 Basestation

Figure 7-23 Antenna Table Tab

Step 8 Change the values for the RF Cable Loss parameter (last column).

Step 9 Click on Ok twice.

Figure 7-24 Changing the RF Cable Loss Values

Step 10 Select the third tab, W0 Table.

These values are loaded from a script supplied with the antenna. (Discussed in the next section.)

These values are loaded from a script supplied with the antenna. (Discussed in the next section.)

These fields turn transmission and reception for each antenna element ON or OFF individually.

These fields turn transmission and reception for each antenna element ON or OFF individually.These fields turn transmission and reception for each antenna element ON or OFF individually.

These fields turn transmission and reception for each antenna element ON or OFF individually.

These values are loaded from a script supplied with the antenna. (Discussed in the next section.)

These values are loaded from a script supplied with the antenna. (Discussed in the next section.)

Select the second tabSelect the second tabSelect the second tabSelect the second tabSelect the second tabSelect the second tab These values are returned by the "full calibration " process

These values are returned by the "full calibration " processThese values are returned by the "full calibration " process

These values are returned by the "full calibration " processThese values are returned by the "full calibration " process

These values are returned by the "full calibration " process

These values are loaded from a script supplied with the antenna. (Discussed in the next section.)

These values are loaded from a script supplied with the antenna. (Discussed in the next section.)

Click on “Modify All ” to enter the “RF Cable Loss ” values .

Click on “Modify All ” to enter the “RF Cable Loss ” values.Click on “Modify All ” to enter the “RF Cable Loss ” values .

Click on “Modify All ” to enter the “RF Cable Loss ” values.Click on “Modify All ” to enter the “RF Cable Loss ” values .

Click on “Modify All ” to enter the “RF Cable Loss ” values.

These values are loaded from a script supplied with the antenna. (Discussed in the next section.)

These values are loaded from a script supplied with the antenna. (Discussed in the next section.)

These fields turn transmission and reception for each antenna element ON or OFF individually.

These fields turn transmission and reception for each antenna element ON or OFF individually.These fields turn transmission and reception for each antenna element ON or OFF individually.

These fields turn transmission and reception for each antenna element ON or OFF individually.These fields turn transmission and reception for each antenna element ON or OFF individually.

These fields turn transmission and reception for each antenna element ON or OFF individually.These fields turn transmission and reception for each antenna element ON or OFF individually.

These fields turn transmission and reception for each antenna element ON or OFF individually.

These values are loaded from a script supplied with the antenna. (Discussed in the next section.)

These values are loaded from a script supplied with the antenna. (Discussed in the next section.)

Select the second tabSelect the second tabSelect the second tabSelect the second tabSelect the second tabSelect the second tabSelect the second tabSelect the second tabSelect the second tabSelect the second tabSelect the second tabSelect the second tab These values are returned by the "full calibration " process

These values are returned by the "full calibration " processThese values are returned by the "full calibration " process

These values are returned by the "full calibration " processThese values are returned by the "full calibration " process

These values are returned by the "full calibration " processThese values are returned by the "full calibration " process

These values are returned by the "full calibration " processThese values are returned by the "full calibration " process

These values are returned by the "full calibration " processThese values are returned by the "full calibration " process

These values are returned by the "full calibration " process

These values are loaded from a script supplied with the antenna. (Discussed in the next section.)

These values are loaded from a script supplied with the antenna. (Discussed in the next section.)

Click on “Modify All ” to enter the “RF Cable Loss ” values .

Click on “Modify All ” to enter the “RF Cable Loss ” values.Click on “Modify All ” to enter the “RF Cable Loss ” values .

Click on “Modify All ” to enter the “RF Cable Loss ” values.Click on “Modify All ” to enter the “RF Cable Loss ” values .

Click on “Modify All ” to enter the “RF Cable Loss ” values.Click on “Modify All ” to enter the “RF Cable Loss ” values .

Click on “Modify All ” to enter the “RF Cable Loss ” values.Click on “Modify All ” to enter the “RF Cable Loss ” values .

Click on “Modify All ” to enter the “RF Cable Loss ” values.Click on “Modify All ” to enter the “RF Cable Loss ” values .

Click on “Modify All ” to enter the “RF Cable Loss ” values.

Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.

To change a value for the antenna elements, click on the elements. The selected element turns blue. Make the desired change.

To change a value for the antenna elements, click on the elements. The selected element turns blue. Make the desired change.

To change a value for the antenna elements, click on the elements. The selected element turns blue. Make the desired change.

To change a value for the antenna elements, click on the elements. The selected element turns blue. Make the desired change.

To change a value for the antenna elements, click on the elements. The selected element turns blue. Make the desired change.

To change a value for the antenna elements, click on the elements. The selected element turns blue. Make the desired change.

Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.

Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.

To change a value for the antenna elements, click on the elements. The selected element turns blue. Make the desired change.

To change a value for the antenna elements, click on the elements. The selected element turns blue. Make the desired change.

To change a value for the antenna elements, click on the elements. The selected element turns blue. Make the desired change.

To change a value for the antenna elements, click on the elements. The selected element turns blue. Make the desired change.

To change a value for the antenna elements, click on the elements. The selected element turns blue. Make the desired change.

To change a value for the antenna elements, click on the elements. The selected element turns blue. Make the desired change.

To change a value for the antenna elements, click on the elements. The selected element turns blue. Make the desired change.

To change a value for the antenna elements, click on the elements. The selected element turns blue. Make the desired change.

To change a value for the antenna elements, click on the elements. The selected element turns blue. Make the desired change.

To change a value for the antenna elements, click on the elements. The selected element turns blue. Make the desired change.

To change a value for the antenna elements, click on the elements. The selected element turns blue. Make the desired change.

To change a value for the antenna elements, click on the elements. The selected element turns blue. Make the desired change.

Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.

7-18BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 95: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd and Configure a BWX 8305 Basestation

Figure 7-25 W0 Table Tab

Step 11 Select the fourth tab, Calibration Table.

Figure 7-26 Calibration Table Tab

Step 12 Click on Ok, at the bottom of the screen, to continue.

Step 13 Click on Yes in the warning box and click Ok to continue.

These parameters characterize the geometry of the BWX Basestation Antenna.

These parameters characterize the geometry of the BWX Basestation Antenna.

These parameters characterize the geometry of the BWX Basestation Antenna.

These parameters characterize the geometry of the BWX Basestation Antenna.

For Panel antennas, the values are different for the different antenna elements, but the pattern is repeated for each sub-carrier.

For Panel antennas, the values are different for the different antenna elements, but the pattern is repeated for each sub-carrier.

For Panel antennas, the values are different for the different antenna elements, but the pattern is repeated for each sub-carrier.

For Panel antennas, the values are different for the different antenna elements, but the pattern is repeated for each sub-carrier.

The correct values will be loaded from the script supplied with the antenna.

The correct values will be loaded from the script supplied with the antenna.The correct values will be loaded from the script supplied with the antenna.

The correct values will be loaded from the script supplied with the antenna.

These parameters characterize the geometry of the BWX Basestation Antenna.

These parameters characterize the geometry of the BWX Basestation Antenna.

These parameters characterize the geometry of the BWX Basestation Antenna.

These parameters characterize the geometry of the BWX Basestation Antenna.

These parameters characterize the geometry of the BWX Basestation Antenna.

These parameters characterize the geometry of the BWX Basestation Antenna.

These parameters characterize the geometry of the BWX Basestation Antenna.

These parameters characterize the geometry of the BWX Basestation Antenna.

For Panel antennas, the values are different for the different antenna elements, but the pattern is repeated for each sub-carrier.

For Panel antennas, the values are different for the different antenna elements, but the pattern is repeated for each sub-carrier.

For Panel antennas, the values are different for the different antenna elements, but the pattern is repeated for each sub-carrier.

For Panel antennas, the values are different for the different antenna elements, but the pattern is repeated for each sub-carrier.

For Panel antennas, the values are different for the different antenna elements, but the pattern is repeated for each sub-carrier.

For Panel antennas, the values are different for the different antenna elements, but the pattern is repeated for each sub-carrier.

For Panel antennas, the values are different for the different antenna elements, but the pattern is repeated for each sub-carrier.

For Panel antennas, the values are different for the different antenna elements, but the pattern is repeated for each sub-carrier.

The correct values will be loaded from the script supplied with the antenna.

The correct values will be loaded from the script supplied with the antenna.The correct values will be loaded from the script supplied with the antenna.

The correct values will be loaded from the script supplied with the antenna.The correct values will be loaded from the script supplied with the antenna.

The correct values will be loaded from the script supplied with the antenna.The correct values will be loaded from the script supplied with the antenna.

The correct values will be loaded from the script supplied with the antenna.

This table shows the phase weight attributes of the eight antenna elements when the differences in the actual circuit path (both for transmission and for reception) are taken into consideration.

These values in this table are returned by the Full Calibrationprocess.

This table shows the phase weight attributes of the eight antenna elements when the differences in the actual circuit path (both for transmission and for reception) are taken into consideration.

These values in this table are returned by the Full Calibrationprocess.

This table shows the phase weight attributes of the eight antenna elements when the differences in the actual circuit path (both for transmission and for reception) are taken into consideration.

These values in this table are returned by the Full Calibrationprocess.

This table shows the phase weight attributes of the eight antenna elements when the differences in the actual circuit path (both for transmission and for reception) are taken into consideration.

These values in this table are returned by the Full Calibrationprocess.

Select the fourth tabSelect the fourth tabSelect the fourth tabSelect the fourth tab

This table shows the phase weight attributes of the eight antenna elements when the differences in the actual circuit path (both for transmission and for reception) are taken into consideration.

These values in this table are returned by the Full Calibrationprocess.

This table shows the phase weight attributes of the eight antenna elements when the differences in the actual circuit path (both for transmission and for reception) are taken into consideration.

These values in this table are returned by the Full Calibrationprocess.

This table shows the phase weight attributes of the eight antenna elements when the differences in the actual circuit path (both for transmission and for reception) are taken into consideration.

These values in this table are returned by the Full Calibrationprocess.

This table shows the phase weight attributes of the eight antenna elements when the differences in the actual circuit path (both for transmission and for reception) are taken into consideration.

These values in this table are returned by the Full Calibrationprocess.

This table shows the phase weight attributes of the eight antenna elements when the differences in the actual circuit path (both for transmission and for reception) are taken into consideration.

These values in this table are returned by the Full Calibrationprocess.

This table shows the phase weight attributes of the eight antenna elements when the differences in the actual circuit path (both for transmission and for reception) are taken into consideration.

These values in this table are returned by the Full Calibrationprocess.

This table shows the phase weight attributes of the eight antenna elements when the differences in the actual circuit path (both for transmission and for reception) are taken into consideration.

These values in this table are returned by the Full Calibrationprocess.

This table shows the phase weight attributes of the eight antenna elements when the differences in the actual circuit path (both for transmission and for reception) are taken into consideration.

These values in this table are returned by the Full Calibrationprocess.

Select the fourth tabSelect the fourth tabSelect the fourth tabSelect the fourth tabSelect the fourth tabSelect the fourth tabSelect the fourth tabSelect the fourth tab

7-19BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 96: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd and Configure a BWX 8305 Basestation

Figure 7-27 Layer 1 Warning Box

Note The following message could appear after any of the configuration change screens:

The “Golden Data” referred to here are the parameters and values said to be the recommended values. Check to make sure the values you entered are correct for your application and enter “yes” to proceed.

Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.

Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.

Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.

Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.

7-20BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 97: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd and Configure a BWX 8305 Basestation

7.3.3.4 Other Parameters – Optimized Settings

The rest of the Layer1 and Layer2 values will be left at the defaults by the Installer, unless otherwise specified (see Figure 7-28).

Figure 7-28 Defaulted Layer1 / Layer2 / Layer3 Values

7.3.3.5 Set the R6 Interface Parameters

The steps to set the R6 Interface parameters are shown in Figure 7-29 through Figure 7-31. Please refer to these figures as you read the remainder of this section.

Step 1 Select Mobility > R6 Interface and then click on Show Configuration and Configure.

Layer1 / Layer2 / Layer3Tabs Layer1 / Layer2 / Layer3Tabs

7-21BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 98: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd and Configure a BWX 8305 Basestation

Figure 7-29 Selecting the R6 Interface Parameters

Step 2 Select the BWG Name from the drop down menu.

Step 3 Set the Ping Option to Enable.

Step 4 Set the Keep Alive Option to Enable.

Step 5 Click on Ok, at the bottom of the screen, to continue.

Figure 7-30 Changing the R6 Interface Parameters

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.

Click on "Layer1 Tables“. Click on "Layer1 Tables“.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.

Click on "Layer1 Tables“. Click on "Layer1 Tables“.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.

Click on "Layer1 Tables“. Click on "Layer1 Tables“.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the “Mobility” branch of the tree.

Click on "Layer1 Tables“. Click on “R6 Interface”.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on “Configure”.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click on Show Configuration toView the current R6 InterfaceConfiguration.

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.

Click on "Layer1 Tables“. Click on "Layer1 Tables“.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.

Click on "Layer1 Tables“. Click on "Layer1 Tables“.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.

Click on "Layer1 Tables“. Click on "Layer1 Tables“.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the “Mobility” branch of the tree.

Click on "Layer1 Tables“. Click on “R6 Interface”.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on “Configure”.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click on Show Configuration toView the current R6 InterfaceConfiguration.

Set the Keep Alive Option to Enable.

Set the Ping Option to Enable.

Select the BWG name from the drop down menu.

Click on “Ok”.

Set the Keep Alive Option to Enable.Set the Keep Alive Option to Enable.

Set the Ping Option to Enable.

Select the BWG name from the drop down menu.Select the BWG name from the drop down menu.

Click on “Ok”.Click on “Ok”.

7-22BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 99: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd and Configure a BWX 8305 Basestation

Step 6 Click on Yes in the warning box and click Ok in the Information box to continue.

Figure 7-31 R6 Interface Warning & Information Boxes

7.3.3.6 Set the CAC Parameters

The steps to set the CAC parameters are shown in Figure 7-32 through Figure 7-34. Please refer to these figures as you read the remainder of this section.

Step 1 Select Mobility > CAC and then click on Show Configuration and Configure.

Figure 7-32 Selecting the CAC Parameters

Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.

Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.

Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.

Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.

Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.

Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.

Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.Click on “Yes“.

Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the “Mobility” branch of the tree.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on “Configure”.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click on Show Configuration toView the current R6 InterfaceConfiguration.

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the “Mobility” branch of the tree.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on “Configure”.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click on Show Configuration toView the current CACConfiguration.

Click on “Click on “CAC”.

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the “Mobility” branch of the tree.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on “Configure”.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click on Show Configuration toView the current R6 InterfaceConfiguration.

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.

Click on this icon to open the "Air Interface branch of the tree.Click on this icon to open the “Mobility” branch of the tree.

In order to make changes, click on "Configure“.In order to make changes, click on “Configure”.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click onShow Configurationto view the current "Layer 1" configuration.

Click on Show Configuration toView the current CACConfiguration.

Click on “Click on “CAC”.

7-23BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 100: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd and Configure a BWX 8305 Basestation

Step 2 Select the BWG Name from the drop down menu.

Step 3 Set the Ping Option to Enable.

Step 4 Set the Keep Alive Option to Enable.

Step 5 Click on Ok, at the bottom of the screen, to continue.

Figure 7-33 Changing the CAC Parameters

Step 6 Click on Yes in the warning box and click Ok in the Information box to continue.

Figure 7-34 CAC Information Boxes

7.3.3.7 Edit and Run the BWX Basestation Antenna Script

The electrical characteristics of each individual BWX Basestation Antenna are measured in the lab at different frequencies. These measurements are put on a compact disk in the form of CLI Scripts so that they can be loaded in the BS record corresponding to the BS with which this BWX Basestation Antenna is used. This RFS Configuration disk accompanies the BWX Basestation Antenna equipment when it is shipped.

Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“. Set the BW Flag to Enable.

Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.Click on “Ok“.

7-24BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 101: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd and Configure a BWX 8305 Basestation

The disk includes an RFS script and a Quick Guide with procedures for selecting the appropriate power splitter loss values and W0 values defining the geometry of the antenna to be entered into the EMS database for this piece of equipment. Each configuration disk is unique to the individual BWX Basestation Antenna that is shipped; therefore, you cannot use the same disk on other BWX Basestation Antenna equipment.

To load these values into the EMS database, perform the following steps.

Step 1 Insert the RFS Configuration disk into the CD-ROM drive of the test EMS computer.

Step 2 Copy the folder named “RFS” that is on the disk to the test EMS Server:C:\CiscoEMS\scripts.

Figure 7-35 Copying the RFS Script

Step 3 Open the new folder on the EMS Server. You will see a list of file names. The format of the file name is as follows: RFS_serial number_frequency.cli.

Example:RFS_024300001_2402500.cli RFS with serial number 024300001 and a center frequency of 2.4025 GHz.

Verify the correct serial number in the file name against the serial number of the BWX Basestation Antenna equipment. The equipment serial number may be found on the back of the BWX Basestation Antenna panel. Determine which file you need to run based on the provisioned frequency of your BS.

Note Select the frequency that is closest to your provisioned center frequency. To find the provisioned center frequency for your BS, open the EMS CAM (GUI), select the BTS tab, and highlight the specific BS. Next, click on Air Interface > Layer 2 > Carrier Data > Show Configuration. This will display the center frequency information.

Step 4 Open the selected CLI file for editing using any text processing application. Notice the power splitter and W0 values listed there. Either write them down or print them out.

Copy the "RFS" file to "C: \NaviniEMS\scriptsCopy the "RFS" file to "C: \NaviniEMS \scripts

Open "C:\NaviniEMS\Scripts \RFS", select the file with data measured at the frequency closest to the center frequency of the BTS

Open "C:\NaviniEMS\Scripts\RFS", select the file with data measured at the frequency closest to the center frequency of the BTS

Copy the "RFS" file to "C: \NaviniEMS\scriptsCopy the "RFS" file to "C: NaviniEMS\ scripts

Open "C:\NaviniEMS\Scripts \RFS", select the file with data measured at the frequency closest to the center frequency of the BTS

Open "C:\CiscoEMS \Scripts\RFS", select the file with data measured at the frequency closest to the center frequency of the BTS

C:\CiscoEMS\scripts

Copy the "RFS" file to "C: \NaviniEMS\scriptsCopy the "RFS" file to "C: \NaviniEMS \scripts

Open "C:\NaviniEMS\Scripts \RFS", select the file with data measured at the frequency closest to the center frequency of the BTS

Open "C:\NaviniEMS\Scripts\RFS", select the file with data measured at the frequency closest to the center frequency of the BTS

Copy the "RFS" file to "C: \NaviniEMS\scriptsCopy the "RFS" file to "C :\CiscoEMS\scripts

Open "C:\NaviniEMS\Scripts \RFS", select the file with data measured at the frequency closest to the center frequency of the BTS

Open "C:\CiscoEMS \Scripts\RFS", select the file with data measured at the frequency closest to the center frequency of the BTS

C:\CiscoEMS\scripts

Copy the "RFS" file to "C: \NaviniEMS\scriptsCopy the "RFS" file to "C: \NaviniEMS \scripts

Open "C:\NaviniEMS\Scripts \RFS", select the file with data measured at the frequency closest to the center frequency of the BTS

Open "C:\NaviniEMS\Scripts\RFS", select the file with data measured at the frequency closest to the center frequency of the BTS

Copy the "RFS" file to "C: \NaviniEMS\scriptsCopy the "RFS" file to "C: NaviniEMS\ scripts

Open "C:\NaviniEMS\Scripts \RFS", select the file with data measured at the frequency closest to the center frequency of the BTS

Open "C:\CiscoEMS \Scripts\RFS", select the file with data measured at the frequency closest to the center frequency of the BTS

C:\CiscoEMS\scripts

Copy the "RFS" file to "C: \NaviniEMS\scriptsCopy the "RFS" file to "C: \NaviniEMS \scripts

Open "C:\NaviniEMS\Scripts \RFS", select the file with data measured at the frequency closest to the center frequency of the BTS

Open "C:\NaviniEMS\Scripts\RFS", select the file with data measured at the frequency closest to the center frequency of the BTS

Copy the "RFS" file to "C: \NaviniEMS\scriptsCopy the "RFS" file to "C :\CiscoEMS\scripts

Open "C:\NaviniEMS\Scripts \RFS", select the file with data measured at the frequency closest to the center frequency of the BTS

Open "C:\CiscoEMS \Scripts\RFS", select the file with data measured at the frequency closest to the center frequency of the BTS

C:\CiscoEMS\scripts

7-25BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 102: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd and Configure a BWX 8305 Basestation

Step 5 Modify the line that starts with “bts” by changing the BTS ID for your BS. The default is “BTS 1”. For example, if the BTS ID for that BTS is 252, change the “1” to “252”. If the EMS ID was changed (default is 1), also modify the first line, which starts with “#EMSId” to match the new EMS ID. For example, if the EMD ID is 32, change the “1” to “32”.

Figure 7-36 Editing the RFS Script

Step 6 Save this file (keeping its ‘cli’ extension), and then close it.

Step 7 Start the EMS Config CLI application. To configure the BS with the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna information, enter the following commands:

>enable <user name> (the “password:” prompt appears next) <password> >configure >script scripts/rfs/rfs_<serial number>_<7-digit frequency>.cli

Note For Unix Operating Systems, the CLI text is case sensitive and the slash marks should be backward slashes instead of forward slashes.

Step 8 View the power splitter values in EMS to verify that the CLI script ran as expected. The power splitter values may be found under Layer 1 / Show Configuration > Antenna Table. You will need to refresh the active screen to view the updated information (Figure 7-37).

Change the BTS # to match the actual BTS ID.Change the BTS # to match the actual BTS ID.

If you changed the EMS ID, change the EMS # to match the actual EMS ID.

If you changed the EMS ID, change the EMS # to match the actual EMS ID.

Open the file selected with a text-only editor (i.e. -WordPad).Open the file selected with a text-only editor (i.e. -WordPad).

Change the BTS # to match the actual BTS ID.Change the BTS # to match the actual BTS ID.

If you changed the EMS ID, change the EMS # to match the actual EMS ID.

If you changed the EMS ID, change the EMS # to match the actual EMS ID.

Open the file selected with a text-only editor (i.e. -WordPad).Open the file selected with a text-only editor (i.e. -WordPad).

7-26BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 103: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd and Configure a BWX 8305 Basestation

Figure 7-37 Example of Power Splitter Values (Before and After Script)

Step 9 View the W0 Table values in EMS to verify that the CLI script ran as expected. The W0 values may be found under Layer 1 / Show Configuration > W0 Table. You will need to click on “Show Configuration” to view the updated information (Figure 7-38).

Figure 7-38 Example of W0 Table Values (Before and After Script)

Step 10 Type Exit twice to exit the EMS Config CLI edit mode.

Before. These are the default values.Before. These are the default values.

After. These are the actual values loaded from the script.

After. These are the actual values loaded from the script.

Before. These are the default values.Before. These are the default values.

After. These are the actual values loaded from the script.

After. These are the actual values loaded from the script.

Before. These are the default values.Before. These are the default values.

After. These are the actual values loaded from the script.

After. These are the actual values loaded from the script.

Before. These are the default values.Before. These are the default values.

After. These are the actual values loaded from the script.

After. These are the values loaded from the script.

After. These are the actual values loaded by the script.

After. These are the actual values loaded by the script.

Before. These are the default panelRFS values assumed by the EMS Server code.

Before. These are the default panelRFS values assumed by the EMS Server code.

Before. These are the default panelRFS values assumed by the EMS Server code.

Before. These are the default panelRFS values assumed by the EMS Server code.

After. These are the actual values loaded by the script.

After. These are the actual values loaded by the script.After. These are the actual values loaded by the script.

After. These are the actual values loaded by the script.

Before. These are the default panelRFS values assumed by the EMS Server code.

Before. These are the default panelRFS values assumed by the EMS Server code.

Before. These are the default panelRFS values assumed by the EMS Server code.

Before. These are the default panelRFS values assumed by the EMS Server code.

Before. These are the default panelRFS values assumed by the EMS Server code.

Before. These are the default panelRFS values assumed by the EMS Server code.

Before. These are the default panelRFS values assumed by the EMS Server code.

Before. These are the default panelRFS values assumed by the EMS Server code.

After. These are the actual values loaded by the script.

After. These are the values loaded by the script.After. These are the actual values loaded by the script.

After. These are the actual values loaded by the script.

Before. These are the default panelRFS values assumed by the EMS Server code.

Before. These are the default panelRFS values assumed by the EMS Server code.

Before. These are the default panelRFS values assumed by the EMS Server code.

Before. These are the default panelRFS values assumed by the EMS Server code.

After. These are the actual values loaded by the script.

After. These are the actual values loaded by the script.After. These are the actual values loaded by the script.

After. These are the actual values loaded by the script.

Before. These are the default panelRFS values assumed by the EMS Server code.

Before. These are the default panelRFS values assumed by the EMS Server code.

Before. These are the default panelRFS values assumed by the EMS Server code.

Before. These are the default panelRFS values assumed by the EMS Server code.

Before. These are the default panelRFS values assumed by the EMS Server code.

Before. These are the default panelRFS values assumed by the EMS Server code.

Before. These are the default panelRFS values assumed by the EMS Server code.

Before. These are the default panelRFS values assumed by the EMS Server code.

After. These are the actual values loaded by the script.

After. These are the values loaded by the script.

7-27BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 104: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningPower Up and Provision the BWX 8305 Basestation

7.4 Power Up and Provision the BWX 8305 BasestationReference: BWX EMS Alarm Resolution Reference Manual

7.4.1 Prerequisites • The EMS must be up and IP-reachable from the BS

• The BWG must be running and configured

• The BS must have been already added to and configured in the EMS

• All equipment in the system must be IP-reachable

• If a laptop with a Test EMS is being used (recommended procedure during commissioning) use Ethernet cables to connect this laptop to the BS through a local switch

• Make sure the ‘Test’ EMS server is running on a laptop

• The BXW 8303 Basestation Timing System unit should be powered on and “locked” (satellite acquisition completed) PRIOR TO powering on the BS.

Note The initial configuration of the BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System should take place in advance of powering up the BWX 8305 Basestation. The initial POS FIX MODE survey takes approximately 30 - 40 minutes.

• Connect the laptop to the BS using a serial cable

• Open a terminal emulation session

• Tera Term Pro

• HyperTerm

• Other terminal emulation programs

• Verify the serial port settings

Figure 7-39 Serial Port Settings

7-28BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 105: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningPower Up and Provision the BWX 8305 Basestation

7.4.2 Initial Bootup

7.4.2.1 Power On

Caution The BXW 8303 Basestation Timing System unit should be powered on and locked (satellite acquisition completed) PRIOR TO powering on the BS(s) connected to it. This initial configuration should take place in advance of powering up the BS(s). The initial POS FIX MODE survey takes approximately 30 - 40 minutes.

Step 1 With the laptop connected to the BS, through its serial port and TeraTerm Pro or Hyperterm running, power up the BS. The Power switch is located on the lower left of the BS faceplate (Figure 7-40).

Figure 7-40 BWX 8305 Basestation Power Switch

Power SwitchPower Switch

7-29BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 106: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningPower Up and Provision the BWX 8305 Basestation

Step 2 The system boot sequence starts. When the “Press any key to stop auto-boot...” prompt appears, DO NOT press any keys. (Example 7-1).

Example 7-1 System Boot Sequence Begins

Step 3 When the “Auto-booting (Enter “configure setup)” prompt appears, type the word config before the countdown reaches zero (Example 7-2).

Step 4 At the boot prompt, type p and hit <Enter> to see the current value of the boot parameters (Example 7-2).

Step 5 At the boot prompt type c and hit <Enter> to configure the boot parameters, one at a time (Example 7-2).

Note Each time you hit <Enter> the next parameter and its current value are displayed and you have the opportunity to type a new value. When an incorrect parameter appears, type the correct value and hit <Enter> to continue.

Press any key to stop auto-boot...0

auto-booting...boot device : ataa

unit number : 0 processor number : 0

host name : hostfile name : core

inet on ethernet (e) : 192.168.1.100:fffff800inet on backplane (b): 10.0.0.1:fffffffc

host inet (h) : 192.168.1.220gateway inet (g) : 192.168.1.1

user (u) : ateftp password (pw) : ate

flags (f) : 0x8 target name (tn) : nero

startup script (s) : loads/ldlineupother (o) : mv0

CPLD Firmware Version: 0x18Attaching to ATA disk device... done.

Loading /ata0a/LOADS/BTSB/core...22257072Starting at 0x10000...

WHEN YOU SEE THIS PROMPT,DON’T PRESS ANY KEY!!!

In a second or two, a "0" will be displayed and the boot sequence will contine…

But if If you hit any key, a “1” will be displayed, the boot process will be interrupted, and you will be taken into the VxWorks shell (you will see the VxWorks Boot Prompt).

THERE IS NO REASON FOR YOU TO GO INSIDE THE VxWorks SHELL!!!!!

Ignore all this

7-30BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 107: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningPower Up and Provision the BWX 8305 Basestation

Example 7-2 System Boot Sequence

Step 6 Enter p to verify(Example 7-3).

Step 7 When all changes have been made, type @ and hit <Enter> to resume the boot process (Example 7-3).

Auto-booting (Enter "config" for setup)... 17config[Navini Boot]: [Navini Boot]: [Navini Boot]: pdate and time : 10/22/2008[14:21] autoboot countdown : delayed ems inet : 192.168.1.220 snmp community : public traffic path : enetmac address : 00:04:6a:00:3b:ccip on enet (active) : 192.168.1.100 ip on enet (standby) : 192.168.1.101netmask on enet : 255.255.248.0 mgmt vlan id|priority: 1:0 [1-4094]:[0-7]ip on backplane : 10.0.0.1 gateway on enet : 192.168.1.1 [Navini Boot]: [Navini Boot]: [Navini Boot]: cdate and time : 10/22/2008[14:22] MM/dd/yyyy[hh:mm] autoboot countdown : delayed [quick|delayed] ems inet : 192.168.1.220 192.168.2.208snmp community : public traffic path : enetmac address : 00:04:6a:00:3b:ccip on enet (active) : 192.168.1.100 192.168.2.67ip on enet (standby) : 192.168.1.101netmask on enet : 255.255.248.0 255.255.255.0mgmt vlan id|priority: 1:0 [1-4094]:[0-7]ip on backplane : 10.0.0.1 gateway on enet : 192.168.1.1 192.168.2.1[Navini Boot]:

At this prompt, type "config" before the autoboot countdown expires (by default it is set to "delayed" lasting 20 seconds)At the Navini Boot prompt, type "p" and hit <Enter> to check the current value of the parameters

Identify the bootlineparameters that need to be changed

At the Navini Boot prompt, type “c" and hit <Enter> to change the current value of the parameters

Change the desired parameters, one at a time

7-31BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 108: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningPower Up and Provision the BWX 8305 Basestation

Example 7-3 Changing the Boot Parameter Values

Example 7-4 Continuation of the Boot Process

[Navini Boot]: pdate and time : 10/22/2008[14:22]

autoboot countdown : delayed ems inet : 192.168.2.208

snmp community : public traffic path : enet

mac address : 00:04:6a:00:3b:ccip on enet (active) : 192.168.2.67

ip on enet (standby) : 192.168.2.68netmask on enet : 255.255.255.0

mgmt vlan id|priority: 1:0 [1-4094]:[0-7]ip on backplane : 10.0.0.1

gateway on enet : 192.168.2.1 [Navini Boot]:

[Navini Boot]: @

CPLD Firmware Version: 0x18Starting File System......................Done

Mounting Drive /dev0......................DoneStarting TCP/IP Stack.....................Done

Attached TCP/IP interface to mv unit 0Attaching interface lo0...done

Mounting Remote Filesystem................Default Route added,Gateway = 192.168.2.1

Host 172.31.26.201 added to host table ...........DoneStarting Telnet Daemon....................DoneStarting Load Monitoring Tools............Done

Loading symbol table from /cf/LOADS/BTSB/core.sym ..DoneStarting WDB Tools........................Done

Starting Target Shell.....................DoneInitializing System Logger................Done

At the prompt, type "p"and hit <Enter> to verify the changes

Enter "c" for changes; "@" to continue

Programming System Support Fpga ..........Done

Programming Shazam Fpga ..................DoneProgramming Aphex Fpga ...................Done

Programming RF Fpga ......................DoneStarting L1 DSP Bootloader ........................

WIMAX APPCP Image Path = /cf/LOADS/BTSB/CP01_MX_IMAGE.bin ... : File open - Success

PP01 Image Path = /cf/LOADS/BTSB/CCP01_MX_IMAGE.bin ... : File open - SuccessXP Image Path = /cf/LOADS/BTSB/XP_MX_IMAGE.bin ... : File open - SuccessReset Vals = 0

------------------- DSP STATUS REGISTERS ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

|GDSW Ver|ResetReg|AUX|PP01|PP23|PP45|PP67|CP01|CP23|CP45|CP67|CP89|--------------------------------------------------------------------

| 98 | 0 | b | b | 0 | 0 | 0 | b | b | b | b | 0 |--------------------------------------------------------------------

Starting MPC184 Security Processor........DoneEnable All: XP, CCP, [4]CPs (DSP Bootline Flag: 0x5f)...BootlineMask = 5f

Calling OAM Mem Pool##########Starting L2 Tasks############

START BtsL2L3If::BtsL2L3If OAM Mem Pool... Done

Initializing GDSW Parameters..............DoneStarting MCE..............................Done

Starting AsnCom...........................DoneStarting AsnComRx.........................Done

Starting MME..............................DoneInitializing OAM MemPools .............Done

Initializing L2 Applications.....................DoneInitializing Doubly List..................Done

Starting BTS L2 L1If .....................Done

7-32BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 109: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningPower Up and Provision the BWX 8305 Basestation

Example 7-5 Continuation of the Boot Process

Starting BTS L3IfAgent....................Done

Initializing BTS L2 MemPools .............DoneInitializing BTS MacSys...................Done

Initializing RM Helper....................DoneInitializing Mac Resource.................Done

Initializing BTS UCD/DCD Manager..........DoneInitializing BTS Ranging Manager..........Done

Initializing UL MgmtMsg Processor.........DoneInitializing BTS DSx Msg Manager..........DoneInitializing BTS CS Processor.............Done

Initializing BTS MSS Manager..............DoneInitializing BTS CID Manager.............Done

Initializing BTS PDU Processor............DoneInitializing BTS PHY Processor............Done

Initializing BTS SF Manager...............DoneStarting BTS L2AUTHENTICATOR TASK.....................Done

Starting BTS L2 OAM.......................DoneInitializing BTS NBR_ADV Manager..........Done

Starting MakeInstanceDone

Starting BtsL2L3If................DoneStarting BTS L2MAC Rx.....................Done

Starting CDI Nero.........................DoneStarting EtherBridge......................Done

Starting ARP FSM..........................DoneStarting ARP..............................Done

Starting Dpf..............................DoneStarting RME..............................Done

BootlineMask = 5f EnableFlag = ffc003

Starting PHY Processing...................Done

7-33BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 110: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningPower Up and Provision the BWX 8305 Basestation

Example 7-6 Continuation of the Boot Process

Example 7-7 Completion of the Boot Process

When booting from the EMS you get this:Selecting Config Data Source as EMS.......Done

Initializing NvRam Mib....................DoneInitializing SNMP Agent...................Done

EMS (192.168.2.208) Ping Attempt..........DoneSelecting Config Data Source as EMS.......Done

Initializing NvRam Mib....................DoneInitializing SNMP Agent...................Done

EMS (192.168.2.208) Ping Attempt..........DoneRequesting EMS for Configuration Data.....Done

Configuring BTS from EMS..................DoneStarting MMM..............................Done

Starting Sfm..............................Done!!!!!!!! BTS Initialization Complete !!!!!!!!!

This step may take a few moments. If the BTS fails to receive the configuration data from the EMS (the line will say “Pending” instead of “Done”), this step will timeout and the BTS will request the configuration data data again. If the BTS keeps trying and trying and still does not get the data from the EMS (each iteration may take 3 or 4 minutes), there is a communication problem between the BTS and the EMS. Check the Ethernet connections and/or the EMS IP address under SystemGeneral in the BTS Configuration record.

This step may take a few moments. If the BTS fails to receive the configuration data from the EMS (the line will say “Pending” instead of “Done”), this step will timeout and the BTS will request the configuration data data again. If the BTS keeps trying and trying and still does not get the data from the EMS (each iteration may take 3 or 4 minutes), there is a communication problem between the BTS and the EMS. Check the Ethernet connections and/or the EMS IP address under SystemGeneral in the BTS Configuration record.

CCC CCC (TM)CCC CCCCCC CCC

CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCCCCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCCCCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC

CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCCCCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCCCCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCCCCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC P R O F I L E CCCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC CCC

CCC CCC Copyright (c) Cisco Systems, Inc. 2008CCC CCC Copyright (c) Texas Instruments, Inc. 2000-2001CCC CCC Copyright (c) Wind River Systems, Inc. 1984-2002

### ##### #### ### ### ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ### ##### #### ### ###

S Y S T E M S KERNEL : VxWorks5.5.1(WIND version 2.6)BSP : 1.5RW7.0.2.9CPU: Cisco Nero 7447A Power PC. Processor #0.Memory Size: 0xfe00000.WDB: Ready.

Reset Reason: S_RESETCurrent time is WED OCT 22 14:27:22 2008 S_RESET means reboot from the console. Also possible

are UNKNOWN ("hard reset"), EMS_RESET (Reset BTSfrom the EMS) and WATCHDOG (BTS rebooted by itself)

S_RESET means reboot from the console. Also possible are UNKNOWN ("hard reset"), EMS_RESET (Reset BTSfrom the EMS) and WATCHDOG (BTS rebooted by itself)

7-34BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 111: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningPower Up and Provision the BWX 8305 Basestation

7.4.2.2 Check for Alarms

To check the EMS CAM for alarms, follow the instructions in Figure 7-41. All alarms must first be acknowledged, then cleared. Refer to the BWX EMS Alarm Resolution Reference Manual for look-up descriptions and resolutions for each alarm.

Figure 7-41 Check Alarms

Refer to Figure 7-42 for the Alarm Severity indicators.

1.Select BTS tab, then select one or more BTSs1. Select BTS tab, then select one or more BTSs

2. Click on theAlarm Icon to see the BTS Alarms

2. Click on theAlarm Icon to see the BTS Alarms

A few alarms will appear and will be automatically cleared during the BTS boot.Once an alarm is "cleared" and "acknowledged", it disappears.If an alarm is not automatically acknowledged you can acknowledge it manually to make it go away.

A few alarms will appear and will be automatically cleared during the BTS boot.Once an alarm is "cleared" and "acknowledged", it disappears.If an alarm is not automatically acknowledged you can acknowledge it manually to make it go away.

This is an alternative to viewing the outstanding BTS alarms by entering the ShowAlarmscommand at the "console" (terminal emulation) window

This is an alternative to viewing the outstanding BTS alarms by entering the ShowAlarmscommand at the "console" (terminal emulation) window

1.Select BTS tab, then select one or more BTSs1. Select BTS tab, then select one or more BTSs

2. Click on theAlarm Icon to see the BTS Alarms

2. Click on theAlarm Icon to see the BTS Alarms

A few alarms will appear and will be automatically cleared during the BTS boot.Once an alarm is "cleared" and "acknowledged", it disappears.If an alarm is not automatically acknowledged you can acknowledge it manually to make it go away.

A few alarms will appear and will be automatically cleared during the BTS boot.Once an alarm is "cleared" and "acknowledged", it disappears.If an alarm is not automatically acknowledged you can acknowledge it manually to make it go away.

This is an alternative to viewing the outstanding BTS alarms by entering the ShowAlarmscommand at the "console" (terminal emulation) window

This is an alternative to viewing the outstanding BTS alarms by entering the ShowAlarmscommand at the "console" (terminal emulation) window

7-35BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 112: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningPower Up and Provision the BWX 8305 Basestation

Figure 7-42 Alarm Severity Indicators

7.4.3 Provision the BWX 8305 BasestationWhen all of the basic BS configuration is completed, the BS needs to be provisioned. If the BS is “provisioned”, then any change to the record immediately affects the BS. If “unprovisioned”, you can change the record without affecting the BS. Certain actions (like “Calibrate”) require that the BS be “provisioned”.

The steps to provision the BS are shown in Figure 7-20 through Figure 7-27. Please refer to these figures as you read the remainder of this section.

Step 1 From the BTS tab, click on the BS which is to be provisioned.

Step 2 In the pull-down select Action > Provision to make that record active for the new BS.

Severity indicators

1 – Warning 2 – Minor 3 – Major 4 - Critical

7-36BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 113: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningPower Up and Provision the BWX 8305 Basestation

Figure 7-43 Provisioning the BWX 8305 Basestation

Step 3 Click on Yes in the warning box and click Ok to continue.

Figure 7-44 Provisioning Warning

7-37BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 114: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningCalibration

7.5 Calibration

7.5.1 What it Means to CalibratePerforming a calibration on the BS detects the phase differential between the antenna elements and matches the output power across all antenna elements in the BWX Basestation Antenna. On a new installation, the calibration procedure should be performed at least 3 times to verify consistency of the returned values. Ensure that the BS has been powered on, with the Power Amplifiers on, for at least 15 minutes to allow them to warm up and stabilize.

Caution Do not attempt to calibrate the Basestation while performing a software upgrade or downgrade. Calibrating during an upgrade or downgrade can interfere with the loading of files into system components and may produce faults or other problems.

7.5.2 Types of Calibration Assuming the BS has been powered up and left on for at least 15 minutes, and that all alarms have been cleared, you can now run a calibration. There are 2 types of calibration:

• Full Calibration

• Online Calibration

Typically, only the Full Calibration is done manually by the Service Provider. For the initial installation, the Full Calibration will be run at least 3 times.

Note Cisco recommends that a Full Calibration be performed on each BS, at least once every 4 weeks.

When a Full Calibration is invoked, the BS is out of service for about 2 minutes. After installation, commissioning, and acceptance testing, Cisco recommends that a Full Calibration be run every 2 weeks during off hours. During Full Calibration the Digital card pre-calibrates itself and the BS closes any ongoing sessions with Modems that are currently registered. The transmit gain in the IF section is adjusted for each of the 8 transmit paths individually so that the level of power delivered at the base of each antenna element is exactly the value specified by the Antenna Power parameter.

The receive gain is adjusted for each of the 8 receive paths individually so that when the level of power specified by the Rx Sensitivity parameter is received at the base of each antenna element, it will correspond to the maximum voltage that the card can handle. If the card is unable to adjust either the TX gain or the RX gain for a particular antenna element, both gain values are set to zero (0) and this antenna element is taken out of service.

Then, all paths are turned on using the gain settings just determined by the calibration, and the phase and amplitude changes introduced in each sub-carrier between the BS and the base of each antenna path are determined, both in the transmit and receive directions. This is done with power applied to all antenna paths and using the TX and RX gains in the card, as determined in the previous step, in order to achieve the power levels specified by the Antenna Power and Rx Sensitivity parameters.

Once the new phase change values are determined, they are compared with previous results kept in the BS’s memory. If there is a large discrepancy with the previous results, an alarm is generated and the BS uses the most likely correct set of values. Otherwise, the new results are sent to the EMS and kept in the BS’s memory for future comparisons.

7-38BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 115: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningCalibration

When the BS is calibrated, the measured values are stored in the BS, erasing the previous results, and then reported to the EMS to be stored under Air Interface > Layer 1. The Digital card pre-calibration values are placed in the General tab. The TX and RX gain values are placed in the Antenna Table.

7.5.3 Calibration ProcedureBefore you can calibrate, ensure the following requirements are met:

• The BS must have been previously added and configured in the EMS database

• The BS must be powered up for at least 15 minutes, booted properly, stable (not resetting) and all alarms cleared before running the calibration

• Select the BS on the EMS CAM by clicking on the BS

• Right-click on the highlighted BS and select Action > Provision

Note The BS must be provisioned before you can calibrate. If the BS is not provisioned, refer to 7.4.3 Provision the BWX 8305 Basestation for the steps to perform the provisioning.

Step 1 Select Air Interface > Layer 1 > Layer 1 Tables.

Step 2 Click on Show Configuration.

Note Go through the first three tabs to verify that the proper values are entered in the Antenna Power, Receiver Sensitivity, RF & Cal Cable Loss, Power Splitter, and other fields.

Step 3 From a terminal emulation program type in the command, caldebugon and hit <Enter> (Figure 7-45).

Figure 7-45 Show Configuration

Step 4 With the Antenna Table tab selected, click on Calibrate

bts-221 [Active]% caldebugonbts 221 [Active]%

Make sure you type " caldebugoffwhen you are done with the calibration!!!

Terminal Emulation Programbts-221 [Active]% caldebugonbts 221 [Active]%

Make sure you type " caldebugoffwhen you are done with the calibration!!!

Terminal Emulation Programbts-221 [Active]% caldebugonbts 221 [Active]%

Make sure you type " caldebugoffwhen you are done with the calibration!!!

Terminal Emulation Programbts-221 [Active]% caldebugonbts 221 [Active]%

Make sure you type " caldebugoffwhen you are done with the calibration!!!

Terminal Emulation Programbts-221 [Active]% caldebugonbts 221 [Active]%

Make sure you type " caldebugoffwhen you are done with the calibration!!!

Terminal Emulation Programbts-221 [Active]% caldebugonbts 221 [Active]%

Make sure you type " caldebugoffwhen you are done with the calibration!!!

Terminal Emulation Programbts-221 [Active]% caldebugonbts 221 [Active]%

Make sure you type " caldebugoffwhen you are done with the calibration!!!

Terminal Emulation Programbts-221 [Active]% caldebugonbts 221 [Active]%

Make sure you type " caldebugoffwhen you are done with the calibration!!!

Terminal Emulation Program

7-39BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 116: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningCalibration

Step 5 Select Full Calibration and Calibrate and then click on Yes. Refer to Figure 7-46.

Figure 7-46 Full Calibration

Note If you forgot to provision the BS in the EMS database, you will see the error shown in Figure 7-47. Click on Ok and refer to 7.4.3 Provision the BWX 8305 Basestation.

Figure 7-47 Provision Error

When the calibration is complete, the Full Calibration window changes and displays the finish time and the result. Note that the result of “Succeeded” means that the calibration finished, not that the calibration results were successful (Figure 7-48).

Step 6 Click on Close to close the Full Calibration window

Click on the " Antenna Table" tabClick on "Calibrate"Select"Full Calibration" and click on "Calibrate"Click on "Yes"

Click on the " Antenna Table" tabClick on "Calibrate"Select"Full Calibration" and click on "Calibrate"Click on "Yes"

Click on the " Antenna Table" tabClick on "Calibrate"Select"Full Calibration" and click on "Calibrate"Click on "Yes"

Click on the " Antenna Table" tabClick on "Calibrate"Select"Full Calibration" and click on "Calibrate"Click on "Yes"

7-40BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 117: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningCalibration

Figure 7-48 Calibration Results

Step 7 Click on Show Configuration to see if the calibration is successful. In the EMS CAM highlight the BS and check the Antenna Table transmit and receive gain values (Figure 7-49).

Note A value of zero indicates that a proper value for the gain for that path (either in the TX or Rx direction) could not be found.

Figure 7-49 Check Antenna Table Values

Step 8 Check the calibration results for the Transmit and Receive Gain Values.

7-41BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 118: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningCalibration

Note The BS system has a Transmit Gain value range of 1-64 and a Receive Gain value range of either 115-255 or 0-140. When evaluating calibration gain words, it is important to remember that the size of the value does not determine if a problem exists.

To determine if a problem exists, use the following information:

• At the BS console, look at the cal error message. The calibration should pass without any errors.

• Look at the Transmit Gain values. They should be relatively close to each other (values: 1 - 64).

• Find the median Transmit Gain value. The median is the value that falls in the middle of the lowest to highest values. Example: If you ordered the values 9, 8, 8, 7, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 3, 3, 2, 1, 1….the median would be 5 because 5 falls midway from the top or bottom of the ranked values.

• Compare all the other Transmit Gain values to the median value. All Transmit Gain values should be within a plus or minus range of 6 units from the median. Therefore, if the median is 50, values from 44 to 56 would be acceptable.

• Look at the Receive Gain values. (values: 115 – 255)

• Find the median Receive Gain value.

• Compare all the Receive Gain values to the median value. All Receive Gain values should be within a plus or minus range of 8 units from the median. Criteria: Transmit Gain Words +/- 6 from the median value Receive Gain Words +/- 8 from the median value

If this is a new installation (or a problem is found), repeat the calibration procedure (Steps 4-8). This will be the second of three calibrations you will perform. Click on the Configure button for this BS, and a new window appears (Figure 7-50). The main “Show” window still shows the results of the first calibration. The Configuration window shows the values corresponding to the second calibration.

7-42BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 119: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningCalibration

Figure 7-50 Second Calibration (if needed)

Compare the values of both calibrations. The corresponding results should be within +/- 3 units. Close the Configuration window, and click on Show Configuration to move the second calibration values into the main window.

Next, perform a third calibration (Steps 4-8) and compare the results with the second calibration values. An example of successful calibration results is provided in Figure 7-51. An example of calibration results with errors is shown in Figure 7-52.

7-43BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 120: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningCalibration

Figure 7-51 Example – Successful Calibration

Data received from Layer1:

antenna txGain rxGain0 18 671 15 672 17 633 18 714 15 685 17 706 17 637 16 67

carrierId antenna txCalWeightX txCalWeightY rxCalWeightX rxCalWeightY rxSNR txSNR0 0 32.0751 1167.99 8929.38 57776 14.8713 -58.03110 1 -51.7158 1165.44 -17116.8 -56872.4 14.6449 -49.66810 2 712.152 858.821 25107.3 53970 14.9417 -65.67720 3 970.448 649.556 2988.24 -57892.1 14.7349 -60.32160 4 -144.55 1162.05 -31553.2 -48341.8 14.5399 -52.74380 5 -1152.3 188.353 9726.92 58129.3 14.7198 -56.58880 6 671.034 -944.873 16581.7 55125.9 14.4144 -61.57530 7 -1037.14 -522.104 -14678.7 56342.4 14.4625 -59.13021 0 1.413 1165.16 7420.12 58477.6 17.5769 -62.32921 1 -15.6843 1166.71 -14542.4 -56266.7 17.8756 -55.5523

23 0 13.7061 1155.41 17919.3 56372.723 1 -110.214 1151.74 -23078.1 -53293.623 2 733.771 896.972 26636.7 52430.523 3 980.339 603.351 2003.94 -58427.123 4 -81.1062 1142.55 -32936.2 -48987.923 5 -1150.89 97.7796 8904.14 56862.323 6 678.523 -942.895 14027.6 58078.823 7 -1064.41 -435.91 -13482.4 55363.2TX Syn Gain : 26RX Syn Gain : 579SC Syn Gain : 567SC SYN Level : 8376Cal Error : 0

.………………………………………..

Data received from Layer1:

antenna txGain rxGain0 18 671 15 672 17 633 18 714 15 685 17 706 17 637 16 67

carrierId antenna txCalWeightX txCalWeightY rxCalWeightX rxCalWeightY rxSNR txSNR0 0 32.0751 1167.99 8929.38 57776 14.8713 -58.03110 1 -51.7158 1165.44 -17116.8 -56872.4 14.6449 -49.66810 2 712.152 858.821 25107.3 53970 14.9417 -65.67720 3 970.448 649.556 2988.24 -57892.1 14.7349 -60.32160 4 -144.55 1162.05 -31553.2 -48341.8 14.5399 -52.74380 5 -1152.3 188.353 9726.92 58129.3 14.7198 -56.58880 6 671.034 -944.873 16581.7 55125.9 14.4144 -61.57530 7 -1037.14 -522.104 -14678.7 56342.4 14.4625 -59.13021 0 1.413 1165.16 7420.12 58477.6 17.5769 -62.32921 1 -15.6843 1166.71 -14542.4 -56266.7 17.8756 -55.5523

23 0 13.7061 1155.41 17919.3 56372.723 1 -110.214 1151.74 -23078.1 -53293.623 2 733.771 896.972 26636.7 52430.523 3 980.339 603.351 2003.94 -58427.123 4 -81.1062 1142.55 -32936.2 -48987.923 5 -1150.89 97.7796 8904.14 56862.323 6 678.523 -942.895 14027.6 58078.823 7 -1064.41 -435.91 -13482.4 55363.2TX Syn Gain : 26RX Syn Gain : 579SC Syn Gain : 567SC SYN Level : 8376Cal Error : 0

.………………………………………..

7-44BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 121: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningCalibration

Figure 7-52 Calibration With Errors

Data received from Layer1:

antenna txGain rxGain0 18 671 15 672 17 633 18 714 15 685 17 706 17 637 0 0

carrierId antenna txCalWeightX txCalWeightY rxCalWeightX rxCalWeightY rxSNR txSNR0 0 32.0751 1167.99 8929.38 57776 14.8713 -58.03110 1 -51.7158 1165.44 -17116.8 -56872.4 14.6449 -49.66810 2 712.152 858.821 25107.3 53970 14.9417 -65.67720 3 970.448 649.556 2988.24 -57892.1 14.7349 -60.32160 4 -144.55 1162.05 -31553.2 -48341.8 14.5399 -52.74380 5 -1152.3 188.353 9726.92 58129.3 14.7198 -56.58880 6 671.034 -944.873 16581.7 55125.9 14.4144 -61.57530 7 0 0 0 0 0 01 0 1.413 1165.16 7420.12 58477.6 17.5769 -62.32921 1 -15.6843 1166.71 -14542.4 -56266.7 17.8756 -55.5523

23 0 13.7061 1155.41 17919.3 56372.723 1 -110.214 1151.74 -23078.1 -53293.623 2 733.771 896.972 26636.7 52430.523 3 980.339 603.351 2003.94 -58427.123 4 -81.1062 1142.55 -32936.2 -48987.923 5 -1150.89 97.7796 8904.14 56862.323 6 678.523 -942.895 14027.6 58078.823 7 0 0 0 0TX Syn Gain : 26RX Syn Gain : 579SC Syn Gain : 567SC SYN Level : 8376Cal Error : 80008000

.………………………………………..

Data received from Layer1:

antenna txGain rxGain0 18 671 15 672 17 633 18 714 15 685 17 706 17 63

carrierId antenna txCalWeightX txCalWeightY rxCalWeightX rxCalWeightY rxSNR txSNR0 0 32.0751 1167.99 8929.38 57776 14.8713 -58.03110 1 -51.7158 1165.44 -17116.8 -56872.4 14.6449 -49.66810 2 712.152 858.821 25107.3 53970 14.9417 -65.67720 3 970.448 649.556 2988.24 -57892.1 14.7349 -60.32160 4 -144.55 1162.05 -31553.2 -48341.8 14.5399 -52.74380 5 -1152.3 188.353 9726.92 58129.3 14.7198 -56.58880 6 671.034 -944.873 16581.7 55125.9 14.4144 -61.57530 7 1 0 1.413 1165.16 7420.12 58477.6 17.5769 -62.32921 1 -15.6843 1166.71 -14542.4 -56266.7 17.8756 -55.5523

23 0 13.7061 1155.41 17919.3 56372.723 1 -110.214 1151.74 -23078.1 -53293.623 2 733.771 896.972 26636.7 52430.523 3 980.339 603.351 2003.94 -58427.123 4 -81.1062 1142.55 -32936.2 -48987.923 5 -1150.89 97.7796 8904.14 56862.323 6 678.523 -942.895 14027.6 58078.823 7 TX Syn Gain : 26RX Syn Gain : 579SC Syn Gain : 567SC SYN Level : 8376

.………………………………………..

Antenna Power = 15 Rx Sensitivity = 100 numAntenna = 7

1st bit = Rx2nd bit = Tx

1000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000

8 0 0 0 8 0 0 0

SNRProblem

7654 32107654 3210

Tx errorin antennaelement #

Rx errorin antennaelement #

Rx GainSC GainTx Gain

Pre-Cal errors - A power or gain setting could not be found that would set the signal at the appropriate level

Errors during offline power

Rx RangeTX RangeTemp Range

Pre-Cal errors - The target value is outside the range of the Synthesizer card

1000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000

8 0 0 0 8 0 0 0

SNRProblem

7654 32107654 3210

errorin antenna

Rx errorin antennaelement #

Rx GainSC GainT Gain

Pre-Cal errors - A power or gain setting could not be found that would set the signal at the appropriate level

and gain tuning calibration

Rx RangeTX RangeTemp Range

Pre-Cal errors -the range of the Synthesizer card

1000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 00001000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000

8 0 0 0 8 0 0 08 0 0 0 8 0 0 0

SNRProblem:

7654 32107654 3210

in antennaRx error

in antennaelement #

Rx GainSC Gain

GainPre-Cal errors - A power or gain setting could not be found that would set the signal at the appropriate level

Rx RangeTX RangeTemp Range

Pre-Cal errors -the range of the Synthesizer card

1st bit = Rx2nd bit = Tx

1000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000

8 0 0 0 8 0 0 0

SNRProblem

7654 32107654 3210

Tx errorin antennaelement #

Rx errorin antennaelement #

Rx GainSC GainTx Gain

Pre-Cal errors - A power or gain setting could not be found that would set the signal at the appropriate level

Errors during offline power

Rx RangeTX RangeTemp Range

Pre-Cal errors - The target value is outside the range of the Synthesizer card

1000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000

8 0 0 0 8 0 0 0

SNRProblem

7654 32107654 3210

errorin antenna

Rx errorin antennaelement #

Rx GainSC GainT Gain

Pre-Cal errors - A power or gain setting could not be found that would set the signal at the appropriate level

and gain tuning calibration

Rx RangeTX RangeTemp Range

Pre-Cal errors -the range of the Synthesizer card

1000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 00001000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000

8 0 0 0 8 0 0 08 0 0 0 8 0 0 0

SNRProblem:

7654 32107654 3210

in antennaRx error

in antennaelement #

Rx GainSC Gain

GainPre-Cal errors - A power or gain setting could not be found that would set the signal at the appropriate level

Rx RangeTX RangeTemp Range

Pre-Cal errors -the range of the Synthesizer card

8 0 0 0 8 0 0 08 0 0 0 8 0 0 0

SNRProblem:

7654 32107654 3210

in antennaRx error

in antennaelement #

Rx GainSC Gain

GainPre-Cal errors - A power or gain setting could not be found that would set the signal at the appropriate level

Rx RangeTX RangeTemp Range

Pre-Cal errors -the range of the Synthesizer card

Only 7 out of 8 antenna elements are Only 7 out of 8 antenna elements are Only 7 out of 8 antenna elements are Only 7 out of 8 antenna elements are workingOnly 7 out of 8 antenna elements are Only 7 out of 8 antenna elements are Only 7 out of 8 antenna elements are Only 7 out of 8 antenna elements are workingOnly 7 out of 8 antenna elements are Only 7 out of 8 antenna elements are working

Here is the key to the calibration error

Here is the key to interpret the calibration error Here is the key to Here is the key to interpret the calibration error codeHere is the key to the calibration error

Here is the key to interpret the calibration error Here is the key to Here is the key to interpret the calibration error code

Here is the key to the calibration error

Here is the key to interpret the calibration error Here is the key to Here is the key to interpret the calibration error codeHere is the key to the calibration error

Here is the key to interpret the calibration error Here is the key to Both gains and all the phase

shifts for this path are set to zero.

Data received from Layer1:

antenna txGain rxGain0 18 671 15 672 17 633 18 714 15 685 17 706 17 637 0 0

carrierId antenna txCalWeightX txCalWeightY rxCalWeightX rxCalWeightY rxSNR txSNR0 0 32.0751 1167.99 8929.38 57776 14.8713 -58.03110 1 -51.7158 1165.44 -17116.8 -56872.4 14.6449 -49.66810 2 712.152 858.821 25107.3 53970 14.9417 -65.67720 3 970.448 649.556 2988.24 -57892.1 14.7349 -60.32160 4 -144.55 1162.05 -31553.2 -48341.8 14.5399 -52.74380 5 -1152.3 188.353 9726.92 58129.3 14.7198 -56.58880 6 671.034 -944.873 16581.7 55125.9 14.4144 -61.57530 7 0 0 0 0 0 01 0 1.413 1165.16 7420.12 58477.6 17.5769 -62.32921 1 -15.6843 1166.71 -14542.4 -56266.7 17.8756 -55.5523

23 0 13.7061 1155.41 17919.3 56372.723 1 -110.214 1151.74 -23078.1 -53293.623 2 733.771 896.972 26636.7 52430.523 3 980.339 603.351 2003.94 -58427.123 4 -81.1062 1142.55 -32936.2 -48987.923 5 -1150.89 97.7796 8904.14 56862.323 6 678.523 -942.895 14027.6 58078.823 7 0 0 0 0TX Syn Gain : 26RX Syn Gain : 579SC Syn Gain : 567SC SYN Level : 8376Cal Error : 80008000

.………………………………………..

Data received from Layer1:

antenna txGain rxGain0 18 671 15 672 17 633 18 714 15 685 17 706 17 63

carrierId antenna txCalWeightX txCalWeightY rxCalWeightX rxCalWeightY rxSNR txSNR0 0 32.0751 1167.99 8929.38 57776 14.8713 -58.03110 1 -51.7158 1165.44 -17116.8 -56872.4 14.6449 -49.66810 2 712.152 858.821 25107.3 53970 14.9417 -65.67720 3 970.448 649.556 2988.24 -57892.1 14.7349 -60.32160 4 -144.55 1162.05 -31553.2 -48341.8 14.5399 -52.74380 5 -1152.3 188.353 9726.92 58129.3 14.7198 -56.58880 6 671.034 -944.873 16581.7 55125.9 14.4144 -61.57530 7 1 0 1.413 1165.16 7420.12 58477.6 17.5769 -62.32921 1 -15.6843 1166.71 -14542.4 -56266.7 17.8756 -55.5523

23 0 13.7061 1155.41 17919.3 56372.723 1 -110.214 1151.74 -23078.1 -53293.623 2 733.771 896.972 26636.7 52430.523 3 980.339 603.351 2003.94 -58427.123 4 -81.1062 1142.55 -32936.2 -48987.923 5 -1150.89 97.7796 8904.14 56862.323 6 678.523 -942.895 14027.6 58078.823 7 TX Syn Gain : 26RX Syn Gain : 579SC Syn Gain : 567SC SYN Level : 8376

.………………………………………..

Antenna Power = 15 Rx Sensitivity = 100 numAntenna = 7

Data received from Layer1:

antenna txGain rxGain0 18 671 15 672 17 633 18 714 15 685 17 706 17 637 0 0

carrierId antenna txCalWeightX txCalWeightY rxCalWeightX rxCalWeightY rxSNR txSNR0 0 32.0751 1167.99 8929.38 57776 14.8713 -58.03110 1 -51.7158 1165.44 -17116.8 -56872.4 14.6449 -49.66810 2 712.152 858.821 25107.3 53970 14.9417 -65.67720 3 970.448 649.556 2988.24 -57892.1 14.7349 -60.32160 4 -144.55 1162.05 -31553.2 -48341.8 14.5399 -52.74380 5 -1152.3 188.353 9726.92 58129.3 14.7198 -56.58880 6 671.034 -944.873 16581.7 55125.9 14.4144 -61.57530 7 0 0 0 0 0 01 0 1.413 1165.16 7420.12 58477.6 17.5769 -62.32921 1 -15.6843 1166.71 -14542.4 -56266.7 17.8756 -55.5523

23 0 13.7061 1155.41 17919.3 56372.723 1 -110.214 1151.74 -23078.1 -53293.623 2 733.771 896.972 26636.7 52430.523 3 980.339 603.351 2003.94 -58427.123 4 -81.1062 1142.55 -32936.2 -48987.923 5 -1150.89 97.7796 8904.14 56862.323 6 678.523 -942.895 14027.6 58078.823 7 0 0 0 0TX Syn Gain : 26RX Syn Gain : 579SC Syn Gain : 567SC SYN Level : 8376Cal Error : 80008000

.………………………………………..

Data received from Layer1:

antenna txGain rxGain0 18 671 15 672 17 633 18 714 15 685 17 706 17 63

carrierId antenna txCalWeightX txCalWeightY rxCalWeightX rxCalWeightY rxSNR txSNR0 0 32.0751 1167.99 8929.38 57776 14.8713 -58.03110 1 -51.7158 1165.44 -17116.8 -56872.4 14.6449 -49.66810 2 712.152 858.821 25107.3 53970 14.9417 -65.67720 3 970.448 649.556 2988.24 -57892.1 14.7349 -60.32160 4 -144.55 1162.05 -31553.2 -48341.8 14.5399 -52.74380 5 -1152.3 188.353 9726.92 58129.3 14.7198 -56.58880 6 671.034 -944.873 16581.7 55125.9 14.4144 -61.57530 7 1 0 1.413 1165.16 7420.12 58477.6 17.5769 -62.32921 1 -15.6843 1166.71 -14542.4 -56266.7 17.8756 -55.5523

23 0 13.7061 1155.41 17919.3 56372.723 1 -110.214 1151.74 -23078.1 -53293.623 2 733.771 896.972 26636.7 52430.523 3 980.339 603.351 2003.94 -58427.123 4 -81.1062 1142.55 -32936.2 -48987.923 5 -1150.89 97.7796 8904.14 56862.323 6 678.523 -942.895 14027.6 58078.823 7 TX Syn Gain : 26RX Syn Gain : 579SC Syn Gain : 567SC SYN Level : 8376

.………………………………………..

Antenna Power = 15 Rx Sensitivity = 100 numAntenna = 7

1st bit = Rx2nd bit = Tx

1000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000

8 0 0 0 8 0 0 0

SNRProblem

7654 32107654 3210

Tx errorin antennaelement #

Rx errorin antennaelement #

Rx GainSC GainTx Gain

Pre-Cal errors - A power or gain setting could not be found that would set the signal at the appropriate level

Errors during offline power

Rx RangeTX RangeTemp Range

Pre-Cal errors - The target value is outside the range of the Synthesizer card

1000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000

8 0 0 0 8 0 0 0

SNRProblem

7654 32107654 3210

errorin antenna

Rx errorin antennaelement #

Rx GainSC GainT Gain

Pre-Cal errors - A power or gain setting could not be found that would set the signal at the appropriate level

and gain tuning calibration

Rx RangeTX RangeTemp Range

Pre-Cal errors -the range of the Synthesizer card

1000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 00001000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000

8 0 0 0 8 0 0 08 0 0 0 8 0 0 0

SNRProblem:

7654 32107654 3210

in antennaRx error

in antennaelement #

Rx GainSC Gain

GainPre-Cal errors - A power or gain setting could not be found that would set the signal at the appropriate level

Rx RangeTX RangeTemp Range

Pre-Cal errors -the range of the Synthesizer card

1st bit = Rx2nd bit = Tx

1000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000

8 0 0 0 8 0 0 0

SNRProblem

7654 32107654 3210

Tx errorin antennaelement #

Rx errorin antennaelement #

Rx GainSC GainTx Gain

Pre-Cal errors - A power or gain setting could not be found that would set the signal at the appropriate level

Errors during offline power

Rx RangeTX RangeTemp Range

Pre-Cal errors - The target value is outside the range of the Synthesizer card

1000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000

8 0 0 0 8 0 0 0

SNRProblem

7654 32107654 3210

errorin antenna

Rx errorin antennaelement #

Rx GainSC GainT Gain

Pre-Cal errors - A power or gain setting could not be found that would set the signal at the appropriate level

and gain tuning calibration

Rx RangeTX RangeTemp Range

Pre-Cal errors -the range of the Synthesizer card

1000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 00001000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000

8 0 0 0 8 0 0 08 0 0 0 8 0 0 0

SNRProblem:

7654 32107654 3210

in antennaRx error

in antennaelement #

Rx GainSC Gain

GainPre-Cal errors - A power or gain setting could not be found that would set the signal at the appropriate level

Rx RangeTX RangeTemp Range

Pre-Cal errors -the range of the Synthesizer card

8 0 0 0 8 0 0 08 0 0 0 8 0 0 0

SNRProblem:

7654 32107654 3210

in antennaRx error

in antennaelement #

Rx GainSC Gain

GainPre-Cal errors - A power or gain setting could not be found that would set the signal at the appropriate level

Rx RangeTX RangeTemp Range

Pre-Cal errors -the range of the Synthesizer card

Only 7 out of 8 antenna elements are Only 7 out of 8 antenna elements are Only 7 out of 8 antenna elements are Only 7 out of 8 antenna elements are workingOnly 7 out of 8 antenna elements are Only 7 out of 8 antenna elements are Only 7 out of 8 antenna elements are Only 7 out of 8 antenna elements are workingOnly 7 out of 8 antenna elements are Only 7 out of 8 antenna elements are workingOnly 7 out of 8 antenna elements are Only 7 out of 8 antenna elements are Only 7 out of 8 antenna elements are Only 7 out of 8 antenna elements are workingOnly 7 out of 8 antenna elements are Only 7 out of 8 antenna elements are Only 7 out of 8 antenna elements are Only 7 out of 8 antenna elements are workingOnly 7 out of 8 antenna elements are Only 7 out of 8 antenna elements are working

Here is the key to the calibration error

Here is the key to interpret the calibration error Here is the key to Here is the key to interpret the calibration error codeHere is the key to the calibration error

Here is the key to interpret the calibration error Here is the key to Here is the key to interpret the calibration error codeHere is the key to the calibration error

Here is the key to interpret the calibration error Here is the key to Here is the key to interpret the calibration error codeHere is the key to the calibration error

Here is the key to interpret the calibration error Here is the key to Here is the key to interpret the calibration error code

Here is the key to the calibration error

Here is the key to interpret the calibration error Here is the key to Here is the key to interpret the calibration error codeHere is the key to the calibration error

Here is the key to interpret the calibration error Here is the key to Both gains and all the phase

shifts for this path are set to zero.Here is the key to the calibration error

Here is the key to interpret the calibration error Here is the key to Here is the key to interpret the calibration error codeHere is the key to the calibration error

Here is the key to interpret the calibration error Here is the key to Both gains and all the phase

shifts for this path are set to zero.

7-45BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 122: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd, Configure, Modify and Delete Subscriber Stations (SSs) & Use Related Applications

7.6 Add, Configure, Modify and Delete Subscriber Stations (SSs) & Use Related Applications

References:

• BWX 110 Desktop Modem User Guide

• BWX 120 PCMCIA Modem User Guide

• BWX 210 Desktop Modem User Guide

• BWX Mobile WiMAX Configuration Guide

7.6.1 OverviewBefore going straight into the SS configuration in BWX EMS, some background understanding is required. First, this section discusses the different types of SS’s, and basic communications with a BS. Much of this information will become clearer when you get ready to conduct the commissioning tests – the Drive Study and Location (FTP) Test. The BWX Modem Diagnostics (NavDiag) tool and the BWX WiMAX Diagnostics (Beamforming Display) Tool are also covered in this section, since BWX Modem Diagnostics and BWX WiMAX Diagnostics are used to monitor SS operation and for troubleshooting purposes.

In order to continue commissioning and testing a newly installed, powered up, and calibrated BS, you will need to be able to add SS records to the database for use during the Commissioning tests - for example, records with max throughput for FTP tests and records with minimum throughput for test drives.

7.6.2 Types of SS’sThe first type of SS is the BWX 110 Desktop model. The BWX 110 provides an easy-to-read faceplate that instantly lets you know if the SS is searching for a BS, or is in stand-by mode (idling), or is already communicating with a BS, and, if it is, the signal strength and quality level (Figure 7-53). The BWX 110 Desktop Modem interfaces with a computer through an Ethernet cable.

7-46BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 123: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd, Configure, Modify and Delete Subscriber Stations (SSs) & Use Related Applications

Figure 7-53 BWX 110 Desktop Modem

The second type of SS is the BWX 210 Desktop Modem. The BWX 210 provides a Light-emitting Diode (LED), on the top back of the unit, which gives an indication of the modem’s operational status. When the light blinks, the BWX 210 Desktop Modem is trying to synchronize with a BS. When the light is constant, the BWX 210 Desktop Modem has acquired synchronization with a BS. If the light is flashing quickly, this means the BWX 210 Desktop Modem is transmitting data to the BS. The BWX 210 Desktop Modem interfaces with a computer through an Ethernet cable.

Figure 7-54 BWX 210 Desktop Modem

Another type of SS is the BWX 120 PCMCIA Modem (Figure 7-55). A BWX 120 works with laptop computers by sliding into the PCMCIA slot on the laptop. There are no cables. Please note that a PCMCIA Card cannot be used for commissioning testing of the BS.

The two arrows are displayed whenthe SS is transmitting/receiving butnot when it is “idling”.

LED

Back

Front

Power Adapter Connection

Ethernet Cable Connection

LED

Back

Front

Power Adapter Connection

Ethernet Cable Connection

7-47BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 124: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd, Configure, Modify and Delete Subscriber Stations (SSs) & Use Related Applications

Figure 7-55 BWX 120 PCMCIA Modem (not used for commissioning)

7.6.3 Add, Configure, Modify and Delete an SSPrior to adding and configuring an SS, the following parameters must be configured from the EMS Global Config menu: QoS, Packet Classifier Rule, Service Flows, and SLA parameters. Refer to Figure 7-56.

Figure 7-56 Global Config Menu Parameters

BWX 120TOP

BWX 120Bottom

BWX 120TOP

BWX 120TOP

BWX 120Bottom

BWX 120Bottom

1. Select QoS Parameters under the Global Config tab

1. Select QoS Parameters under the Global Config tab

1. Select Packet Classifier Rule under the Global Config tab

1. Select Packet Classifier Rule under the Global Config tab

1. Select Service Flow under the Global Config tab

1. Select Service Flow under the Global Config tab

1. Select SLA under the Global Config tab

1. Select SLA under the Global Config tab

1. Select QoS Parameters under the Global Config tab

1. Select QoS Parameters under the Global Config tab1. Select QoS Parameters under the Global Config tab

1. Select QoS Parameters under the Global Config tab

1. Select Packet Classifier Rule under the Global Config tab

1. Select Packet Classifier Rule under the Global Config tab1. Select Packet Classifier Rule under the Global Config tab

1. Select Packet Classifier Rule under the Global Config tab

1. Select Service Flow under the Global Config tab

1. Select Service Flow under the Global Config tab1. Select Service Flow under the Global Config tab

1. Select Service Flow under the Global Config tab

1. Select SLA under the Global Config tab

1. Select SLA under the Global Config tab1. Select SLA under the

Global Config tab

1. Select SLA under the Global Config tab

7-48BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 125: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd, Configure, Modify and Delete Subscriber Stations (SSs) & Use Related Applications

For detailed steps to configure the Global Config menu parameters, refer to the BWX Mobile WiMAX Configuration Guide.

Once the Global Config menu parameters are configured, push the EMS data to the BWG. Refer to Figure 7-57.

Figure 7-57 Push EMS Data to BWG

The SS can now be added to the AAA server. For detailed steps, refer to the Configuring WiMAX Subscriber Stations Using Cisco Access Registrar (CAR) document.

EMS supports two versions of SS:

• Cisco16e (SS operating in WiMAX)

• WiMAX (both third-party and Cisco SSs)

For the steps to add, configure, modify and delete SS’s, refer to the BWX Mobile WiMAX Configuration Guide.

7.6.4 Install the BWX Modem Diagnostic ToolReference:

• BWX 110 Desktop Modem User Guide

• BWX 120 PCMCIA Modem User Guide

• BWX 210 Desktop Modem User Guide

• BWX Modem Diagnostic Tool User Guide

7-49BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 126: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd, Configure, Modify and Delete Subscriber Stations (SSs) & Use Related Applications

7.6.4.1 Description

BWX Modem Diagnostics tool is a software application that runs on the end-user’s computer. It is used to collect, view, and graph information about the SS equipment, software level, performance, and other statistics. An SS can be installed and operational, however, without the user ever installing the BWX Modem Diagnostics tool. Though this software application is primarily used by the end-user when the Service Provider’s support personnel are helping the user to troubleshoot an issue, it is also used by installers when commissioning the Basestation. The BWX Modem Diagnostics tool provides a logging mechanism to be used in the Drive Study and Location (FTP) Test.

7.6.4.2 Installation Procedure

The BWX Modem Diagnostics tool works on three Operating Systems: Windows®, Linux®, and Apple®. When first loaded on a computer the application displays in a novice mode. The novice mode provides limited information about the SS and its communications. The novice mode is appropriate for end-users. However, an experienced technician or field support engineer can invoke more detailed data and functionality through the advanced mode ( Figure 7-58). To invoke the advanced mode, you select Control+Shift+F10.

The BWX Modem Diagnostics tool installation procedure is captured in the specific SS user guides. Once the application is installed on the computer from the Installation CD that comes with the SS, you simply double-click on the icon (Figure 7-59).

Figure 7-58 BWX Modem Diagnostics Tool Modes

<Ctrl>+<Shift>+<F10>Navini Diagnostics.lnk

Novice Mode

<Ctrl>+<Shift>+<F10>

Advanced ModeNavini Diagnostics.lnkNavini Diagnostics.lnk

<Ctrl>+<Shift>+<F10>Navini Diagnostics.lnkNavini Diagnostics.lnk

Novice Mode

<Ctrl>+<Shift>+<F10>

Advanced ModeNavini Diagnostics.lnkNavini Diagnostics.lnkNavini Diagnostics.lnkNavini Diagnostics.lnk

7-50BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 127: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd, Configure, Modify and Delete Subscriber Stations (SSs) & Use Related Applications

Figure 7-59 Install BWX Modem Diagnostics Tool

One of the nice things about the BWX Modem Diagnostics tool is that the Service Provider can invoke it from the EMS. This allows the Service Provider to monitor and troubleshoot end-user issues remotely. For purposes of commissioning the BS, however, you will be using the BWX Modem Diagnostics tool installed “locally” on a laptop computer.

7.6.4.3 Location (FTP) Test Logging

A Location, or FTP, Test is part of the commissioning and acceptance testing of a BS. This test helps to verify throughput operates at various locations.

To create a Location (FTP) Test log file, go to the BWX Modem Diagnostics tool advanced mode and select “Session” > “Logging” > “Start Location Test Log”. Enter the company name and BTS ID, then click “OK” (see figure below). This starts the data collection. The file name is generated based on the company name and BTS ID plus the Modem EID. The location of the file is predetermined (C:\Program Files\NavDiag\data\ log).

navdiag_windows.exenavdiag_windows.exenavdiag_windows.exe

Etc.

7-51BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 128: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd, Configure, Modify and Delete Subscriber Stations (SSs) & Use Related Applications

7.6.5 BWX WiMAX Diagnostic Tool OperationReference: BWX WiMAX Diagnostic Tools Guide

7.6.5.1 Description

One of the diagnostic tools supplied when you load the EMS Client software is the BWX WiMAX Diagnostic Tool. Sometimes simply referred to as ‘beamforming’, this application is used during commissioning and acceptance testing, as well as over the life of the product. The tool provides numerous types of data that give performance information used during troubleshooting.

You do not have to do anything to configure BWX WiMAX Diagnostic Tool. We are discussing how to use the BWX WiMAX Diagnostic Tool application at this point because it is used to monitor the communications between an individual SS and the BS, when the BS tab is selected within the tool. This understanding will become important later as you start the commissioning tests. You will first need to have a test SS already added and configured in EMS in order to use the BWX WiMAX Diagnostic Tool.

To start the BWX WiMAX Diagnostic Tool, double-click on the icon that appears on the desktop where you installed the EMS Client applications (Figure 7-60). The tool will prompt you for a user name and password, which are the same as those used for the EMS CAM:

• Default User Name: ems

• Default Password: emsdiag7

Note that you will enter the SS’s EID, and you will also have to select the type of antenna to be linear (panel).

1. Select: "Session→Logging→Start Drive test Log"1. Select: "Session→Logging→Start Drive test Log"

2. Enter "Company Name" and "BTS Id" 2. Enter "Company Name" and "BTS Id"

3. Click on "Ok"(data collection begins)

3. Click on "Ok"(data collection begins)

Available only in theAdvanced Mode

1. Select: "Session→Logging→Start Drive test Log"1. Select: "Session→Logging→Start Drive test Log"

2. Enter "Company Name" and "BTS Id" 2. Enter "Company Name" and "BTS Id"

3. Click on "Ok"(data collection begins)

3. Click on "Ok"(data collection begins)

Available only in theAdvanced Mode

1. Select: "Session→Logging→Start Drive test Log"1. Select: "Session→Logging→Start Drive test Log"

2. Enter "Company Name" and "BTS Id" 2. Enter "Company Name" and "BTS Id"

3. Click on "Ok"(data collection begins)

3. Click on "Ok"(data collection begins)

Available only in theAdvanced Mode

1. Select: "Session→Logging→Start Drive test Log"1. Select: "Session→Logging→Start Location Test Log"

2. Enter "Company Name" and "BTS Id" 2. Enter "Company Name" and "BTS Id"

3. Click on "Ok"(data collection begins)

3. Click on "Ok"(data collection begins)

Available only in theAdvanced Mode

1. Select: "Session→Logging→Start Drive test Log"1. Select: "Session→Logging→Start Drive test Log"

2. Enter "Company Name" and "BTS Id" 2. Enter "Company Name" and "BTS Id"

3. Click on "Ok"(data collection begins)

3. Click on "Ok"(data collection begins)

Available only in theAdvanced Mode

1. Select: "Session→Logging→Start Drive test Log"1. Select: "Session→Logging→Start Drive test Log"

2. Enter "Company Name" and "BTS Id" 2. Enter "Company Name" and "BTS Id"

3. Click on "Ok"(data collection begins)

3. Click on "Ok"(data collection begins)

Available only in theAdvanced Mode

1. Select: "Session→Logging→Start Drive test Log"1. Select: "Session→Logging→Start Drive test Log"

2. Enter "Company Name" and "BTS Id" 2. Enter "Company Name" and "BTS Id"

3. Click on "Ok"(data collection begins)

3. Click on "Ok"(data collection begins)

Available only in theAdvanced Mode

1. Select: "Session→Logging→Start Drive test Log"1. Select: "Session→Logging→Start Location Test Log"

2. Enter "Company Name" and "BTS Id" 2. Enter "Company Name" and "BTS Id"

3. Click on "Ok"(data collection begins)

3. Click on "Ok"(data collection begins)

Available only in theAdvanced Mode

7-52BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 129: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningAdd, Configure, Modify and Delete Subscriber Stations (SSs) & Use Related Applications

Figure 7-60 Start Beamforming

When live traffic is generated, the graphical display shows the beamform lobe(s) from the BS to the SS (Figure 7-61). Please refer to the BWX WiMAX Diagnostic Tools Guide for details about the graphical display and the data fields.

emsdiag7Status WindowStatus WindowStatus WindowStatus WindowStatus WindowStatus WindowStatus WindowStatus Window

emsdiag7emsdiag7Status WindowStatus WindowStatus WindowStatus WindowStatus WindowStatus WindowStatus WindowStatus WindowStatus WindowStatus WindowStatus WindowStatus WindowStatus WindowStatus WindowStatus WindowStatus Window

emsdiag7

7-53BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 130: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningBWX 8303 Basestation Timing System Verification

Figure 7-61 Beamforming Data

7.7 BWX 8303 Basestation Timing System VerificationCommissioning the BS requires you to first verify that the BXW 8303 Basestation Timing System antenna is working properly. The BXW 8303 Basestation Timing System provides the timing and synchronization of transmission signals. Be sure to check all regulatory information for using a GPS system prior to installing.

To make sure the BXW 8303 Basestation Timing System antenna is working properly, use a handheld GPS unit to get a position reading at the Basestation location. Wait until the BS has had time to get a GPS position fix.

Next, using the EMS CAM, go to the BTS tab and select the BS. Open the General > GPS branch, and click on Show Configuration. Read the GPS latitude and longitude on the BS record, and compare them to the readings of the handheld GPS unit. If the readings are different, the GPS Verification test fails. Use the troubleshooting information that came with the BXW 8303 Basestation Timing System, to set the BS’s latitude & longitude, to resolve the problem.

Provides general info regardingthe BS involved in the beamform.Provides general info regardingthe BS involved in the beamform.Provides general info regardingthe BS involved in the beamform.Provides general info regardingthe BS involved in the beamform.Provides general info regardingthe BS involved in the beamform.Provides general info regardingthe BS involved in the beamform.

7-54BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 131: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningRF Verification Procedure

7.8 RF Verification Procedure

7.8.1 PurposeAt this time you will verify that the RF signal, minus power loss values, is calibrated correctly. This test is referred to as the RF Verification Procedure. A screen capture of the Spectrum Analyzer is the only data collected here.

Step 1 Check for these BS Scale Settings:

From the EMS CAM:

a. Double-click on the BS line.

b. Select Air Interface> Layer 1> Layer 1 Tables and then click on Show Configuration and Configure.

c. Select the General tab ( Figure 7-62).

d. Click on Close.

BWX 8305 BWX 2305

Preamble Scale 0.6213 0.3106

FCH Map Scale 0.2689 0.1345

Cisco Map Scale 0.4441 0.1755

Traffic Scale 0.1570 0.1241

Max Scale 5.5110 2.7555

7-55BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 132: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningRF Verification Procedure

Figure 7-62 Selecting the Performance Parameters

Step 2 Turn down all the antenna elements, except one (Figure 7-63).

a. Double-click on the BS line.

b. Select Air Interface> Layer 1> Layer 1 Tables and then click on Show Configuration and Configure.

c. Click on Configure.

d. Select the Antenna Table tab.

e. Click on Modify All.

f. Change the Admin Status of all the antenna elements, except one, to Down.

g. Click on Ok.

h. Ignore any warnings that may be displayed.

Note: the default values for a BWX 8305 are:

0.62130.26890.44410.15705.5110

Note: the default values for a BWX 8305 are:

0.6213

0.26890.44410.15705.5110

Note the value of the“Antenna Power” and

“Cal Cable Loss”parameters

Note the value of the“Antenna Power” and

“Cal Cable Loss”parameters

Make sure that the “Scale”parameters

have not been changed from their default

values

Make sure that the “Scale”parameters

have not been changed from their default

values

Note: the default values for a BWX 8305 are:

0.62130.26890.44410.15705.5110

Note: the default values for a BWX 2305 are:

0.3106

0.13450.17550.12412.7555

Note the value of the“Antenna Power” and

“Cal Cable Loss”parameters

Note the value of the“Antenna Power” and

“Cal Cable Loss”parameters

Make sure that the “Scale”parameters

have not been changed from their default

values

Make sure that the “Scale”parameters

have not been changed from their default

values

Note: the default values for a BWX 8305 are:

0.62130.26890.44410.15705.5110

Note: the default values for a BWX 8305 are:

0.6213

0.26890.44410.15705.5110

Note the value of the“Antenna Power” and

“Cal Cable Loss”parameters

Note the value of the“Antenna Power” and

“Cal Cable Loss”parameters

Make sure that the “Scale”parameters

have not been changed from their default

values

Make sure that the “Scale”parameters

have not been changed from their default

values

Note: the default values for a BWX 8305 are:

0.62130.26890.44410.15705.5110

Note: the default values for a BWX 8305 are:

0.6213

0.26890.44410.15705.5110

Note the value of the“Antenna Power” and

“Cal Cable Loss”parameters

Note the value of the“Antenna Power” and

“Cal Cable Loss”parameters

Make sure that the “Scale”parameters

have not been changed from their default

values

Make sure that the “Scale”parameters

have not been changed from their default

values

Note: the default values for a BWX 8305 are:

0.62130.26890.44410.15705.5110

Note: the default values for a BWX 8305 are:

0.6213

0.26890.44410.15705.5110

Note the value of the“Antenna Power” and

“Cal Cable Loss”parameters

Note the value of the“Antenna Power” and

“Cal Cable Loss”parameters

Make sure that the “Scale”parameters

have not been changed from their default

values

Make sure that the “Scale”parameters

have not been changed from their default

values

Note: the default values for a BWX 8305 are:

0.62130.26890.44410.15705.5110

Note: the default values for a BWX 2305 are:

0.3106

0.13450.17550.12412.7555

Note the value of the“Antenna Power” and

“Cal Cable Loss”parameters

Note the value of the“Antenna Power” and

“Cal Cable Loss”parameters

Make sure that the “Scale”parameters

have not been changed from their default

values

Make sure that the “Scale”parameters

have not been changed from their default

values

Note: the default values for a BWX 8305 are:

0.62130.26890.44410.15705.5110

Note: the default values for a BWX 8305 are:

0.6213

0.26890.44410.15705.5110

Note the value of the“Antenna Power” and

“Cal Cable Loss”parameters

Note the value of the“Antenna Power” and

“Cal Cable Loss”parameters

Make sure that

Note: the default values for a BWX 8305 are:

0.62130.26890.44410.15705.5110

Note: the default values for a BWX 8305 are:

0.6213

0.26890.44410.15705.5110

Note the value of the“Antenna Power” and

“Cal Cable Loss”parameters

Note the value of the“Antenna Power” and

“Cal Cable Loss”parameters

Make sure that the “Scale”parameters

have not been changed from their default

values

Make sure that the “Scale”parameters

have not been changed from their default

values

Note: the default values for a BWX 8305 are:

0.62130.26890.44410.15705.5110

Note: the default values for a BWX 2305 are:

0.3106

0.13450.17550.12412.7555

Note the value of the“Antenna Power” and

“Cal Cable Loss”parameters

Note the value of the“Antenna Power” and

“Cal Cable Loss”parameters

Make sure that the “Scale”parameters

have not been changed from their default

values

Make sure that the “Scale”parameters

have not been changed from their default

values

Note: the default values for a BWX 8305 are:

0.62130.26890.44410.15705.5110

Note: the default values for a BWX 8305 are:

0.6213

0.26890.44410.15705.5110

Note the value of the“Antenna Power” and

“Cal Cable Loss”parameters

Note the value of the“Antenna Power” and

“Cal Cable Loss”parameters

Make sure that the “Scale”parameters

have not been changed from their default

values

Make sure that the “Scale”parameters

have not been changed from their default

values

Note: the default values for a BWX 8305 are:

0.62130.26890.44410.15705.5110

Note: the default values for a BWX 8305 are:

0.6213

0.26890.44410.15705.5110

Note the value of the“Antenna Power” and

“Cal Cable Loss”parameters

Note the value of the“Antenna Power” and

“Cal Cable Loss”parameters

Make sure that the “Scale”parameters

have not been changed from their default

values

Make sure that the “Scale”parameters

have not been changed from their default

values

7-56BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 133: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningRF Verification Procedure

Figure 7-63 Turning Down Antenna Elements

Step 3 Connect the spectrum analyzer to the Basestation, as shown in Figure 7-64, and configure the spectrum analyzer with the settings in Table 7-1.

Figure 7-64 Spectrum Analyzer to Basestation Connection

1. Double-click on the BTS line1. Double-click on the BTS line

3. Click on "Configure"3. Click on "Configure"

5. Click on "Modify All"5. Click on "Modify All"6. Change the Admin

Status of all Antenna Elements except one to "Down"

6. Change the Admin Status of all Antenna Elements except one to "Down"

7. Click on "Ok"7. Click on "Ok"

2. Select "Air Interface → Layer 1 Layer1 Tables"2. Select "Air Interface → Layer 1 Layer1 Tables"

8. Ignore the warnings8. Ignore the warnings

4. Select “Antenna Table"4. Select “Antenna Table"

1. Double-click on the BTS line1. Double-click on the BTS line

3. Click on "Configure"3. Click on "Configure"

5. Click on "Modify All"5. Click on "Modify All"6. Change the Admin

Status of all Antenna Elements except one to "Down"

6. Change the Admin Status of all Antenna Elements except one to "Down"

7. Click on "Ok"7. Click on "Ok"

2. Select "Air Interface → Layer 1 Layer1 Tables"2. Select "Air Interface → Layer 1 Layer1 Tables"

8. Ignore the warnings8. Ignore the warnings

4. Select “Antenna Table"4. Select “Antenna Table"

Internal loss(7 dB)

10 dB attenuator

Jumper CAL Cable

Main CAL Cable

Cal Board loss(~28.5 dB)

If the BTS calibration was

successful, then we must be delivering

the amount of power indicated by the

“Antenna Power”parameter at the

base of each antenna element

If the BTS calibration was

successful, then we must be delivering

the amount of power indicated by the

“Antenna Power”parameter at the

base of each antenna element

TotalCAL Cable loss

(15 dB)

TOTAL LOSS: ~60.5 dB

Internal loss(7 dB)

10 dB attenuator

Jumper CAL Cable

Main CAL Cable

Cal Board loss(~28.5 dB)

If the BTS calibration was

successful, then we must be delivering

the amount of power indicated by the

“Antenna Power”parameter at the

base of each antenna element

If the BTS calibration was

successful, then we must be delivering

the amount of power indicated by the

“Antenna Power”parameter at the

base of each antenna element

TotalCAL Cable loss

(15 dB)

TOTAL LOSS: ~60.5 dB

7-57BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 134: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningRF Verification Procedure

Table 7-1 Spectrum Analyzer Settings

Step 4 Verify the results on the spectrum analyzer (Figure 7-65).

Figure 7-65 Spectrum Analyzer Results

Note The peak of the signal corresponds to the Preamble, which is transmitted at 4 dB above the Antenna Power. If the Antenna Power was set to 30 dB, then the peak should be at 34 dB for each antenna element, if the TX calibration was successful.

Frequency Center Frequency of the BTS, for example 3.52, (in GHz)

Span (F3) Zero Span

Trace(F4 - Detector) RMS

BW (F1 - ResBW)

___ (F4 - VideoBW

1 MHz

1 MHz

Sweep (F1 - Manual Sweep) 10 ms

Ampt (F4 - Ref Offset) Total loss in db (calculated from the spectrum analyzer to BS connection {Figure 7-64}, for example 61dB)

NOTE: The F1 options are selected by default.

34 dBm

7-58BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 135: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningCustomer BWX EMS Server

7.9 Customer BWX EMS ServerReference: BWX EMS Software Installation Guide

If, up to this point, you have been using a “test” EMS Server, you should now install the customer’s EMS Server and configure it. Verify that the latency between the EMS and BS is < 10 ms. Complete the minimal configuration datafill, and run the RFS Configuration data from the floppy disk. Run the Full Calibration until results are successful 3 times.

7-59BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 136: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningLocation (FTP) Test

7.10 Location (FTP) Test

7.10.1 PurposeThis test got its name because the technician or engineer drives to various locations in the cell area and transfers data files to see what kind of uplink and downlink throughput the system provides. You will perform this procedure more than one time in the overall process of completing the system deployment. At this time you are still commissioning the BS into operation; later, you will perform this test to verify its operation as part of Acceptance Testing. You want to be certain when you turn the system over to the Service Provider that its operation is stable.

7.10.2 Setup & ProcedureTo perform this test you must have direct access to an FTP server that is not behind a Network Address Translation (NAT) server. You will also need an FTP client application running on the laptop connected to a Modem and used during the test to generate traffic by initiating file transfers (Figure 7-66).

Figure 7-66 Setup

Several types of data are collected during this test. First, you will use the BWX Modem Diagnostics Tool to start and stop Location Test logging. You will manually keep track of two parameters in the BWX Modem Diagnostics Tool by recording the information into a spreadsheet. Primarily, you are looking at the CINR and RSSI averages for quick comparison against predefined acceptability criteria. The FTP program provides statistics on the data rates, but the data is simultaneously captured by the BWX WiMAX Diagnostics tool.

To the vehicle cigarette lighter

Place Modem in the roof of the vehicle; position it to for best reception.

To the vehicle cigarette lighter

Place Modem in the roof of the vehicle; position it to for best reception.

7-60BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 137: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningLocation (FTP) Test

The first site should be a clear line of sight (LOS) about 2 km away from the BS. You will choose a premium site, where you expect to get the best throughput from the system. The data from this location will constitute your baseline for future comparisons. After performing the data captures at this site, you will continue moving to other LOS and non line of sight (NLOS) locations based on the preliminary RF propagation model generated for this site.

If the site has a panel BWX Basestation Antenna, select 4 additional locations. For NLOS sites, test both outside and inside a building or other structure so that penetration loss can be determined. You will record all data in the Closeout Tool (Figure 7-67). This information will be sent to Cisco TAC for evaluation as part of the closeout documentation.

Figure 7-67 Closeout Tool

7.10.3 Acceptance CriteriaThe CINR seen in the BWX Modem Diagnostics tool should be fairly consistent. The minimum values to achieve the desired throughput are:

• DQPSK (QAM4):At least 5 dB

• 16QAM (QAM16):At least 11 dB

The uplink and downlink Packet Error Rates (PER) should not exceed 1%, although this will vary according to interference levels. The SS Transmit Power should be well below its maximum (typically 25 dBm), and the BS Transmit Power should be at the value set in the EMS.

7-61BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 138: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningDrive Study Test

7.11 Drive Study Test

7.11.1 PurposeWhen an Service Provider is planning a cell site, either the Service Provider or Cisco predicts the coverage area and plots the anticipated coverage on a map. You want to be sure that the BS can be seen by the SS. The output of an RF coverage analysis before the site is deployed is based on geodata for that region, as well as information that is specific to the BWX Mobile WiMAX system. The RF Engineer can plot the known data using a software program, such as PlanetEV®, which produces a plot graph (Figure 7-68) that uses color coding to predict coverage quality based on signal strength (dB). The predictive coverage analysis is used to plan the Drive Study route (Figure 7-69).

Figure 7-68 Coverage Prediction Map

Good coverage area Medium coverage area Bad coverage area

7-62BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 139: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningDrive Study Test

Figure 7-69 Example – Drive Study Route

7.11.2 Setup & ProcedureThis test requires two people. It utilizes the Cisco Commissioning Tool (WiMAX compatible), a modem, a laptop computer with the BWX Modem Diagnostics tool program, a GPS receiver with text output, and various cables. A typical setup is shown in Figure 7-70 and Figure 7-71.

7-63BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 140: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningDrive Study Test

Figure 7-70 Setup (1 of 2)

Figure 7-71 Setup (2 of 2)

Make sure the Modem that is inside the Commissioning Tool has been added and configured in the EMS database. Use the default uplink and downlink Service Flows

GPS Receiver(supporting "Text Out")

on the dashboard

GPS Cable connected through the Serial port

Ethernet connection to Modeminside the Commissioning Tool

Power Adaptor

WATCH OUT FOR BAD WEATHER!The Commissioning Tool is not weatherproof!

GPS Receiver(supporting "Text Out")

on the dashboard

WiMAX compatible Commissioning Toolwith omni directional antenna,mounted on top of vehicle

Ethernet connection to Modeminside the Commissioning Tool

Power Adaptor

WATCH OUT FOR BAD WEATHER!The Commissioning Tool is not weatherproof!

GPS Receiver(supporting "Text Out")

on the dashboard

GPS Cable connected through the Serial port

Ethernet connection to Modeminside the Commissioning Tool

Power Adaptor

WATCH OUT FOR BAD WEATHER!The Commissioning Tool is not weatherproof!

GPS Receiver(supporting "Text Out")

on the dashboard

WiMAX compatible Commissioning Toolwith omni directional antenna,mounted on top of vehicle

Ethernet connection to Modeminside the Commissioning Tool

Power Adaptor

WATCH OUT FOR BAD WEATHER!The Commissioning Tool is not weatherproof!

Ethernet connection to Modeminside the Commissioning Tool

Power Adaptor

WATCH OUT FOR BAD WEATHER!The Commissioning Tool is not weatherproof!

Power Adaptor

WATCH OUT FOR BAD WEATHER!The Commissioning Tool is not weatherproof!

To the vehicle cigarette lighter

GPS connection(currently not used)

To the vehicle cigarette lighter

GPS connection(currently not used)

To the vehicle cigarette lighter

GPS connection(currently not used)

To the vehicle cigarette lighter

WiMAX compatibleCommissioning Tool

GPS connection(currently not used)

To the vehicle cigarette lighter

GPS connection(currently not used)

To the vehicle cigarette lighter

GPS connection(currently not used)

To the vehicle cigarette lighter

GPS connection(currently not used)

To the vehicle cigarette lighter

WiMAX compatibleCommissioning Tool

GPS connection(currently not used)

7-64BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 141: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningDrive Study Test

You are going to be driving at approximately 33.5 mph (54 kph). This speed will provide data collection points every 50 ft (15 m) apart. Going any faster than 35 mph will result in an increased separation between the points. To avoid overloading the cigarette lighter for connections, try to use a car that has two cigarette lighters, one for the GPS receiver and one for the laptop.

After starting the BWX Modem Diagnostics tool program to log driving data, you will need to monitor the “DL Burst RSSI Mean AMC” value in the Statistics screen of the BWX Modem Diagnostics tool. After starting the laptop, power on the GPS receiver. Make sure that you can see the GPS coordinates changing in the window as you drive. After data is collected, you will input it in the Closeout Tool (Figure 7-72). This data may be sent, along with other data collected, to Cisco, as well as provided to the Service Provider.

Figure 7-72 Closeout Tool

7.11.3 Pre-process the Drive Study DataBefore sending the data collected during the Drive Study to Cisco for the Propagation Model Tuning, the following steps should be performed to “pre-process” the data:

• Sort the rows by BTS id and delete all the points collected from a BS other than the one being studied.

• Sort the rows by Latitude and Longitude and delete all the points without GPS coordinates.

• Sort the rows by RSSI and delete all the points with the RSSI above –30dBm and below –110 dBm.

• Delete all the columns except Latitude, Longitude, and RSSI.

7-65BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 142: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningExport BWX EMS Database

• If needed, reorder these columns so that the first one is Latitude, the second is Longitude, and the third is RSSI.

• Delete the first row containing the headers.

7.12 Export BWX EMS DatabaseReference: BWX Mobile WiMAX Configuration Guide

7.12.1 Create Text FilesWith commissioning almost complete, you will need to export the EMS database, including the global parameters, the EMS, and the BS data. When you export the data, it saves the datafill information in a text file format. The text information can be used if a re-entry of data is ever required, and it can be used during troubleshooting later on. It is a good idea to back up and export the data periodically and whenever any significant configuration data is changed. As a general guideline, Cisco recommends a backup and export once per week.

How to perform an export is illustrated in Figure 7-73 and Figure 7-74.

Figure 7-73 Export Configuration Data

3. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a Modem is selected4. Options when a Modem is selected4. Options when nothingis selected

4. Options when nothingis selected

4. Options when nothingis selected

5. Options when nothingis selected

3. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a BWG is selected

2. Options when a BTS is selected2. Options when a BTS is selected2. Options when a BTS is selected2. Options when a BTS is selected

1. Options when the EMS is selected1. Options when the EMS is selected1. Options when the EMS is selected1. Options when the EMS is selected

3. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a Modem is selected4. Options when a Modem is selected4. Options when nothingis selected

4. Options when nothingis selected

4. Options when nothingis selected

5. Options when nothingis selected

3. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a Modem is selected4. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a Modem is selected4. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a Modem is selected4. Options when a Modem is selected4. Options when nothingis selected

4. Options when nothingis selected

4. Options when nothingis selected

5. Options when nothingis selected

4. Options when nothingis selected

4. Options when nothingis selected

4. Options when nothingis selected

5. Options when nothingis selected

3. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a BWG is selected3. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a BWG is selected3. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a BWG is selected3. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a Modem is selected3. Options when a BWG is selected

2. Options when a BTS is selected2. Options when a BTS is selected2. Options when a BTS is selected2. Options when a BTS is selected2. Options when a BTS is selected2. Options when a BTS is selected2. Options when a BTS is selected2. Options when a BTS is selected2. Options when a BTS is selected2. Options when a BTS is selected2. Options when a BTS is selected2. Options when a BTS is selected

1. Options when the EMS is selected1. Options when the EMS is selected1. Options when the EMS is selected1. Options when the EMS is selected1. Options when the EMS is selected1. Options when the EMS is selected1. Options when the EMS is selected1. Options when the EMS is selected1. Options when the EMS is selected1. Options when the EMS is selected1. Options when the EMS is selected1. Options when the EMS is selected

7-66BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 143: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningExport BWX EMS Database

Figure 7-74 Export Configuration Data, cont’d.

1. Click on the BTS tab, double -click on a BTS2. Select "File→BTS List Export "

1. Click on the BTS tab, double -click on a BTS2. Select "File List Export "

3. Select target directory4. Click on "Open"

3. Select target directory4. Click on "Open"

6. Click on "Open"6. Click on "Open"

5. Type file name (make it " .txt")5. Type file name (make it " .txt")7. The export file is created

8. Success is confirmed7. The export file is created

8. Success is confirmed

→→ BTS List1. Click on the BTS tab, double -click on a BTS2. Select "File→BTS List Export "

1. Click on the BTS tab, double -click on a BTS2. Select "File List Export "

3. Select target directory4. Click on "Open"

3. Select target directory4. Click on "Open"

6. Click on "Open"6. Click on "Open"

5. Type file name (make it " .txt")5. Type file name (make it " .txt")7. The export file is created

8. Success is confirmed7. The export file is created

8. Success is confirmed

→→ BTS List

7-67BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 144: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningExport BWX EMS Database

7.12.2 Update Closeout ToolOnce the exports are complete, open the Closeout Tool document. Click on the “Read BTS Export File (.txt)” to import the BS data. You can use the browser to locate the original text file to import. Once the data is imported into the Closeout Tool, all of the yellow fields will be populated automatically with the information from the text file (Figure 7-75).

Figure 7-75 Yellow Fields For Exported Data

Later, you will be inputting other data to complete the Closeout Tool, such as alarm logs that are generated during installation, Drive Study results, and Location (FTP) Test results. The data set provides a reliable baseline for any future problems or communications between Cisco and the customer regarding this site.

Import BTS List Export FileImport BTS List Export File

7-68BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 145: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningBack Up BWX EMS Database

7.13 Back Up BWX EMS DatabaseReference: BWX EMS Administration Guide

At this point you are almost finished with this site. You may have had to adjust some parameters, troubleshoot, recalibrate, or rerun tests. Once you are satisfied that the BS is operating properly, you need to back up the EMS database. For this task you will use the EMS Admin CLI application that was part of the EMS Server installation.

The Admin CLI initially opens up in the default mode, which is called the User Mode (Figure 7-76). A mode is an environment in which a group of related commands is valid. The second mode is called the Admin Mode. All commands except “?” are mode-specific. At any point in the Admin CLI you can type in “?” to view a list of commands that are valid for that mode.

Figure 7-76 Admin CLI

You will be in the User Mode to perform a backup of the EMS database. When backing up the database, you must specify the directory to which you want the data copied (Figure 7-77). You should have the directory set up before initiating the backup using the Admin CLI.

Admin Mode (#)

restore

schemaUpdate

password

exit

User Mode (>)

backup

cc

enable

exit

migrateDb

?

? Admin Mode (#)

restorerestore

schemaUpdateschemaUpdate

passwordpassword

exitexit

User Mode (>)

backupbackup

cccc

enableenable

exitexit

migrateDbmigrateDb

??

??

7-69BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 146: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 7 CommissioningPhotograph Installed Equipment

Figure 7-77 Backup Command

7.14 Photograph Installed EquipmentOne of the last tasks is to take photographs of the installed equipment for the customer and for your own records. These will be provided, along with the Closeout Tool data, to the customer and, as required, to Cisco.

7-70BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 147: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

BWX 8305OL-16336-02

C H A P T E R 8

Closing Out the Site

8.1 Documents, Files & FormsIn Table 8-1 is a list of required items that should be completed before closing out the Basestation (BS) site and turning it over to the Service Provider. In fact, some of these items should even be in place before starting the installation.

Table 8-1 Closeout Documents

Item Description Comments

1. Customer Contact List

2. Site Candidate Evaluation Form Refer to Appendix D, “Site Candidate Evaluation Form”

3. Driving directions and map to site location

4. Antenna Power & Cable Selection

5. Bill of Materials (BoM)

6. RF Coverage Prediction Plot

7. Interference Analysis Report

8. Network Architecture Optional

10. EMS & BSExport Files

11. Completed I&C Closeout Tool/Form

12. RF Tuned Model

13. RMAs If required

14. EMS Backup Files from Customer Server

8-1 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Page 148: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 8 Closing Out the SitePhotographs & Drawings

8.2 Photographs & DrawingsThe list in Table 8-2 represents the minimum types of photos or drawings of the site that Cisco requires. Additional pictures are acceptable.

Table 8-2 Required Photos & Drawings

Item Description Comments

1. BWX Basestation Antenna mounted on the tower, building, or other structure

2. Weatherproofed connectors on the back of the BWX Basestation Antenna

3. Cable bend radius on the tower to the BWX Basestation Antenna

4. Weatherproofed jumper cable to RF main feeder connections

5. RF cable strap ground kit installation in all places, as required for installation. RF main feeder runs.

6. Lower bus bar with lightning protectors Weatherproofed, if outside

7. Main feeder to BS jumper connections

8. BS jumper connections to BS

9. BWX Basestation Antenna grounding connections

10. BS grounding connections at BS and bus bar

11. Power connections to the Bs

12. Ground connections to earth ground or building steel

13. Tower or mount connections to ground

8-2BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 149: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 8 Closing Out the SiteSite Closeout Checklist

8.3 Site Closeout ChecklistTable 8-3 is a checklist with all of the documents, photos and drawings for use as a job aid when assessing whether or not the site is ready to be closed out. You may want to make a copy of this page to use at each site as part of the site’s records.

Table 8-3 Photos & Drawings

Closeout Items Completed File Name or Comments

DOCUMENTS / FORMS

1. Customer Contact List

2. Completed Site Candidate Evaluation Form

3. Driving Instructions & Map

4. Network Diagram (optional)

5. Antenna Power & Cable Selection

6. Bill of Materials (BoM)

7. RF Coverage Prediction Plot

8. Interference Data & Analysis

9. RFS System Test data (Closeout Tool tab)

10. Exported EMS Database text files

11. Calibration Verification results (Closeout Tool

12. Drive Study data (Closeout Tool tab)

13. Location Test data (Closeout Tool tab)

14. RF Plot Tuned Model

15. RMAs, if required

16. EMS backup files

PHOTOS / DRAWINGS

17. Mounted BWX Basestation Antenna

18. Weatherproofed connectors on Antenna

19. Cable Bend Radius

20. Jumper Cable to RF Main Feeder

21. Cable Ground Kits, if needed

22. Shelter Bus Bar with Lightning Arrestors

23. Main Feeder to BS Jumpers

24. BS Jumpers to BS

25. BWX Basestation Antenna Grounding

26. BS Grounding at BS bus bar

27. Power Connected to BS

28. Ground Connections to Earth Ground

29. Tower or Mount Connections to Ground

8-3BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 150: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Chapter 8 Closing Out the SiteSite Closeout Checklist

8-4BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 151: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

BWX 8305 BasesOL-16336-02

A

P P E N D I X A Rectifier/Battery Backup Suppliers

This section includes contact information for two rectifier/BBU suppliers. Inclusion of a supplier on this list does not represent an endorsement of the supplier or its products.

Suppliers ListValere Power Systems 661 N. Plano Road, Suite 300 Richardson, TX 75081 469-330-9100 http://www.valerepower.com

Argus Technologies Burnaby, BC Canada V5J 5E5 Phone: 604-436-5900 http://www.argusdcpower.com

A-1tation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Page 152: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix A Rectifier/Battery Backup SuppliersSuppliers List

A-2BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 153: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

BWX 8305 BasesOL-16336-02

A

P P E N D I X B Cisco Recommended Tools

This document provides a list of required tools for installing or troubleshooting a Cisco BWX 8305 Basestation (BS) (Table B-1).

Note As with any hardware or any troubleshooting, you will need basic tools like screwdrivers, pliers, voltmeter, etc.

Only a Cisco qualified specialist installer should install the BS and BWX Basestation Antenna. The BWX Basestation Antenna can be installed by non-certified personnel on any tower as long as a qualified installer/supervisor is available to verify and complete the BS installation and commissioning procedures.

Please note that if you are installing a 2.4 Ghz BS, this frequency is usually an unlicensed band system. Because many vendors can operate in the unlicensed band and change frequencies at will, there may be interference from other systems also running in the 2.4 GHz spectrum. You must measure the interference of the area before and during the installation of the system. The reason for looking at the interference beforehand is to see if the level is low enough to operate the BWX Mobile WiMAX system successfully.

Table B-1 Recommended Tools

Item 2.3/2.4/2.5/2.6 GHz 3.5 GHz Notes

1. Spectrum Analyzer1 Agilent 4402

FSH6

Agilent 4404

FSH6

2. Signal Generator1 A Systems #PSG-27 Portable Generator

A Systems #PSG-37

Portable Generator

A portable is not required but does make it easier to work with.

3. Global Positioning System Garmin Portable GPS with Serial Cable

Garmin Portable GPS with Serial Cable

This unit must put out serial output Text data.

B-1tation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Page 154: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix B Cisco Recommended ToolsVendor Contact Information

Note These items are Cisco recommended tools, and an equivalent item will suffice. Contact Cisco TAC (1-800-553-2447) for updated part numbers.

Vendor Contact InformationThere are other vendors who can provide similar test equipment and tools. These are just two that Cisco personnel have used.

Agilent 5301 Stevens Creek Blvd Santa Clara, CA 95051

Test & Measurement - Contact Center Phone: +1-800-829-4444 Fax: +1-800-829-4433 www.agilent.com

A Systems, Inc.300 West 12th Avenue Conshohocken, PA 19428 Phone: 610-828-4700 www.asystemsinc.com

4. BWX Commissioning Tool Cisco:

2.3 GHz Wx-Tool-Com-23-A1=

2.5 GHz Wx-Tool-Com-25-A1=

2.6 GHz Wx-Tool-Com-25-A1=

Cisco:

3.4 GHz Wx-Tool-Com-34-A1=

3.5 GHz Wx-Tool-Com-35-A1=

5. BWX Basestation Antenna Test Box

Cisco:

Wx-Test-Box-RF-A1=

1. For cable and RFS sweeping, you can use a Power Meter and a Signal Generator instead of a Spectrum Analyzer and Signal Generator.

Table B-1 Recommended Tools (continued)

Item 2.3/2.4/2.5/2.6 GHz 3.5 GHz Notes

B-2BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 155: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

BWX 8305 BasesOL-16336-02

A

P P E N D I X C RF Coverage Prediction Map Example

C-1tation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Page 156: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix C RF Coverage Prediction Map Example

C-2BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 157: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

BWX 8305 BasesOL-16336-02

A

P P E N D I X D Site Candidate Evaluation Form

Reference: Site Candidate Evaluation Form

This shows the first page (worksheet) of the Site Candidate Evaluation form. You will need the electronic copy; if you are not sure you have the latest version of the form, please contact Cisco Technical Services.

CISCO SYSTEMSSITE EVALUATION FORM

Site NameDateNCE

COMPANY NAME

ADDRESS

SITE OWNERSITE CONTACT NO.

GPS COORDINATES LAT LONG

ANTENNA TYPE / FREQUENCY

BASESTATION CHASSIS / POWER TYPE

ENCLOSURE TYPE (HUT, ETC) ELEV (AMSL)

TOWER TYPE (SS, MP,ETC) HEIGHT (AGL)

BTS (Rack) Floor Space Availability (3' x 3') x

Floor Space for Expansion BTS Rack x Type/Size of Cabinet/Rack requiredExisting Cabinet Space AvailablePower Type Available/Distance

Breaker(s) Required

Sub-metering RequiredGround Available/Distance

Gnd Buss Bar Available/Distance

Cable Entry Available

Type of RF Cable Entry Material

Type of RF Cable Sealing Required

Cable Tray AvailableFloor/Wall Drilling Permitted

Air-conditioning Available

Backhaul Available / TypeRoom has Adequate Lighting

Room has Adequate Ventilation

Any Door Entry Restrictions DOOR DIMENSION

Enclosure Access OTHERExtra Lightning Protectors needed

48VDC

BWX8305-PANEL

BWX8305

3.5GHz

Ground

SITE INFORMATION

SITE CONSTRUCTION INFORMATION

YES NO

INDOOR OUTDOOR

YES NO

YES NO

YES NO

YES NO

YES NOYES NO

YES NO

AC DCNOYESNOYES

NOYES

NOYES

NOYES

YES NO

YES NO INCHES

FEET

FEET

FEET

METERS

METERS

M ETERS

METERS

METERSFEETFEET

FEET METERS

FEET METERSNOYESCM

D-1tation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Page 158: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix D Site Candidate Evaluation Form

D-2BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 159: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

BWX 8305 BasesOL-16336-02

A

P P E N D I X E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis Guidelines

Reference: RF Center Frequency and Interference Analysis

These guidelines are intended for an experienced and Cisco qualified specialist Field Engineer to gather data for RF Engineering purposes. The procedures that are described are performed in order to make a determination of Basestation center frequency and possible interference points in both licensed and unlicensed spectrum. Please refer to all regulatory information for your region prior to performing these procedures.

Before You Start

OverviewAn RF interference analysis is usually called for under two conditions. One is when it is used for evaluating a candidate BWX 8305 Basestation (BS) site prior to deployment of equipment. We refer to the interference testing under these circumstances as a Pre-installation Test. The second is the Post-installation Test, when data is collected to determine (a) if there is any interference in the area at all; or (b) the source, or cause, of known interference in the area of the installed and operational site. As is obvious from the name of this test, it occurs after the Basestation has been deployed and turned up.

The instructions in this document assume the Field Engineer is at the BS site where the testing will take place. The data the Field Engineer gathers using the Interference Sweep procedure in this document will be evaluated and used in the calibration of the Basestation. In unlicensed systems, this will help determine the selection of the center frequency. In licensed systems, the data will help verify and plan for noise in the area.

To get the most benefit from this procedure, we suggest you follow these high-level steps:

Step 1: Read the entire procedure.

Step 2: Choose the correct Test configuration setup, per this procedure.

Step 3: Perform the Interference Sweep procedure.

E-1tation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Page 160: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis GuidelinesSpectrum Analyzer Settings

Step 4: Send the results to Cisco.

Required EquipmentYou will need the equipment shown in Table E-1 to complete the interference testing.

Table E-1 Required Equipment

Spectrum Analyzer SettingsThere are two types of interference tests conducted under either the Pre-installation or Post-installation situation: Frequency Domain test and Time Domain test. The following section explains some specific settings on the Spectrum analyzer, and what effects they will have on these tests.

Frequency Domain TestThe Frequency Domain test is a measurement of the amplitude of an incoming signal across a given frequency span. Setup for the Spectrum Analyzer:

• Frequency = the channel to be tested (refer to frequency charts later in procedure)

• Bandwidth (BW) = 100 KHz or lower

• Reference Level = –50 dBm

• Attenuation = 0 dB

Equipment Comments

HP4404B, FSH3, or FSH6 Spectrum Analyzer (or equivalent)

NOTE 1: If checking for 3.4/3.5 GHz spectrum, make sure the Spectrum Analyzer reads up to 4 GHz.

NOTE 2: An equivalent analyzer must have the following functions: Screen Save abilities, Max-hold function, Peak search, and ability to operate in the required frequency range

RFS Test Box (for BWX systems)

QMA, N Type Connectors, and different RF cables to make the connections

Test antenna in the given frequency range Cisco BWX Basestation Antenna

LNA in the given frequency range - With a standard antenna you need an additional 30 dB of gain

- With an unlicensed TTA antenna, around 10 db of additional gain is required

- With the licensed TTA antenna, NO additional gain is required

E-2BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 161: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis GuidelinesSpectrum Analyzer Settings

• Preamp, if available = on

• Span = determined by the start and stop frequencies

For the Frequency Domain test, the two parameters most frequently configured incorrectly are Reference Level and Bandwidth. To help the user determine the best settings, this section gives a short description as to what changes will be seen on the display if the parameter is changed.

Reference Level

This parameter sets the level of the top line of the Spectrum analyzer display (Figure E-1). Figure E-1 shows a display with the reference level set to –50 dB and the noise floor at –104 dB. The Blue line is a display line showing a level of –103.9 dB.

As you can see, the top-level line displays –50dB. On most Spectrum Analyzers the RF noise floor is coupled with the Reference Level line. A Spectrum Analyzer will try and display the noise floor on screen. If the reference level is set at a level that is too high for the Spectrum Analyzer to display the noise floor, it will automatically change the displayed level for the noise floor (Figure E-2).

Figure E-1 -50 Reference Level l

E-3BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 162: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis GuidelinesSpectrum Analyzer Settings

Figure E-2 -10 Reference Level

Bandwidth

Figure E-2 shows a reference level setting that was manually raised in the Spectrum Analyzer to –10. The blue line is the display line that was set with the original noise floor at the –50 reference level. When the reference level was raised from –50 to –10 the displayed noise floor also raised approximately 25 dB By setting the reference level to a lower value, the Spectrum Analyzer is able to display a noise floor that is closer to the actual digital noise floor of the equipment.

Figures E-3 and E-4 show the reason the reference level is important for capturing data for interference measurements. In Figure E-3, the reference was set at –50 dB level. A –65 dB signal was injected into the Spectrum Analyzer. In Figure E-4 the same –65 dB signal level was injected into the Spectrum Analyzer, but the reference level was changed from –50 dB to –10 dB.

Figure E- 4 still shows the –65 dB signal but only at 18 above the noise floor; whereas Figure E-3 shows the –65 dB signal at 40 dB above the noise floor. While measuring interference, if the reference level were set to –10 dB the Spectrum Analyzer would not display any signal levels below the displayed noise floor level, effectively masking any interference in that area.

E-4BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 163: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis GuidelinesSpectrum Analyzer Settings

Figure E-3 -50 dB Reference Level with Injected Signal

Figure E-4 -10 dB Reference Level with Injected Signal

E-5BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 164: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis GuidelinesSpectrum Analyzer Settings

The bandwidth parameter is used for the measurement and display of the signal level across a given range or span of frequencies. Within a given bandwidth there are 2 settings — one is Resolution bandwidth, and the other is Video bandwidth. To discuss bandwidth, an understanding of the Spectrum Analyzer display is needed. The display is broken out into frequencies and signal strength levels. Frequencies are displayed left to right, which is called the Span. The signal level is displayed from top to bottom and is shown with a signal strength level on the left side of the display.

Bandwidth in the Frequency Domain test is tied to the span function. Resolution bandwidth is the measurement steps or slices that the Spectrum Analyzer uses while sweeping across the span of frequencies. The Video bandwidth is the steps that the Spectrum Analyzer displays to the screen as it sweeps across the span of frequencies.

Two different bandwidths are used in the following examples. One is 10 KHz in a 5 MHz span (Figure E-5), and the second is 100 KHz in a 5 MHz span (Figure D6). With the 10 KHz bandwidth, the Spectrum Analyzer will make 500 steps to sweep the 5 MHz span, whereas on the 100 KHz bandwidth only 50 steps are made.

With a wider bandwidth (100 KHz) the receiver front-end of the Spectrum Analyzer is opened wider, allowing for more noise to be input. With the smaller bandwidth (10 KHz) the Spectrum Analyzer receiver is narrower and less susceptible to outside noise, thus giving a more accurate measurement. The drawback to a smaller bandwidth is the sweep time for the Spectrum Analyzer to step across the span. The sweep time increases, affecting the amount of time to perform the tests.

Figures E-5 and E-6 show the effect on the noise floor by increasing the bandwidth from 10 KHz up to 100 KHz. The setup in Figure E-5 is a 10 KHz resolution and video bandwidth, and a span of 5 MHz. In Figure E-6 the bandwidth was increased from 10 KHz to 100 KHz. By raising the bandwidth in Figure E-6, more noise was seen by the Spectrum Analyzer, in effect raising the noise floor and hiding over 10 dB of signal from view. When measuring for interference, this configuration can result in measurement error, giving the view that the interference is not as bad as it truly is.

E-6BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 165: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis GuidelinesSpectrum Analyzer Settings

Figure E-5 10KHz Bandwidth Setting

Figure E-6 100KHz Bandwidth Setting

E-7BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 166: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis GuidelinesSpectrum Analyzer Settings

Time Domain TestThe Time Domain test (Figure D7) is a measurement of the duration of an incoming signal across a given bandwidth. The duration of an incoming signal affects the number of packet errors that are generated over a given period of time. The longer the duration of the signal the more packet errors are generated. The number of packet errors will directly affect the data throughput rates of the system.

Setups for the Spectrum Analyzer are as follows:

• Frequency = center frequency to be tested

• Span = 0 Hz

• Video Bandwidth = 1 MHz

• Resolution Bandwidth = 1 MHz or 5 MHz

• Sweep Time = 40 ms and 400 ms

• Preamp if available = on

• Attenuation = 0 dB

• Reference Level = -40 dB

The following is a description of the parameters of the Spectrum Analyzer during the Time Domain test versus the Frequency Domain test, and what effects they will have if they are changed for the testing.

Span

The span function in the Frequency Domain test determines the start and stop range that the Spectrum Analyzer looks at for a given sweep time. By setting the Span to 0 Hz for the Time Domain test the Spectrum Analyzer looks at one specific frequency for a given amount of time.

Resolution Bandwidth

The resolution bandwidth parameter for the Time Domain test acts similarly to the span function in the Frequency Domain test. The bandwidth parameter opens up the receiver of the Spectrum Analyzer to look at all signals across that bandwidth for the given sweep time. The smaller the bandwidth, the more accurate the readings displayed.

This parameter also determines the frequencies that are to be tested for a given range. The BS uses a 5 MHz channel. If the Spectrum Analyzer can be programmed with a bandwidth of 5 MHz, then the center frequency to be tested is every 5 MHz. Some analyzers are only able to be programmed to 1 MHz, resulting in a center frequency test step of 1 MHz. This results in more frequencies to be tested, but a more accurate indication of where the interference is located in the spectrum.

E-8BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 167: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis GuidelinesSpectrum Analyzer Settings

Frequency examples:

5 MHz Resolution Bandwidth 1 MHz Resolution Bandwidth

2.4025 GHz 2.4GHz

2.4075 GHz 2.401GHz

2.4125 GHz 2.402GHz

Sweep Time

The sweep time parameter is the amount of time that it takes the analyzer to scan the set bandwidth. One transmit and receive frame on the Cisco system is 10 ms, so a sweep time of 40 ms shows 4 frames, and 400 ms shows 40 frames.

Figure E-7 Example of a Time Domain Test

E-9BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 168: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis GuidelinesSpectrum Analyzer Settings

Test ConfigurationsThere are two configuration scenarios used for interference testing:

• Pre-installation Testing Configuration

• Post-installation Testing Configuration

Pre-installation Testing covers the initial equipment configurations when testing for interference at a site in order to determine whether or not the site is a good candidate for placing the BS. It describes the interference measurements prior to the installation of any BS equipment. The Post installation Testing section covers the measurements using the BWX Basestation Antenna after it has been installed on the radio tower or building. Use whichever configuration setting is appropriate to the type of data you are trying to collect, prior to performing the Interference Sweep procedure.

Pre-installation Test

Following is the setup of the interference test equipment prior to the installation of the BS equipment. This test is used to help determine if the site that has been selected is usable for the Cisco equipment, and what possible frequencies can be used after the installation.

Required Equipment

• Spectrum Analyzer (4404 or R&S FSH)

• Testing antenna

• RF cable

• LNA as required

Setup

Refer to Figure E-8 for the setup. The Test antenna on the tower is at the proposed installation elevation for the BWX Basestation Antenna. The RF cable will run from the Test antenna to the Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) or Spectrum Analyzer. The LNA may be required in order to add gain to the system to compensate for any losses that are added to the test by the RF cable or Spectrum Analyzer. The typical loss for a Spectrum Analyzer is around 30 dB. The RF cable losses will vary depending on the size and type of cable and on the length of the cable. In the example below, the total system loss would be 39 dB.

Example:

- Antenna Gain: 0 dB

- Cable Loss: 9 dB

- Loss in Spectrum Analyzer: 30 dB

E-10BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 169: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis GuidelinesSpectrum Analyzer Settings

In the example above, there is 39 dB of loss. In order for the interference measurements to give an accurate indication of the environmental noise, an additional gain of over 39 dBi would need to be injected into the test. The best location for the optional LNA would be at the top of the tower prior to the main run of RF cable. In this location the noise will be amplified prior to the loss through the RF cable. If the optional LNA is only installed at the lower end of the tower, the noise is reduced by the loss in the cable and would lose 9 dB of resolution.

Figure E-8 Pre-Installation Test Setup

Test antenna atElevation BWX BasestationAntenna will be installed

Optional LNA

RF Cable

Optional LNA

SpectrumAnalyzer

RF Cable

Test antenna atElevation BWX BasestationAntenna will be installed

Test antenna atElevation BWX BasestationAntenna will be installed

Optional LNAOptional LNA

RF CableRF Cable

Optional LNAOptional LNA

SpectrumAnalyzerSpectrumAnalyzer

RF CableRF Cable

E-11BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 170: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis GuidelinesSpectrum Analyzer Settings

Procedure

The setup shown in Figure E-8 and the information below are for the initial (pre-installation) configuration. It gives you a starting point for this procedure. During the later steps, the configuration will change. Configure the test equipment and antenna as depicted in Figure E-8.

Step 1. Program the initial Spectrum Analyzer settings, per the following:

A. Resolution Bandwidth = 30 KHz

B. Video Bandwidth = 30 KHz

C. Attenuation = 0 db

D. Ref Level = -50 db

E. Sweep Time = auto

F. Detector Mode = positive peak

G. Frequency = determined by which step you are on in the procedure

Step 2. Set the frequency sweep range, as follows. This depends on the frequency you are investigating.

A. Unlicensed 2.4 GHz = sweep for range 2.390 GHz to 2.5 GHz

A. Licensed 2.6 GHz = sweep for range 2.596 GHz to 2.644 GHz

B. Other Licensed Frequencies (i.e., 2.3, 2.5, 3.4, 3.5 GHz) = sweep the center frequency plus 6 MHz to check for adjacent channels

Proceed to the “Interference Sweep Procedure” section of this document.

Post-installation Test

The post-installation test is used to help verify the operational frequency that the BS will use. If the system performance has degraded, this test can determine if there is another carrier causing problems in the RF environment.

Required Equipment

• Spectrum Analyzer (4404 or R&S FSH)

• BWX Basestation antenna

• RF cable connected to antenna

• RFS Test Box

• External LNA, as required

E-12BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 171: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis GuidelinesSpectrum Analyzer Settings

Set-up

Refer to Figure E-9 for the setup. In this setup, the BWX Basestation antenna is installed on the tower or building. The RF main feeder cable connects to the optional LNA or to the Spectrum Analyzer. The LNA may be required to add gain to the system to compensate for any losses that are added to the test by the RF cable or Spectrum Analyzer. The typical loss for a Spectrum Analyzer is around 30 dB. The RF cable losses will vary depending on the size and type of cable and on the length of the cable. In this example, the total system loss would be 19 dB.

Example:

- Antenna Gain: 20 dBi

- Cable Loss: 9 dB

- Loss in Spectrum Analyzer: 30 dB

Using this example, with a loss of 19 dB, in order for the interference measurements to give an accurate indication of the environmental noise, an additional gain of over 19 dBi needs to be injected into the test.

NOTE: When you are calculating whether you need to add additional LNA, you need to have the following information.

• Legacy LNA ~ 20 gain

• 2.4 TTA LNA ~20 gain

• 3.4 and 3.5 TTA LNA ~45 gain

• Most Spectrum Analyzers have an internal noise figure of –30

E-13BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 172: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis GuidelinesSpectrum Analyzer Settings

Figure E-9 Post-Installation Test Setup

Procedure

The setup shown in Figure E-10 and the information below are for the post-installation

test configuration.

Step 1. Configure the test equipment as depicted in Figure E-10.

Step 2. Program the initial Spectrum Analyzer settings, per the following.

A. Resolution Bandwidth = 30 KHz

E-14BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 173: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis GuidelinesSpectrum Analyzer Settings

B. Video Bandwidth = 30 KHz

C. Attenuation = 0 db

D. Ref Level = -50 db

E. Sweep Time = auto

F. Detector Mode = positive peak

G. Frequency = determined by which step you are on in the procedure

Step 3. Set the frequency sweep range, as follows. This depends on the frequency you are investigating:

A. Unlicensed 2.4 GHz = sweep for range 2.390 GHz to 2.5 GHz

B. Licensed 2.6 GHz = sweep for range 2.596 GHz to 2.644 GHz

C. Other Licensed Frequencies (i.e., 2.3, 2.5, 3.4, 3.5 GHz) = sweep the center frequency

plus 6 MHz to check for adjacent channels

D. RFS Test Box for any system needs to be set in Rx mode only

Figure E-10 Initial Configuration

E-15BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 174: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis GuidelinesSpectrum Analyzer Settings

Interference Sweep ProcedureThis procedure guides you through the steps to capture the data required for the interference study. The number of steps will change with the type of antenna you are using and the frequency band you are investigating.

For the Panel antenna, the number of passes through the procedure is determined by the beamwidth of the antenna. When using a Panel antenna to pick up the interference, try to change the angle or downtilt to face a potential interference source, such as a tower or a more populated area.

A Panel antenna is used to determine where a source of interference is coming from. The beamwidth of the Panel antenna determines the number of directions that you need to sweep. For example, if the beamwidth of the Panel antenna is 120 degrees, then 3 passes of the procedure are necessary in order to cover 360 degrees. Whereas, an antenna with a 30 degree beamwidth requires 12 sets of sweeps to cover the same 360 degree area.

The smaller beamwidth requires more sweeps but gives you greater accuracy in determining the source of the interfering signal. On each pass, the Panel antenna is moved per the beamwidth. Refer to Figure

E-11.

Figure E-11 Panel Sweep

E-16BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 175: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis GuidelinesSpectrum Analyzer Settings

Try to determine the polarization of the interfering signals during each sweep. To do this, flip the antenna 90 degrees. All captured measurements are with the antenna in the vertical polarization position.

The frequency band to be investigated is determined by the range of the BS that is purchased by a customer. For example, the 2.6 GHz MMDS band is a licensed band, and the customer purchasing the equipment will have a license for a given 6 MHz channel. The 2.4 GHz band is an unlicensed frequency range that is open for many applications. The objective for the 2.4GHz sweeps is to find a 5MHz range that is the clearest of any interference.

The sweeps for licensed spectrum are performed to verify that there is not another carrier infringing on the given licensed channel. If you are performing the sweeps for a licensed channel, it will greatly reduce the number of steps that you will need to perform. For a licensed spectrum system you only need to look at 3 channels for the spectrum. You will sweep the licensed channel, as well as the channels above and below the licensed band.

For example:

If you have an E3 license (2.620 GHz – 2.626 GHz), you will sweep E3 plus F2 (2.614 GHz– 2.620 GHz) and F3 (2.626 GHz – 2.632 GHz).

You will only need the Max-hold portion of the procedure for licensed spectrum systems.

Frequency Domain (Max-hold) Test ProcedureThe Max-hold procedure is to be used for both unlicensed and licensed systems.

Step 1. Check the direction of the antenna with a compass. Record the results.

Step 2. Set the “Start Frequency” to the minimum sweep range for the spectrum you are testing.

Step 3. Set the “Stop Frequency” to the maximum sweep range for the spectrum you are testing.

Step 4. Replace the antenna with a terminator to get a noise floor level. Save a screen capture.

Step 5. Turn on the “Max-hold” feature and acquire the signal for two minutes, and again for 30 seconds. Save a screen capture in Tiff or Gif format.

Step 6. Run “Single Sweep” 2 times, saving the screen captures for both sweeps. This gives a reference for the worst case that is shown with the “Max-hold” in Step 5. You can save time on this step if the Spectrum Analyzer is equipped with a Dual Trace option. Turn on Trace 2 to constant sweep and Trace 1 on Max-hold. After the Max-hold has acquired a signal for two minutes, press the single sweep. Save the screen capture. Refer to Figure E-12, Max-hold Screen Capture.

E-17BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 176: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis GuidelinesSpectrum Analyzer Settings

Figure E-12 Max-hold Screen Capture

Repeat steps 5 and 6 with the following Start and Stop frequencies. Refer to Table E-2(Unlicensed Band) or Table E-3(Licensed Band) below, as examples.

E-18BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 177: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis GuidelinesSpectrum Analyzer Settings

Unlicensed Bands – you must sweep all channels for an unlicensed band

Table E-2 2.4 GHz Frequency Domain Channels

Licensed Bands – sweep only the required channel, plus the one above and the one below:

Table E-3 Frequency Domain Channel Chart

Unlicensed 2.4GHz Band (ISM)

Start Stop

2.4GHz 2.4GHz

2.4GHz 2.4GHz

2.4GHz 2.4GHz

2.4GHz 2.4GHz

2.4GHz 2.4GHz

2.4GHz 2.4GHz

2.4GHz 2.4GHz

2.4GHz 2.4GHz

2.4GHz 2.4GHz

2.4GHz 2.4GHz

2.4GHz 2.4GHz

Licensed Bands

Channel Start Stop Channel Start Stop

2.3 GHz Systems (WCS) 3.4 GHz Systems (WLL)

A 2.305 2.310 3.41000 3.41500

2.310 2.315 3.41025 3.41525

B 2.350 2.355 3.41050 3.41550

2.355 2.360 3.41075 3.41575

C 2.31425 2.31925 3.41100 3.41600

D 2.34575 2.35075 3.41125 3.41625

3.41150 3.41650

.

.

.-.0025

.

.

.+.0025

3.52000 3.52500

2.5 GHz Systems (MMDS) 3.5 GHz Systems (WLL)

2.5005 2.5055 3.50000 3.50500

2.5065 2.5115 3.50025 3.50525

E-19BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 178: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis GuidelinesSpectrum Analyzer Settings

Time Domain Test ProcedureThe Time Domain procedure is for the unlicensed 2.4 GHz systems only.

Step 1. Set the “Center Frequency” to 2.4025 GHz. Set the “Resolution Bandwidth” to 5MHz or 1MHz depending on the feature of your Spectrum Analyzer. Refer to the “Spectrum Analyzer Settings” section or a discussion of bandwidth.

Step 2. Set the “Video Bandwidth” to 1 MHz.

Step 3. Set the “Sweep Time” to 40 ms.

Step 4. Set the “Span” to 0 Hz.

Step 5. Replace the antenna with a terminator to get a noise floor level. Save a screen capture.

2.5125 2.5175 3.50050 3.50550

2.5185 2.5235 3.50100 3.50575

2.5245 2.5295 3.50100 3.50600

2.5305 2.5355 3.50125 3.50625

.

.

.-.0025

.

.

.+.0025

.

.

.-.0025

.

.

.+.0025

2.6 GHz Systems (MMDS)

E1 2.596GHz 2.602GHz

F1 2.602GHz 2.608GHz

E2 2.608GHz 2.614GHz

F2 2.614GHz 2.62GHz

E3 2.62GHz 2.626GHz

F3 2.626GHz 2.632GHz

E4 2.632GHz 2.638GHz

F4 2.638GHz 2.644GHz

.

.

.-.0025

.

.

.+.0025

2.6805 2.6855

Licensed Bands

Channel Start Stop Channel Start Stop

E-20BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 179: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis GuidelinesSpectrum Analyzer Settings

Step 6. Set the display line to the noise floor level. The display line needs to stay on for all of the following sweeps. This display line is used for a reference point and should be set with the LNA powered on.

Step 7. Run the “Single Sweep” approximately 50 times and determine how often the interference occurs. Save a screen capture of one worst case and one typical. See Figure E-13, Time Domain Screen Capture.

Step 8. Set the “Sweep Time” to 400 ms, and repeat Step 7.

Step 9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for an offset of 5 MHz for a 5 MHz bandwidth, and an offset of 1 MHz for a 1 MHz bandwidth, up to 24875 MHz for 2.4 systems.

Step 10. Refer to Table E-4.

Table E-4Time Domain Frequency Chart

Step 4. Repeat the “Max-hold” and “Time Domain” steps for each direction.

2.4GHz Band 2.4GHz Band

Center Frequency5MHz bandwidth

Center Frequency1MHz bandwidth

2.4075GHz 2.400GHz

2.4125GHz 2.401GHz

2.4175GHz 2.402GHz

2.4225GHz 2.403GHz

2.4275GHz 2.404GHz

2.4325GHz 2.405GHz

Up to 2.4875GHz Up to 2.483GHz

E-21BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 180: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis GuidelinesSpectrum Analyzer Settings

Figure E-13 Time Domain Screen Capture

Analyzing the Test Results

Once the procedures are completed, use the following guidelines to analyze the results. First, you will look at the Frequency Domain data, and, for unlicensed systems, also the Time Domain data. If you need help, please contact the Cisco TAC (1-800-553-2447).

Frequency Domain Interference Sweeps AnalysisThe Frequency Domain Interference Sweep has two kinds of measurements, Max-hold and Single Sweep. First, we have to determine the theoretical noise floor. We will use the theoretical noise floor to interpret the Max-hold sweeps data.

E-22BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 181: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis GuidelinesSpectrum Analyzer Settings

Calculating the Theoretical Noise Floor

All analysis of interference is done from the theoretical noise floor. This is the best-case noise floor in a perfectly clean environment. The following algorithm is used to determine the noise floor.

Theoretical noise floor (NF) = Thermal NF @ 1 Hz and 20° C + sub-carrier channel energy + Cisco BWX Mobile WiMAX system noise figure

Thermal NF @ 1 Hz and 20° C = -174 Sub-carrier channel energy = 10log(500 KHz) = +57 dB Cisco BWX Mobile WiMAX system noise figure = +5 dB

Resulting theoretical noise floor -174+57+5 = -112 dBm

If the setting on the Spectrum Analyzer was 30 KHz and not 500 KHz, there would be a 12 dB difference in the setting, which means the thermal noise floor for 30 KHz @ 20° C would be –124 dBm.

Analyzing the Max-hold Sweeps

The BWX Basestation is able to correct for a specified level of interference. This level will vary depending on the type of system or software load that is running on the BWX Basestation.

• Licensed systems (2.3, 2.5, 2.6, 3.5 GHz) +5 dB over theoretical noise floor

• Unlicensed systems (2.4 GHz) +15 dB over theoretical noise floor

This means that any signals on the capture for the Max-hold sweeps above –107 dBm for licensed bands (0 through –106.9) or –97 for unlicensed bands (0 through –96.9) are not acceptable for spectrum usage This is summarized below:

• -112 + 5 dB = -107 dB for licensed systems

• -112 + 15 dB = -97 dB for unlicensed systems

NOTE: If using 30 KHz for the bandwidth setting on the Spectrum Analyzer, the levels will need to be increased by 12 dB: -119 dB for licensed systems and –109 dB for unlicensed systems.

Evaluating the Signal with Additional Gain

So far all of the values that have been discussed – noise floor, signal levels, etc. – have been with no gains or losses in the test set-up. This will not be the case in the real world. In the data capture, additional gain was added to the set-up to overcome any losses that are in the system due to cable or connection losses. When analyzing the interference signals, this additional gain must be removed to determine the actual interference signal level.

E-23BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 182: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis GuidelinesSpectrum Analyzer Settings

For example:

Set-up 2.4 GHz Omni system -8 dB of cable loss +18 dB gain in Spectrum Analyzer pre-amp Spectrum Analyzer was set for 30 KHz bandwidth

Results Theoretical noise floor = -124 dB Acceptable interference signal level for 2.4 GHz = theoretical NF + unlicensed system level: -109 dB = -124 dB + 15 dB

Total Gain on the Set-up +30 dB = +20 dB on Omni + -8 dB of cable + 18 dB on pre-amp

With the above example the incoming signals will be amplified by +30 dB. This additional 30 dB will need to be taken into account when evaluating any interference. This is done by reducing all levels by the 30 dB to compare them to the –109 dB acceptable level.

Incoming signal level – 30 dB = actual signal level

For unlicensed 2.4 GHz bands, if all the 2.4 GHz bands’ Max-hold sweeps are 15 dB higher than the noise floor, the Engineer should investigate the Time Domain sweep results.

Time Domain Interference Sweeps AnalysisThe Time Domain sweeps capture how the interference sources behave, if the interference is constantly there or operating in a hopping method. Time Domain sweeps are typically used for the unlicensed 2.4 GHz systems’ interference measurements.

Calculating the Theoretical Noise Floor

All analysis of interference is done from the theoretical noise floor. This is the best-case noise floor in a perfectly clean environment. The following algorithm is used to determine the noise floor.

Theoretical noise floor (NF) = thermal NF @ 1 Hz and 20° C + sub-carrier channel energy + Cisco BWX Mobile WiMAX system noise figure

Thermal NF @ 1 Hz and 20° C = -174 Sub-carrier channel energy = 10log(500 KHz) = +57 dB Cisco BWX Mobile WiMAX system noise figure = +5 dB

Resulting theoretical noise floor -174+57+5 = -112 dBm

E-24BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 183: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis GuidelinesSpectrum Analyzer Settings

If the setting on the spectrum analyzer was 30 KHz and not 500 KHz, there would be a 12 dB difference in the setting, which means the thermal noise floor for 30 KHz @ 20° C would be –124 dBm. If the setting on the spectrum analyzer is set for 1 MHz and not 500 KHz, there is a 3 dB difference in the noise floor, meaning that the theoretical noise for 1 MHz @ 20° C is –109 dBm.

Analyze the Time Domain Sweeps

The BS is able to compensate for 320 μs per each 10 ms frame. This 320 μs timeframe only comes into play when the signal level of the interferer is above the levels determined in the Max-hold section. The 320 μs duration is an additive duration throughout the 10 ms timeframe. If all of the interference signals above the determined signal level add up to be longer than 320 μs, then that frame is unusable.

E-25BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 184: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix E RF Center Frequency & Interference Analysis GuidelinesSpectrum Analyzer Settings

E-26BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 185: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

BWX 8305 BasesOL-16336-02

A

P P E N D I X F BWX 8305 Basestation Outdoor Enclosure Manufacturers

GeneralCisco does not manufacture external cabinets for the BWX 8305 Basestation. The following lists two manufacturers who are positioned to provide external cabinets for the Cisco system. Inclusion of the manufacturers on this list does not represent an endorsement of the manufacturer or its products by Cisco.

Manufacturers ListPurcell Systems 16125 East Euclid Avenue Spokane Valley, WA 99216 Phone: 509-755-0341 http://www.purcellsystems.com/

Telect 1730 North Madison Street Liberty Lake WA 99019 Phone: 509-926-6000 http://www.telect.com/

F-1tation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Page 186: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix F BWX 8305 Basestation Outdoor Enclosure ManufacturersManufacturers List

F-2BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 187: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

BWX 8305 BasesOL-16336-02

A

P P E N D I X G Closeout Tool Form & Procedure

Reference:

• Closeout Tool Form

• Closeout Tool Procedure

Closeout Tool FormThis is a picture of the first worksheet in the Closeout Tool for a quick visual identification; this appendix does not include the entire tool. Please use the electronic copy of the tool found on the following LiveLink site: https://tools.cisco.com/cws/livelink?func=ll&objid=4353291&objaction=browse. The Closeout Tool is updated periodically. If you are not sure that you have the latest version, please contact Cisco Technical Services and request that the latest tool be sent to you.

Company NameSite NameAddressCity,StateZip, Country

NameEmail AddressAddressCity,StateCountryPhone

BTS IDBTS NameBTS Type

Installer NamePhoneDate

40-00505-00R Rev b 2008-11-13

0

Site Location

Contact Information

BTS Configuration

Deployment

Read BTS Export File (*.txt)

Reset Company Info

Save Workbook

G-1tation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Page 188: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix G Closeout Tool Form & ProcedureCloseout Tool Procedure

Closeout Tool ProcedureThese procedures accompany the Closeout Tool (spreadsheet). The tool is used for capturing key data from an installation site where the Cisco BWX 8305 Basestation (BS) is being deployed. The tool utilizes BS data that you export from the BS, as well as manually entered data, formulas, and links to automate the analysis of BS readiness to turn up.

• All cells that are YELLOW in color will be filled out when you import the BS export file.

• You MUST enter the manual data that is shown with a background color of DARK GREEN. This information will not be written in via the BTS export file.

• Any Cell that is RED after the data has been entered is flagging a problem with the system.

Steps

Step 1 Select the Company Info Worksheet tab.

a. Enter the Company name.

a. Enter all contact information.

b. Enter all installer contact information.

Step 2 Select the BTS Info Worksheet tab.

a. Enter the BTS type.

b. Enter the RFS Downtilt (in degrees).

c. Enter the RFS height.

d. Enter the Azimuth.

Step 3 Select the RFS & Cable RFS Loss Worksheet tab.

a. Sweep the RFS and record the results in the worksheet, per the I&C Guide.

b. Sweep the cable and RFS and record the results in the worksheet, per the I&C Guide. If the background color is RED, there is a problem. Troubleshoot using standard troubleshooting techniques.

Step 4 Complete the installation of the BS and Antenna.

Step 5 Turn on caldebug through the BS console port.

Step 6 Calibrate the BTS.

a. Verify Cal Errors = 0 (using the caldebug command in the console). If calibration passe, turn off caldebug.

b. If calibration doesn’t pass, troubleshoot the problem before continuing.

Step 7 Select the Company Info Worksheet tab.

a. Click on the “Read BTS Export File (*.txt) ” button on the bottom of the screen. This should import all parameters from the BTS Export file and populate the Closeout Tool form.

b. Click on the “Save Workbook” button, also at the bottom of the screen. This will save the Closeout Tool form, using the Company name and Site name.

Step 8 RF Verification - DO NOT USE THIS SECTION

G-2BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 189: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix G Closeout Tool Form & ProcedureCloseout Tool Procedure

Step 9 Select the Location Testing tab.

a. For a panel, select 6 locations to test at varying distances form the BS. The locations should be selected at random. (Do not look for an ideal site. This will not help to understand the real performance of the system in the field.)

Step 10 Select the Drive Test Form tab.

a. Perform the drive test, per the I&C Guide.

b. Enter all data.

G-3BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 190: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix G Closeout Tool Form & ProcedureCloseout Tool Procedure

G-4BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 191: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

BWX 8305 BasesOL-16336-02

A

P P E N D I X H BWX Antenna Channel Filter Installation Procedure

OverviewChannel Filters may be used to ensure the radiated signal from the BWX 8305 Basestation (BS) stays strictly within the frequency boundaries. Channel Filters are not always used by the Service Provider of a BS. This procedure is used by a Cisco qualified specialist Installation Technician or Field Engineer when installing or replacing Channel Filters on the BWX Basestation Antenna is required.

Required ToolsYou will need the following tools to install Channel Filters on the BWX Basestation Antenna (Figure H-1):

• 2 x QMA to QMA RF cables

• 8 x BWX Basestation Antenna Channel Filters

• 1 x Long Phillips screw driver or variable torque cordless screw driver with flexible extension and Phillips bit

Figure H-1 Required Tools

H-1tation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Page 192: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix H BWX Antenna Channel Filter Installation ProcedureChannel Filter Installation Procedure

Channel Filter Installation Procedure

Remove TTA ModuleIf the BWX Basestation Antenna was shipped without the Channel Filter, the first thing that must be done is to remove the TTA module that is in the BWX Basestation Antenna. This section covers the steps required for the removal of this module from the BWX Basestation Antenna.

Step 1 Remove the six screws that hold the BWX Basestation Antenna access door onto the main BWX Basestation Antenna chassis. See Figure H-2 for the location of the screws.

Figure H-2 Location of Access Door Screws

H-2BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 193: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix H BWX Antenna Channel Filter Installation ProcedureChannel Filter Installation Procedure

Step 2 Remove all TTA modules from the BWX Basestation Antenna chassis. Note the location of each module to return them to the same position upon completion of this procedure. Refer to Figure H-3 to locate the TTA module screws.

Figure H-3 Location of TTA Module Screws

H-3BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 194: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix H BWX Antenna Channel Filter Installation ProcedureChannel Filter Installation Procedure

Install Channel FilterThe following steps are for installing Channel Filters into an BWX Basestation Antenna that has no TTA modules installed. Refer to Figure H-4 to note the correct location in the BWX Basestation Antenna for the Channel Filter.

Figure H-4 Location of Channel Filter

Step 1 Take the Channel Filter and place it at the first screw hole location (Figure H-5).

Figure H-5 Location of First Channel Filter

H-4BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 195: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix H BWX Antenna Channel Filter Installation ProcedureChannel Filter Installation Procedure

Step 2 With the long Phillips screw driver, insert the screws in the top and bottom of the Channel Filter. (Figure H-6 and Figure H-7).

Figure H-6 Insert Top Screw

Figure H-7 Insert Bottom Screw

H-5BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 196: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix H BWX Antenna Channel Filter Installation ProcedureChannel Filter Installation Procedure

Step 3 Connect the RF cable from the top port of the Channel Filter labeled “Antenna” to the first port of the Calibration board (Figure H-8).

Figure H-8 Antenna RF Cable

Step 4 Install the first TTA module into the BWX Basestation Antenna chassis. Refer to Figure H-3 for TTA module screw locations.

Step 5 Connect the second RF cable to the TTA connector of the channel filter and to the TTA module that was installed into the BWX Basestation Antenna chassis in Step 4 (Figure H-9).

Figure H-9 TTA RF Cable

Step 6 Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for the remaining Channel Filters and TTA modules.

Step 7 Replace the access door on the back of the BWX Basestation Antenna chassis. Refer to Figure H-1 for screw locations.

Step 8 Affix the appropriate Cisco Networks Channel Filter sticker to the BWX Basestation Antenna AND another to the BS.

H-6BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 197: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix H BWX Antenna Channel Filter Installation ProcedureChannel Filter Installation Procedure

H-7BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 198: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix H BWX Antenna Channel Filter Installation ProcedureChannel Filter Installation Procedure

H-8BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 199: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

BWX 8305 BasesOL-16336-02

A

P P E N D I X I Guidelines for Painting a Cisco Antenna

DisclaimerAlthough Cisco does not recommend the application of paint or primer to a Cisco BWX Basestation Antenna, whether for aesthetics or camouflage purposes. The reasons why Cisco does not recommend the application of paint or primer to a Cisco antenna are as follows:

• Adding material through which the antenna beam must penetrate may hinder the overall performance and gain of the antenna.

• An uneven application or accumulation of material, paint, or other material will cause varied and unpredictable antenna performance.

• Dark colors may raise the thermal load of the internal electronics above design limits. Paint applied over a heat sink impedes thermal performance of the heat sink.

If the Service Provider must apply paint, primer, or other material, the following are guidelines for selecting and correcting the application of paint. Though this document refers to specific products, Cisco does not endorse any paint manufacturer or manufacturer of paint application equipment.

Special Word Usage & AcronymsWords used in this document have the following implied meaning:

• May: Indicates flexibility of choice with no implied preference

• Shall: Indicates a mandatory requirement

• Should: Indicates flexibility of choice with a strongly preferred implementation

ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene ESD: Electro-static Discharge

IAW: In accordance with RF: Radio Frequency

TTA: Tower Top Amplifier PC: Polycarbonate

PVC: Polyvinyl chloride UV: Ultraviolet

VOC: Volatile Organic Compounds;

I-1tation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Page 200: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix I Guidelines for Painting a Cisco AntennaGuidelines for Painting a Cisco BWX Basestation Antenna

Guidelines for Painting a Cisco BWX Basestation Antenna

BWX Basestation Antenna MaterialsPaint and primer should be suitable for application to these materials:

• One-piece Sector Panel antenna are Kydex™.

• BWX Basestation Antenna with 8 individual antenna elements are PVC or PC/ABS

Paint/Primer TypesWhere the RF degradation of a particular paint is uncertain, a painted coupon should be tested using industry-standard methods for characterizing antennas at an accredited antenna range using the Cisco antenna. Post-application of the paint should show no discernible difference in antenna pattern, gain, or any other radiation characteristics.

The selected paint shall be non-hygroscopic (shall not have a tendency to absorb water). The paint shall not contain any ferromagnetic particles, large non-insulating aggregates, high levels of carbon, or conductive dyes. The paint should have UV-resistant properties. Most enamel car paint complies with these requirements, the exception being metal flake or metallic paint. A low VOC paint is Sherwin Williams® Polane HS Plus Polyurethane Enamel, the exception being silver paint, which contains metallic particles.

Paint ApplicationRefer to the paint manufacturer’s recommended methods for safe and pr preparation and application methods, including application and safety equipment. Flaking, running or uneven paint thickness varies the antenna performance. Good paint adhesion is affected through surface preparation and cleaning. Break any glossy surfaces using sandpaper or other roughening process. The surface of the radome must be free of grease or contaminates before the paint application.

The ventilation plugs of the antenna must be protected from chemicals used during the preparation process. Do not sand ventilation plugs or allow the plugs to become caked with debris from sanding. Do not paint over the ventilation plugs. The ventilation plugs must be masked before the application of primer or paint. The connectors, ground studs, label, drain holes, and mounting hardware must be protected from paint.

I-2BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 201: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

BWX 8305 BasesOL-16336-02

A

P P E N D I X J High-Powered BWX Basestation Antenna

References:

• BWX Basestation Combiner Quick Install Guide

• BWX 8305 Basestation Installation & Commissioning Guide

• BWX Mobile WiMAX Configuration Guide

EMS 4.5+ supports the new 3.5 GHz BWX High-powered Basestation Antenna, which is designed primarily to address capacity issues. In some cases Service Providers need to add more users to the same geographic location without adding more antennas, which might not be feasible due to space limitations and would mean incurring additional tower crew installations, etc. When using a BWX High-powered Basestation Antenna with a BWX Basestation Combiner and two BWX 8305 Basestations (BS), the combined power gain is +3 dB. The BWX High-powered Basestation Antenna looks almost identical to a Standard BWX Basestation Antenna.

At this time only the 3.4 -3.5 GHz (3475 to 3600 MHz) frequency BWX High-powered Basestation Antenna is available, supporting the following configurations: BS + BS and a single BS (Figure J-1).

Figure J-1 BWX High-Powered Basestation Antenna (H-TTA) & BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner

and BWX High-Powered Basestation Antenna (H-TTA) & One BS

BTS5 MHz2 Watts

5 MHz

H-TTAPower = 33 dBm(+3 dB > S-RFS)

BTS5 MHz2 Watts

5 MHz

H-TTAPower = 33 dBm(+3 dB > S-RFS)

H-TTA10 MHz2 Watt

(33 dBm)

Combiner

BTS 15 MHz1 Watt

(30 dBm)

5 MHz

BTS 25 MHz1 Watt

(30 dBm)

5 MHz

10 MHz

Two Adjacent5 MHz Bands

3 dB more(double)

than S-TTA

H-TTA10 MHz2 Watt

(33 dBm)

Combiner

BTS 15 MHz1 Watt

(30 dBm)

5 MHz

BTS 25 MHz1 Watt

(30 dBm)

5 MHz

10 MHz

Two Adjacent5 MHz Bands

3 dB more(double)

than S-TTA

BTS5 MHz2 Watts

5 MHz

H-TTAPower = 33 dBm(+3 dB > S-RFS)

BTS5 MHz2 Watts

5 MHz

H-TTAPower = 33 dBm(+3 dB > S-RFS)

H-TTA10 MHz2 Watt

(33 dBm)

Combiner

BTS 15 MHz1 Watt

(30 dBm)

5 MHz

BTS 25 MHz1 Watt

(30 dBm)

5 MHz

10 MHz

Two Adjacent5 MHz Bands

3 dB more(double)

than S-TTA

H-TTA10 MHz2 Watt

(33 dBm)

Combiner

BTS 15 MHz1 Watt

(30 dBm)

5 MHz

BTS 25 MHz1 Watt

(30 dBm)

5 MHz

10 MHz

Two Adjacent5 MHz Bands

3 dB more(double)

than S-TTA

H-TTA & RF Combiner H-TTA & One BTS

J-1tation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Page 202: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix J High-Powered BWX Basestation Antenna

Note When using the BWX 8305 Basestation, the RFC cards must be at a minimum revision level of 91-35300-05 Rev H Radio Frequency Controller with Deviation D00297 or 91-35300-06 Rev F. These revision level cards incorporate Deviation D00297, required to support the H-RFS.

The Service Provider must select adjacent channels when using the BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner with two BSs, i.e., 3.505 and 3.510. The Service Provider may choose to configure both BSs with equal output power; however, the Service Provider also has the option to configure one BS at a higher power level than the other. In either situation, the total combined output power is still 33 dBm (2 Watts). The numbers shown in Table J-1 are an example of how the Service Provider would set the power level for one BS higher than the other.

The output power of a BS is 21 dBm. For every decibel over 30 (P2), you will subtract 1 dB cable loss for BWX High-Powered Basestation Antenna (Table J-2).

Note Prior to EMS 4.5, power could not be set over 30 dB (warning message). EMS 4.5 includes a check box to indicate the antenna is an BWX High-Powered Basestation Antenna. When checked, the EMS will allow the Service Provider to set the power to 33 dB.

The physical installation of an BWX High-Powered Basestation Antenna is 100% the same as with a Standard BWX Basestation Antenna. The installer calibrates in the same way, sweeps the BWX Basestation Antenna in the same way, etc.

Table J-1 Different BS Power Levels (dBm) (MC-SCDMA example)

BS 1 BS 2

32 27

31.5 28

31 29

30 30

Table J-2 Example - BTS Cable Loss (dBm)

If the Output Power is . . . . Then the Total Cable Loss will be

30 30

31 29

32 28

33 27

J-2BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 203: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

BWX 8305 BasesOL-16336-02

A

P P E N D I X K BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner (3400 to 3625 MHz)

References:

• BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner Quick Install Guide

• BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner User Guide

Cisco offers a multi-carrier BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner ( Figure K-1)that combines the RF signals from two different Basestations (Figure K-2) into one antenna cable, i.e, RG-6, and then transmits both sets of signals through one BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna. At this time the Combiner is available for 3400 to 3610 MHz frequencies only.

Figure K-1 BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner

In existing sites, using a BWX Basestation Combiner is an economical way for Service Providers to increase cell site capacity, and to avoid cost by not having to add another BWX Basestation Antenna when a BWX 8305 Basestation (BS) is added to the site. As BSs evolve to multi-carrier systems, the BWX Basestation Combiner enables Service Providers to install a single BWX Basestation Antenna for multi-carrier operation.

K-1tation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Page 204: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix K BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner (3400 to 3625 MHz)Regulatory

Figure K-2 Combiner to Basestation Connectivity

While inserting the BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner into an existing site increases capacity at that site, if using a Standard TTA BWX Basestation Antenna, the power loss introduced by the Combiner will degrade the coverage area by up to 30% (since the Combiner is splitting the power between the two BSs). The insertion loss of the BWX Basestation Combiner is 5 dB. However, when the BWX Basestation Combiner is used with a BWX High-powered Basestation Antenna, together they produce up to +3 dB more power output. The output power of a standard BWX Basestation Antenna is 1 Watt per carrier. The output power of a BWX High-Powered Basestation Antenna is 1 Watt per carrier, for a total of 2Watts.

The BWX Basestation Combiner unit fits easily into a standard 19” telecom rack, typically where the Basestations are installed. Its dimensions are 1.7" H x 19.0" W x 10.4" D and is equivalent to one Rack Unit (RU) high.

RegulatoryCisco’s BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner meets the following regulatory requirements:

• FCC Class A

• CE Mark

• AS/NZS 3548 Class A (Australia, New Zealand)

• EN 55022 Class A

• CISPR22 Class A

• IEC60950/EN60950

• CSA C22.2-950

Cisco’s SSs meet the following regulatory requirements:

• FCC Class B

• CE Mark

• AS/NZS 3548 Class B (Australia, New Zealand)

• EN 55022 Class B

• CISPR22 Class B

• UL 1950

• IEC60950/EN60950

BWX Basestation B RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1

BWX Basestation A RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1

BWX Basestation B RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1

BWX Basestation B RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1

BWX Basestation A RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1

Cisco BWX 8326

BWX Basestation A BWX Basestation BBWX Basestation B RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1

BWX Basestation A RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1

BWX Basestation B RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1

BWX Basestation B RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1

BWX Basestation A RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1

Cisco BWX 8326Cisco BWX 8326

BWX Basestation ABWX Basestation A BWX Basestation BBWX Basestation B

K-2BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 205: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix K BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner (3400 to 3625 MHz)Physical Installation

• CSA C22.2-950

This is an example of the Regulatory label (Figure K-3)affixed to the bottom of the BWX Basestation Combiner unit. It provides identification information and appropriate Regulatory approvals for that unit.

Note The professional installer may want to inspect the label before installation, as thereafter his view of it may be obstructed.

Figure K-3 BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner Regulatory Label

Physical InstallationThe BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner is an indoor unit that acts as a passive device and is treated much like a cable in the configuration of the Basestation. It does not use any power supply, and it does not have software loaded on any of its components. Before installing it, the BWX Basestation Combiner unit and its cables must be swept in the same way that the RF cables and BWX Basestation Antenna are swept for power loss or gain.

The BWX Basestation Combiner has 27 ports with QMA connectors: 3 connections for each of the 9 BS cables (8 RF cables and the Cal cable). The first BS (called ‘BTS A’ on the Combiner) uses the red connections on the front of the Combiner. The second BS (called ‘BTS B’ on the Combiner) uses the blue connections on front of the Combiner. The black (middle) port is the output port sent to both BSs as the signal comes from the BWX Basestation Antenna to the BSs (see Figure K-4). There is also one group of three ports in the middle of the BWX Basestation Combiner faceplate that are used for the Calibration Cables. The BWX Basestation Combiner requires two sets of 9 Jumper cables with QMA – QMA connectors. A third set of cables with N - QMA connectors go from the BWX Basestation Combiner to the Arrestor Bar. The cables are sold separately from the unit itself.

K-3BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 206: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix K BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner (3400 to 3625 MHz)Operation

Figure K-4 Faceplate Ports

Note When installing the BWX Basestation Combiner with only one BS initially, it is required that you cap the other nine (9) ports (BTS-B) with 50-Ohm terminators, as a precaution against signal loss. A termination kit can be purchased separately from Cisco.

Note The cables from the BS to the BWX Basestation Combiner (QMA - QMA) and the cables from the BWX Basestation Combiner to the Arrestor Bar (QMA - N type) must be LMR-240. Theses cables can be purchased separately.

OperationThe circuit card inside the BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner is basically made up of 9 two-way passive RF power dividers with lightning protection built-in to the antenna ports. A 10.7 MHz detector is incorporated on each Basestation connection to the BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner. The detectors determine the Time Division Duplex (TDD) timing sequence using an on/off oscillator and control the frame timing. The two BSs whose RF signals are combined must be in sync with one another by using the same timing sequence: 5 ms framing (802.16e/Mobile WiMAX).

The BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner differentiates the incoming RF signal when the configuration has two BSs (Figure K-5). It monitors the 24 VDC coming in from each BS RF port and applies 10.7 MHz voltage to all 16 RF output ports simultaneously. The combined signal then goes to the Power Amplifiers in the BWX Basestation Antenna to be amplified and transmitted.

If a particular port fails to provide the 24V signal input, that port is assumed to be inoperable and is set to an “invalid” state. Such a state may be caused by the Service Provider taking that RF element out of service, having a broken or missing cable, or due to the entire BS being powered down.

Figure K-5 2 BWX 8305 Basestation Configuration

BWX Basestation B RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1

BWX Basestation A RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1

BWX Basestation B RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1

BWX Basestation B RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1

BWX Basestation A RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1RF8 RF7 RF6 RF5 CAL RF4 RF3 RF2 RF1

K-4BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 207: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix K BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner (3400 to 3625 MHz)Cable Loss Consideration

Cable Loss ConsiderationWhen a BS is used with an BWX Basestation Combiner, any Antenna Cable Loss greater than 27 will generate an RFC Configuration alarm. This is due to a threshold of 32 dB in the software that does not yet compensate for the Combiner loss of 5 dB. The work-around is to not set the BWX 8305 Basestation Antenna Cable Loss above 27.

CalibrationTo calibrate a BS using a BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner and two BSs with only one BWX Basestation Antenna requires controlling the signals so that the two BSs do not interfere with each other. During calibration the Combiner transmits only for the BS that is undergoing calibration, while ignoring any transmit signals from the other BS. Each BS is determined to be in transmit or receive mode according to the number of active RF ports (Table K-1).

The majority of RF transmissions determine when one of the BSs transmits versus receives. Once one BS does that, the other BS also transmits or receives. During calibration only one BS controls power to theantenna. A transmit state is equal to the absence of a 10.7 MHz signal for a given antenna path. A receive state is equivalent to the presence of 10.7 MHz signal on the antenna path. Since during calibration the antenna only transmits, transmit takes precedence over receive. For a few milliseconds, there is no uplink available for SSs.

In EMS Release 4.5 or later, the EMS will determine and manage the master/slave relationship between the two BSs to control calibration. The EMS will also monitor the health of the BWX Basestation Antenna. At any given time only one BS should be in charge of the output power to the BWX Basestation Antenna.

MaintenanceThe BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner is a single unit that has no field replaceable parts. If a BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner breaks, you simply uninstall it and replace it with another unit. A broken unit will not send an alarm to the EMS or otherwise give a visible indication that there is a component issue. However, the Service Provider will likely see degradation in antenna gain and, therefore, subscriber service if the BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner is not functioning properly. Generally, one of two things can happen to cause a failure in the BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner. A broken component or cable does not pass RF signal or a BS fails to calibrate because it cannot detect transmit from receive status.

As with all electronic components, the unit must be maintained within standard operating temperatures and climates, the same as those set for the BSs (Table K-2).

Table K-1 Transmit/Receive States

Basestation A State Basestation B StateBWX Basestation Antenna State

Transmit Transmit Transmit

Transmit Receive Transmit

Receive Transmit Transmit

Receive Receive Receive

K-5BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 208: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix K BWX 8326 Basestation Combiner (3400 to 3625 MHz)Maintenance

Table K-2 Temperature Range

Minimum Maximum

Operating Temperature 0 + 50 °C

Storage Temperature - 40 + 85 °C

K-6BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 209: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

BWX 8305 BasesOL-16336-02

A

P P E N D I X L Software Upgrade Procedures (Example)

Reference: Cisco OS Release Notes (specific to each software version)

This appendix provides an example of the software upgrade or downgrade considerations for a BWX Mobile WiMAX system. Do not use these instructions, as they may be outdated. Please refer to the appropriate Cisco OS Release Notes specific to the software version you are deploying.

IMPORTANT! Read all instructions thoroughly, including previous Release Notes and Addendum, before starting an upgrade or downgrade procedure. Always refer to the latest release notes corresponding to the system you are running.

If any alarms or errors occur during or after the upgrade, please check the Appendix for Known Product Issues. If the Appendix does not include the problem you are seeing, please contact Cisco TAC (1-800-553-2447).

Caution As of Release 4.4.2, there are new computing requirements for the EMS Server and Client machines. This is applicable to both Windows OS and Unix OS machines.

Software UpgradesIn licensed frequencies the BWX 8305 Basestation (BS) is upgraded following the associated software release notes. However, in an unlicensed environment (or any network running Enhanced Nulling software) extra precautions must be taken to migrate from EN to JD load during the P2 to P3 network expansion or replacement. As mentioned previously, the BS is offered only with JD software and not EN because of the WiMAX standard profiles. A Service Provider who is adding BSs to an existing 2.4 GHz EN network or replacing Classic equipment with BS in an unlicensed environment running EN software should review the information provided here, and follow the recommended procedures in addition to the standard procedures provided in these release notes.

L-1tation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Page 210: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix L Software Upgrade Procedures (Example)Software Upgrades

Software Upgrade BehaviorIt may be helpful to review how SSs handle software in order to plan and execute a clean EN to JD migration or expansion. During an initial upgrade to JD, after an SS receives the new load it will perform a Swap & Reset. This means the standby side of its flash memory, now containing the new JD software, becomes the Active side. It will try for 2 minutes to connect to the Basestation using the JD software before swapping back to the Standby side with the EN load. If an SS has been turned off and then powered back up after it received the new JD load, it will try for 2 minutes to connect to the Basestation before swapping back to the EN load. If the BS is not available for longer than 4 minutes and is, therefore, unable to service the SS, the SS will try to connect to the Basestation using its Active side running JD software. Then, if it does not make a connection, after 2 minutes it will swap to the EN load and try again. This time, if it fails to make a connection it will fall back to JD and remain there for 15 to 20 minutes before swapping back to the EN load again.

PlanningOnce a BS is installed and running JD software, any SS still running an EN load will not be able to communicate with the new BS. This means that the Service Provider will need to upgrade all SSs associated with that BS (or otherwise in the same geographical area) to a JD load prior to turning up the new BS. To accomplish this the Service Provider should plan and communicate the actions to be taken over a specified period of time. Following are some guidelines and explanations to help Service Providers with planning this upgrade.

• Review these entire procedures.

• Determine the number of end-users who will be impacted by the upgrade to JD. To establish a list of end-users, you can use your own customer service records; or check the number of registered users on an existing TTA system at the same site where BS will be installed; and/or export all SS data, identifying those SSs assigned to that BS.

• Plan the timeline for executing each phase of the upgrade campaign.

• Communicate the plan to your Technical Support group.

• Communicate to the end-users in advance of upgrading. Tell them to expect some short period of service outage during the upgrade.

• Provide Technical Support staff and, if needed, end-users with the tools they will need during the upgrade: BWX Modem Diagnostics tool (NavDiag). The BWX Modem Diagnostics tool is used to display the current Active load on a SS, which may be needed for troubleshooting purposes. Follow the Upgrade Procedures given below that are applicable to your scenario – an expansion installation or a TTA to BWX 8305 Basestation replacement installation.

Upgrade Procedures

Expansion Installation

When adding a BS and BWX Basestation Combiner to expand capacity at an existing BS site, follow these steps:

Step 1 Install and commission the new BS system. Refer to the installation procedures in the BWX 8305 Basestation Installation & Commissioning Guide.

L-2BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 211: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix L Software Upgrade Procedures (Example)Software Upgrades

Step 2 Download the Joint Detection CPE software to the new BS.

Step 3 From the EMS initiate a CPE Auto Upgrade for the existing BS. Do NOT enable the Upgrade Standby Load option.

L-3BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 212: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Appendix L Software Upgrade Procedures (Example)Software Upgrades

Step 4 After a pre-determined amount of time, check to see how many SSs have upgraded successfully. To do this, run an SS search against both the BSs. Some SSs may not register successfully with the new BS if the receive signal strength is better with the existing BS.

Step 5 Using the EMS, download the Basestation JD software to the target BS.

Step 6 Perform a Swap & Reset to switch the existing BS to the JD load.

Step 7 Verify that the SSs on the existing BS successfully register, communicate, and pass traffic.

Step 8 After a pre-determined period of time, upgrade the Standby side of all SSs to the JD load using both the existing BS and the new BS. Again, you may have to unicast to upgrade the Standby side of some SSs.

Replacement Installation

If you are replacing a Ripwave TTA Basestation with a BWX 8305 Basestation, follow these procedures:

Step 1 Download the Joint Detection CPE software to the Ripwave TTA BTS.

Step 2 Using BWX EMS initiate an SS Auto Upgrade. Do NOT enable Upgrade Standby Load.

Step 3 After a pre-determined amount of time, check to see how many SSs upgraded successfully. To do this, perform an SS search for the target Ripwave TTA Basestation. If the percentage of SSs that upgraded is high, it may be acceptable to convert the Ripwave TTA Basestation to JD. If the percentage is not very high, you should probably continue the Auto Upgrade. For SSs in lower signal areas you may need to unicast or use the Update Tool provided by Cisco to perform a local conversion from EN to JD.

Step 4 Using the BWX EMS download the BTS JD software to the target Ripwave TTA Basestation.

Step 5 Perform a BTS Swap & Reset to switch the Ripwave TTA Basestation to the JD load.

Step 6 Verify that all SSs successfully register, communicate, and pass traffic.

Step 7 After a pre-determined period of time, upgrade the Standby side of all SSs to JD. Again, you may have to unicast to upgrade the Standby side of some SSs.

Step 8 After a pre-determined period of time, replace the Ripwave TTA Basestation with the BWX 8305 Basestation.

L-4BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 213: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

BWX 8305OL-16336-02

G L O S S A R Y

Numerics

802.11 Stands for: 802.11 Standard

An IEEE LAN standard for wireless Ethernet replacement technology in the ISM band. Runs at up to 10 Mbps.

A

ACC Stands for: Access Channel or Access Code Channel

AKA, Paging Channel. The signal path that tells a mobile to prepare for an incoming call.

ACK Stands for: Acknowledge

Positive message sent by a protocol to acknowledge reception of a transmitted packet

AP Stands for: Access Point

Wireless LAN transceiver that acts as a center point of an all-wireless network or as a connection point between wireless and wired networks.

ARP Stands for: Address Resolution Protocol

The function of the ARP is to match higher-level network IP addresses with the physical hardware address of a piece of equipment.

ARQ Stands for: Automatic Repeat reQuest

A protocol for error control in data transmission that automatically requests the transmitter to resend a packet when the receiver detects an error in the packet.

ASYNCH Stands for: Asynchronous

Not occurring at regular intervals, as in data piped over a network

AWG Stands for: American Wire Gauge

A measure of thickness of copper, aluminum or other wiring in the U.S.

GL-1 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Page 214: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Glossary

B

BB Stands for: Broadband

RF system with constant data rate of 1.5 Mbps or higher.

BBU Stands for: Battery Backup Unit

Equipment used to keep a BWX Basestation operating in the event of a power outage

BCC Stands for: Broadcast Code (or Control) Channel

A channel of data transmitted by one entity and received by many devices.

BoM Stands for: Bill of Materials

List of the actual equipment to be manufactured and shipped to the installation site.

BS Stands for: Basestation

Network Access equipment and software that transmits and receives, as well as processes, voice or data calls from mobile units to network connections. Basestation can refer to the Basestation equipment itself (the BWX 8305) or to the BWX Basestation collectively consisting of either the BWX 8305 or BWX 2305, the BWX Basestation Antenna, and the BXW 8303 Basestation TIming System.

BTS Stands for: Base Transceiver Station

Ripwave term. The first generation Ripwave BTS was a two-shelf rack that holds the RF modules and digital circuit cards that interpret radio signals into computer language and sends messages to and from the local or wide area network. It functions between the RFS and the EMS to handle the signaling. The second generation Ripwave BTS was a one-shelf solution, housing both digital and RF controller cards. The third generation Ripwave MX BTS is a 5.25”H x 19”W single shelf BTS that enables Service Providers to upgrade through software only to pre-WiMAX and certified WiMAX operation.

BW Stands for: Bandwidth

Frequency spectrum usable for data transfers. It describes the maximum data rate that a signal can attain on the medium without encountering significant loss of power. Usually expressed in bits per second (digital) or Hertz (analog).

BWX 110 Stands for: Broadband Wireless Access 110 Desktop Modem

SS/Modem that operates with 802.16e/WiMAX technology and provides end-users an easy liquid crystal display for signal information.

BWX 120 Stands for: Broadband Wireless Access 120 PCMCIA Modem

SS/Modem operates with 802.16e/Mobile WiMAX technology. Wireless Network Interface Card (NIC) that plugs into a user’s laptop computer to provide wireless broadband service.

GL-2BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 215: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Glossary

BWX 210 Stands for: Broadband Wireless Access 210 Desktop Modem

SS/Modem that operates with 802.16e/WiMAX technology.

BYTE Stands for: Byte

8 bits

C

CAM Stands for: 1Configuration & Alarm Manager or 2Content Addressable Memory

1An EMS functionality that is handled through a Graphical User Interface for purposes of configuring elements in the system and handling other OAM requirements. 2Module of the BWX Basestation software used to provide mappings of users to channels.

CC Stands for: 1Communications Controller or 2Cross-check

1A processor component that resides on the Digital board of the BWX Basestation. It handles all interfaces between BWX Basestation and the network. 2An EMS functionality that allows the system to perform an automated sanity check of the datafill.

CD Stands for: 1Compact Disk or 2Change Directory

1An optical disk capable of storing large amounts of data (700x floppy disk). It can be inserted into most PCs and “read” to load files onto a computer 2A software programming term in “C” language that tells the computer to go to a different location in the computer’s memory.

CDMA Stands for: Code Division Multiple Access

Digital cellular technology that uses a spread-spectrum technique where individual conversations are encoded with a random digital sequence. Increases capacity and speed of communications messages between mobile units over other types of wireless networks.

CD-ROM Stands for: Compact Disk - Read Only Memory

See “CD.” If a CD is not Read Only, computers can write data to it with that capability.

CDVT Stands for: Cell Delay Variation Tolerance

Delay variation parameter required by UBR and CBR.

CHP Stands for: Channel Processor

A processor component on the digital board of the BWX Basestation that performs the first stage of signal processing for up to 4 antennae. One Cisco Basestation has 8 antenna elements. The card performs digital-to-analog conversion (DAC) and analog-to-digital conversion (ADC) for up to 10 carriers.

CLEC Stands for: Competitive Local Exchange Carrier

A telephone company that competes with an incumbent Local Exchange Carrier (LEC).

GL-3BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 216: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Glossary

CLI Stands for: Command Line Interface

A text-based programming language through which a user communicates with an operating system or an application.

CORBA Stands for: Common Object Request Broker Agent

A standard for Network Management Systems that allows integration with NMS regardless of programming language or operating System.

CPE Stands for: Customer Premise Equipment

Communications equipment (Modem) that resides at the customer’s/subscriber’s location.

D

dB Stands for: Decibel

A logarithmic expression of the ratio between two signal power, voltage, or current levels. A decibel is one-tenth of a Bel, a seldom-used unit named for Alexander Graham Bell, inventor of the telephone.

dBd Stands for: Decibel/Dipole

A ratio, measured in decibels, of the effective gain of an antenna compared to a dipole antenna (2 horizontal rods in line with each other). The greater the dBd value the higher the gain and therefore the more acute the angle of coverage.

dBi Stands for: Decibel/Isotropic

A ratio, measured in decibels, of the effective gain of an antenna compared to an isotropic antenna (measured along axes in all directions). The greater the dBi value the higher the gain and therefore the more acute the angle of coverage.

DHCP Stands for: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

A protocol for dynamically assigning IP addresses to devices on a network.

DiffServ Stands for: Differentiated Service

Different Quality of Service (QoS) descriptions for different types of traffic, i.e., voice, video, email. The DiffServ table is where each level of QoS is defined. Equivalent to Class of Service (COS) in POTS.

DIR Stands for: Directory

A special kind of file used to organize other files into a hierarchical structure.

DL Stands for: DownLink

In this case, data messages transmitted from the Basestation to the Modem.

GL-4BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 217: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Glossary

DNS Stands for: Domain Name Server

TCP/IP networking term that is a protocol for matching objects to network (IP) addresses.

DSL Stands for: Digital Subscriber Line

A wire line service whereby users gain access to the Internet through high-speed data networks.

DSP Stands for: Digital Signal Processing/Processor

Compressing or manipulating analog signals to digital signals and vice-versa.

E

EID Stands for: Equipment Identifier

Field in EMS for assigning IP address or name to individual pieces of equipment for purposes of configuring the system.

EGU Stands for: External GPS Unit

Precise clocking source for Mobile WiMAX Basestations

EMS Stands for: Element Management System

An application that allows the user to define and manipulate managed objects as a system within an overall network.

enet Stands for: Ethernet

The most widely installed local area network (LAN) technology. Ethernet is specified in the IEEE 802.3 standard and typically uses coaxial cable or a special grade of twisted pair wires.

ERP Stands for: Effective Radiated Power

The actual power in Watts radiated from a transmitter’s antenna.

F

FCC Stands for: Federal Communications Commission

United States government regulatory agency that supervises, licenses and otherwise controls electronic and electromagnetic transmission standards.

FE Stands for: Far End

A relative term that refers to the receiving element in a network, as opposed to the near-end element that is transmitting data.

GL-5BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 218: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Glossary

FEC Stands for: 1Forward Error Correction or 2Fast Ethernet Controller

1A system of error control for data transmission wherein the receiving device has the capability to detect and correct any character or code block that contains fewer than a predetermined number of symbols in error. 2A process created and attached during BWX Basestation booting for the 10/100 Ethernet ports on the BWX Basestation.

FTP Stands for: File Transfer Protocol

A TCP/IP method consisting of a client and server and used to transfer files between two or more sites or elements in a network.

G

Gain Stands for: Gain

Ratio of the output amplitude of a signal to the input amplitude of a signal, expressed in decibels (dB).

Gb Stands for: Gigabit

One billion (1,000,000,000) bits.

GB Stands for: Gigabyte

One billion (1,000,000,000) bytes.

GHz Stands for: Gigahertz

One billion (1,000,000,000) hertz - cycles per second. Ultra high frequency (UHF) signals, including microwave signals.

GPS Stands for: Global Positioning System

A constellation of 24 well-spaced satellites that orbit the earth and enable users with GPS receivers to pinpoint their exact geographical position.

GUI Stands for: Graphical User Interface

A graphics-based rather than purely text-based user interface to a computing system.

H

HW Stands for: Hardware

Physical, tangible equipment

Hz Stands for: Hertz

1 cycle per second.

GL-6BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 219: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Glossary

I

I&C Stands for: Installation & Commissioning

Term used to describe the procedures of physically installing technical equipment then powering up the equipment to make sure it will operate (to put it “into commission”).

IEC Stands for: Inter-exchange Carrier

Also IXC. Public switching network service provider (carrier) that connects across and between local exchange carriers (LEC).

IF Stands for: Interface Processor

Component on the digital board of the BWX Basestation that takes the analog signal from the Channel Processor (CHP) and converts it to a baseband signal before sending it on to the RF modules for transmission (forward link), and vice-versa (reverse link).

inet Stands for: Internet

A worldwide system of computer networks in which users at any one computer can, if they have permission, get information from any other computer (and sometimes talk directly to users at other computers.)

IP Stands for: Internet Protocol

A TCP/IP protocol used to route data from its source to its destination.

ISM Stands for: Industrial, Scientific and Medical

Unlicensed band around 2.4 MHz

ISP Stands for: Internet Service Provider

A company that provides access to the Internet.

K

Kb Stands for: Kilobit

1,024 bits

KB Stands for: Kilobyte

1,024 bytes

KHz Stands for: Kilohertz

1,000 hertz.

GL-7BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 220: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Glossary

L

L1 Stands for: Layer 1

Physical Layer. Part of the OSI rules and standards for network management. L1 describes the physical layer, or electrical and mechanical port-to-port connections, in the network.

L2 Stands for: Layer 2

Data Link Layer. Part of the OSI rules and standards for network management. L2 describes the data link layer where data is set up and torn down in a specific format (frames), through the overall network. Also responsible for detecting and correcting errors by requesting retransmission.

L3 Stands for: Layer 3

Network Layer. Part of the OSI rules and standards for network management. L3 describes the network addressing that gets data to its destination within the network, i.e., IP addressing.

LAN Stands for: Local Area Network

A data network of interconnected computers, servers, printers, and other peripherals that communicate at high speeds over short distances, usually within the same building. Also allows for sharing of resources.

LCP Stands for: Link Control Protocol

Basis of the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) scheme for negotiating and establishing connections.

LED Stands for: Light-emitting Diode

An electronic device that lights up when electricity passes through it. Often used to indicate equipment or system state.

LLC Stands for: Logical Link Controller

A protocol that governs the transition of frames between data stations regardless of how the medium is shared. It’s the upper sub-layer that further defines the Media Access Control (MAC) protocol. It provides the basis for an unacknowledged connectionless service on a LAN - i.e., error correction, multiplexing, broadcasting.

LOS Stands for: Line-of-sight

Describes laser, microwave, RF, and infrared transmission systems that require no obstruction in a direct path between the transmitter and the receiver.

M

MAC Stands for: Media Access Control

Protocol that governs access to a network in order to transmit data between nodes. In a wireless LAN, the MAC is the radio controller protocol (L2).

GL-8BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 221: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Glossary

Mb Stands for: Megabit

One million (1,000,000) bits.

MB Stands for: Megabyte

One million bytes. Literally - 1,048,576 bytes.

Mbps Stands for: Megabits Per Second

Transmission speed at rate of one million bytes per second.

MCSB Stands for: Multi-carrier Synchronous Beamforming

Multiple Access technology used by Cisco Mobile WiMAX systems

MDM Stands for: Modulator/Demodulator (Modem) Component

A component on the digital board in the BWX Basestation that converts digital signals into analog so the signals can be transmitted over telephone lines, and vice-versa.

MHz Stands for: Megahertz

One million (1,000,000) hertz - cycles per second. Normally used to refer to how fast a microprocessor can execute instructions.

MIB Stands for: Management Information Base

A collection of managed objects used in SNMP-based networks. MIBs carry information in a standard format so external tools can analyze network management and performance.

MMDS Stands for: Multipoint Multi-channel Distribution Service

Fixed wireless, high-speed local service that operates at 2.1 - 2.7 GHz. Speed 10 Mbps. Originally conceived for cable TV service.

N

NE Stands for: 1Near-end or 2Network Element

1The transmitting end, versus the receiving end, of a signal transmission. 2 A router, switch, or hub in an ISDN network.

NEC Stands for: National Electrical Code

Official rules and regulations that apply to the installation of electrical equipment in the U.S.

NIC Stands for: Network Interface Card

A small card that is installed in a laptop computer so that it can be connected to a network wirelessly. Network interface cards include the PCMCIA card.

GL-9BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 222: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Glossary

NID Stands for: Network Identifier

Service Provider’s unique identification for their BWX Mobile WiMax network.

NLOS Stands for: Non Line-of-site

Describes laser, microwave, RF, and infrared transmission systems that can penetrate obstructions in the path between the transmitter and the receiver.

NMS Stands for: Network Management System

A product that helps manage a network generally hosted on a well-equipped computer such as an engineering workstation. The system tracks network statistics and resources.

NOC Stands for: Network Operations Center

A centralized point, much like a traffic control tower, where technicians or engineers can monitor network activity, alarms, and statistics, as well as make network configuration and other changes dynamically. For Internet, the NOC is often a hub for ISP services.

O

OAM Stands for: Operation, Administration, Maintenance

A set of network management functions. Also describes the human-machine interface tasks - i.e., to operate the system, to administer the system, and to maintain the system.

OS Stands for: Operating System

A software program that manages the basic operation of a computer. Most operating Systems are either based on

OSI Stands for: Open Systems Interconnection

An ISO model for worldwide communications that defines 7 layers of network protocol: L1 Physical Layer; L2 Data Link Layer; L3 Network Layer; L4 Transport Layer; L5 Session Layer; L6 Presentation Layer; L7 Application Layer.

OTA Stands for: Over-the-Air

A standard for the transmission and reception of application-related information in a wireless communications system.

P

PC Stands for: Personal Computer

Any IBM-compatible computer, so named because IBM’s first commercial end-user computer was called a PC.

GL-10BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 223: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Glossary

PCB Stands for: Printed Circuit Board

A hardware module that holds electronic circuitry and usually fits into a larger frame where the various PCBs are interconnected electronically.

PDU Stands for: Packet Data Unit or Protocol Data Unit

A data packet. Refers to that which is exchanged between peer-layer entities. Contains header, data, and trailer information.

Ping Stands for: Ping

Generalized term from sonar science, where a short sound burst is sent out and an echo or “ping” is received. Used to determine if signals or packets have been dropped, duplicated, or reordered.

POTS Stands for: Plain Old Telephone Service

An expression in the telecommunications industry for backbone telephone networks. See, also, PSTN.

PPPoE Stands for: Point-to-point Protocol Over Ethernet

A protocol that allows dial-up Internet connections. Includes the Link Control Protocol as well as Network Control Protocols.

Propagation Stands for: Propagation

To spread out and affect a greater area; travel through space, as in radio waves.

PSK Stands for: Phase Shift Keying

Digital transmission term that means an angle modulation where the phase of the carrier varies in relation to a reference or former phase. An encoded shift. Each change of phase carries one bit of information, where the bit rate equals the modulation rate.

PSN Stands for: Packet Switched Network

A network in which data is transferred in units called packets. Packets can be routed individually and reassembled to form a complete message at the definition.

PSTN Stands for: Public Switched Telephone Network

Typically used in the same context as POTS. Analogous to a network of major highways originally built by a single organization but added to and expanded by multiple organizations. AKA, backbone networks.

GL-11BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 224: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Glossary

Q

QAM Stands for: Quadrature Amplitude Modulation

A bandwidth conservation process routinely used in modems. Creates higher throughput but decreased coverage area.

QoS Stands for: Quality of Service

A guaranteed throughput for critical network applications, such as Voice over IP. Term primarily used in an ATM environment. Five classes of service: Class 1 Video; Class 2 Audio; Class 3 Data Connection. See, also, DiffServ.

R

RAM Stands for: 1Random Access Memory or 2Responsibility Assign Matrix

1Computer memory that can be accessed randomly. 2A document used to plan BWX Basestation deployments, defining who is responsible for performing each task.

RBW Stands for: Resolution Band Width

A parameter set on the spectrum analyzer during insertion loss measurements

RF Stands for: Radio Frequency

A portion of the electromagnetic spectrum in the frequency range between audio and infrared: 100 KHz to 20 GHz. RF measurements are expressed in Hz (unit for measuring frequency); MHz = 1 Million Hz; GHz = 1 Billion Hz.

RFS Stands for: Radio Frequency Subsystem

A term for the antenna portion of the Basestation.

RH Stands for: Relative Humidity

he amount of water vapor in the air, given as the percent of saturation humidity, generally calculated in relation to saturated vapor density.

RMS Stands for: Root Mean Square

The most common mathematical method of defining the effective voltage or current of an AC wave

RS Stands for: Reed-Solomon

Reed-Solomon codes are block-based error correcting codes with a wide range of applications in digital communications.

GL-12BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 225: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Glossary

RSSI Stands for: Receiver Signal Strength Indicator

A term that describes the measure of the signal strength in kilohertz or gigahertz between the transmission and the receiving end.

Rx Stands for: Receive

An abbreviated way of expressing the term, receive, as in to receive a transmission.

S

S-CDMA Stands for: Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access

Wireless technology based on data being transferred at a fixed rate using Code Division Multiple Access algorithms.

SELV Stands for: Safety Extra Low Voltage

A secondary circuit that is designed and protected in such a way that, under normal operative conditions or under a single fault condition, its voltage does not exceed a safe value.

SLIP Stands for: Serial Line Internet Protocol

A TCP/IP protocol used for communication between two machines that are previously configured for communication with each other.

SMS Stands for: 1Short Message Service or 2Systems Management Server

1A protocol that allows mobile users to send text-based messages from one device to another. The text appears on a device’s screen and may be a maximum 160 characters in length. 2A Windows NT process that allows a network administrator to inventory all hardware and software on the network, then perform software distribution over the LAN.

SNMP Stands for: Simple Network Management Protocol

Standard management request-reply protocol for managing TCP/IP networks. A device is said to be SNMP compatible if it can be monitored or controlled using SNMP messages.

SNR Stands for: Signal-to-noise Ratio

Related to RSSI, a measurement of the intended signal being transmitted against the other entities that can interfere with the signal.

SO/HO Stands for: Small Office/Home Office

Small, remote office with a MAN or WAN connection back to a larger corporate network and/or the Internet.

SoW Stands for: Statement of Work

A document outlining the general activities that must be conducted in order to complete the installation and commissioning tasks for a BWX Basestation.

GL-13BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 226: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Glossary

SSI Stands for: Signal Strength Indicator

See “RSSI”.

SS Stands for: Subscriber Station

Communications equipment (Modem) that resides at the customer’s/subscriber’s location.

SW Stands for: Software

Computer instructions or data.

SYN Stands for: Synthesizer

A component on the digital board of the BWX Basestation which provides a local oscillator and system clock with a single calibration transceiver. It also helps perform calibration of the Basestation so that no external spectrum analyzer or signal generator is required.

SYNCH Stands for: Synchronous

Digital packets or signals that are sent at the same, precisely clocked fixed rate of speed.

T

TCC Stands for: 1Traffic Channel or 2Transmission Control Code

1A portion of a radio channel used to enable transmission of one direction of a digitized voice conversation (as opposed to the Voice Channel). 2A way of segregating traffic in order to define controlled communities of interest among subscribers.

TCP Stands for: Transport Control Protocol

A standardized transport protocol between IP-based network nodes that allows two hosts to establish a connection and exchange streams of data. TCP operates on top of Internet Protocols and handles the multiplexing of sessions, error recovery, reliability and flow; it guarantees packets are delivered in the same order in which they were sent.

TCP/IP Stands for: Transport Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

A set of protocols that allows coating computers to share resources across the network. TCP provides the reliability in the transmission, while IP provides connectionless packet service.

TDD Stands for: Time Division Duplex

A digital transmission method that combines signals from multiple sources and allows a single channel to alternately carry data in each direction of a link.

TFFS Stands for: True Flash File System

Memory in a computing device that does not lose its information when powered off. Available as a SIMM or Wireless Broadband Access Card (PC Card), it usually stores router Operating System (OS) software. Can be easily updated.

GL-14BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 227: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Glossary

TTL Stands for: Time-to-live

A field in the Internet Protocol that specifies how many more hops a packet can travel before being discarded or returned.

Tx Stands for: Transmit

To send by wire or other medium electronically or through air via electromagnetic waves to a receiving communications device.

U

UL Stands for: UpLink

Describes the direction of signal flow being sent from a subscriber to a network system, as in from a mobile device (Modem) to a Basestation.

USB Stands for: Universal Serial Bus

An external bus standard for plug-and-play interfaces between a computer and add-on devices, such as a mouse, modem, keyboard, etc. One USB port can connect up to 127 devices.

V

Vector Stands for: Vector

A quantity representative of both magnitude and direction (energy + orientation in space)

W

WCS Stands for: Wireless Communication Service

Licensed band around 2.3 GHz

WiMAX Stands for: Wireless Mobile Access

IEEE 802.16e standard for wireless broadband, mobile-access technology, which is used by Cisco’s BWX Basestation systems.

GL-15BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02

Page 228: BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

Glossary

GL-16BWX 8305 Basestation Installation and Commissioning Guide

OL-16336-02


Recommended